Sie sind auf Seite 1von 290

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

FR-D700
Inverter
Instruction Manual

FR-D740-012 to 160 - EC
FR-D740-008 to 100 - EC

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.


This Instruction Manual provides instructions for advanced use of the FR-D700 series inverters.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always read this instruction manual
and the Installation Guideline [IB-0600352ENG] packed with the product carefully to use the equipment to its
optimum performance.
1. Electric Shock Prevention

This section is specifically about safety matters

WARNING

Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the


inverter until you have read through the Instruction Manual
and appended documents carefully and can use the
equipment correctly. Do not use this product until you have
a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and
instructions.
In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not


open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric
shock.
Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover
removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed highvoltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and
get an electric shock.
Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except
for wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the
charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
Before starting wiring or inspection, switch off power,
check to make sure that the operation panel indicator is
off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has
been switched off, and check that there are no residual
voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged
with high voltage for some time after power off and it is
dangerous.
This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing
(grounding) must conform to the requirements of national
and local safety regulations and electrical code. (NEC
section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable
standards)
Use an neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for
400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard.
Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of
this equipment should be fully competent to do the work.
Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you
may get an electric shock or be injured.
Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to
prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an
electric shock.
Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress,
heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise, you may get an
electric shock.
Do not change the cooling fan while power is on. It is
dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is on.
Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity, the
DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering off.
Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering
off to prevent an electric shock.

WARNING

Assumes that incorrect handling may


cause hazardous conditions, resulting
in death or severe injury.

CAUTION

Assumes that incorrect handling may


cause hazardous conditions, resulting
in medium or slight injury, or may
cause physical damage only.

Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious


consequence according to conditions. Please follow the
instructions of both levels because they are important to
personnel safety.

2. Fire Prevention

CAUTION
Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall without holes
(so that nobody can touch the inverter heatsink on the rear
side, etc.). Mounting it to or near combustible material can
cause a fire.
If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter
power. A continuous flow of large current could cause a
fire.
When using a brake resistor, make up a sequence that will
turn off power when an alarm signal is output. Otherwise,
the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to
damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals +
and -. This could cause a fire.

A-1

3.Injury Prevention

(3) Trial run

CAUTION

CAUTION

Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual

Before

to each terminal. Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may

parameters. A failure to do so may cause some machines

occur.

to make unexpected motions.

Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct


terminals. Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur.

starting

operation,

confirm

and

adjust

the

(4) Usage

WARNING

Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent


damage, etc. Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur.

When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from

While power is on or for some time after power-off, do not

the equipment as it will restart suddenly after trip.

touch the inverter as they will be extremely hot. Doing so


can cause burns.

Since pressing

key may not stop output depending

on the function setting status (Refer to page 153), provide a

4. Additional Instructions

circuit and switch separately to make an emergency stop

Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure,

(power off, mechanical brake operation for emergency

injury, electric shock, etc.

stop, etc).

(1) Transportation and mounting

Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the

CAUTION

inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart the motor

Transport the product using the correct method that

suddenly.

corresponds to the weight. Failure to observe this could

The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only.

lead to injuries.

Connection of any other electrical equipment to the

Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number

inverter output may damage the equipment.

recommended.

Do not modify the equipment.

Ensure that installation position and material can

Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this

withstand the weight of the inverter. Install according to

manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the product.

the information in the instruction manual.

CAUTION

Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or

The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee

When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front

protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended

cover or setting dial; it may fall off or fail.

to install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for

Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.

overheat protection.

Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.

Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for

Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and

frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise, the

metal fragments or other flammable substance such as oil

life of the inverter decreases.

from entering the inverter.

Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic

As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or

interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may

subject it to impact.

be affected.

Use the inverter under the following environmental

Take measures to suppress harmonics. Otherwise power

conditions: Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.

supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/damage the

Environment

has parts missing.

Surrounding
-10C to +50C (non-freezing)
air
temperature
Ambient
90%RH maximum (non-condensing)
humidity
Storage
-20C to +65C *1
temperature
Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas,
Atmosphere
oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard
operation. After that derate by 3% for every extra
Altitude/
500m up to 2500m (91%).
vibration
5.9m/s2 or less

1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.

power factor correction capacitor and generator.


When a 400V class motor is inverter-driven, please use an
insulation-enhanced

CAUTION

or

measures

taken

to

the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,


deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed,
reset the required parameters before starting operations.
Each parameter returns to the initial value.
The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation.
Before

(2) Wiring

motor

suppress surge voltages. Surge voltages attributable to

changing

its

setting,

fully

examine

the

performances of the motor and machine.


In addition to the inverters holding function, install a

Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge

holding device to ensure safety.

suppressor/capacitor type filter on the inverter output

Before running an inverter which had been stored for a

side. These devices on the inverter output side may be

long

overheated or burn out.

operation.

The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to

For prevention of damage due to static electricity, touch

the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the motor.

nearby metal before touching this product to eliminate

period,

always

perform

static electricity from your body.

A-2

inspection

and

test

(5) Emergency stop

CAUTION
Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake
which will prevent the machine and equipment from
hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, check
for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts
of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then
remove the cause and power on the breaker.
When any protective function is activated, take the
appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and
resume operation.

(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

CAUTION
Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on
the control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.

(7) Disposal

CAUTION
Treat as industrial waste.

General instruction
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction
Manual show the inverter without a cover, or partially open.
Never operate the inverter in this manner. Always replace
the cover and follow this Instruction Manual when operating
the inverter.

A-3

CONTENTS
1

OUTLINE
1.1

Product checking and parts identification......................................... 2

1.2

Inverter and peripheral devices.......................................................... 3

1.2.1

1.3

Peripheral devices .......................................................................................................................... 4

Removal and reinstallation of the cover ............................................ 5

1.3.1

Front cover...................................................................................................................................... 5

1.3.2

Wiring cover.................................................................................................................................... 6

1.4

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design .............................. 7

1.4.1

Inverter installation environment..................................................................................................... 7

1.4.2

Cooling system types for inverter panel.......................................................................................... 9

1.4.3

Inverter placement ........................................................................................................................ 10

WIRING
2.1
2.2

13

Wiring................................................................................................. 14

2.1.1

Terminal connection diagram ....................................................................................................... 14

Main circuit terminal specifications................................................. 15

2.2.1

Specification of main circuit terminal ............................................................................................ 15

2.2.2

Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring............... 15

2.2.3

Cables and wiring length .............................................................................................................. 16

2.3

Control circuit specifications ........................................................... 19

2.3.1

Control circuit terminal .................................................................................................................. 19

2.3.2

Changing the control logic ............................................................................................................ 21

2.3.3

Wiring of control circuit ................................................................................................................. 23

2.3.4

Wiring instructions ........................................................................................................................ 25

2.3.5

Connection to the PU connector................................................................................................... 26

2.4

Connection of stand-alone option unit ............................................. 28

2.4.1

Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR)


(FR-D740-012 or more, FR-D720S-025 or more)......................................................................... 28

2.4.2

Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ........................................................................................ 30

2.4.3

Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC) .............................................................. 31

2.4.4

Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) ............................................ 32

2.4.5

Connection of a DC reactor (FR-HEL).......................................................................................... 32

3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER


3.1
I

33

EMC and leakage currents................................................................ 34

Leakage currents and countermeasures ...................................................................................... 34

3.1.2

EMC measures............................................................................................................................. 36

3.1.3

Power supply harmonics .............................................................................................................. 38

3.2

Installation of power factor improving reactor ............................... 39

3.3

Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .......................................... 40

3.4

Inverter-driven 400V class motor .................................................... 41

3.5

Precautions for use of the inverter .................................................. 42

3.6

Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter .............................. 44

4 PARAMETERS
4.1

47

Operation panel ................................................................................ 48

4.1.1

Names and functions of the operation panel ................................................................................ 48

4.1.2

Basic operation (factory setting) ................................................................................................... 49

4.1.3

Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode) ....................................................................... 50

4.1.4

Change the parameter setting value ............................................................................................ 51

4.1.5

Setting dial push ........................................................................................................................... 51

4.2

Parameter list ................................................................................... 52

4.2.1

4.3

Parameter list ............................................................................................................................... 52

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor............................. 69

4.3.1

Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) ............................................................................................. 69

4.3.2

General-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80) .................................................... 70

4.3.3

Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)........................................................................................ 73

4.3.4

Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157) ................................. 74

4.4

Limit the output frequency.............................................................. 78

4.4.1

Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18) .................................................................... 78

4.4.2

Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)................................... 79

4.5

Set V/F pattern................................................................................. 80

4.5.1

Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ............................................................................ 80

4.5.2

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) .................................................................................................... 82

4.6

Frequency setting by external terminals........................................ 84

4.6.1

Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) ............ 84

4.6.2

Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ...................................................................................................... 86

4.6.3

Remote setting function (Pr. 59) .................................................................................................. 88

4.7

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/


deceleration pattern........................................................................ 91

II

CONTENTS

3.1.1

4.7.1

Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time


(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) ............................................................................................. 91

4.7.2

Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)................................................. 93

4.7.3

Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) ................................................................................... 94

4.8

Selection and protection of a motor................................................ 95

4.8.1

Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC thermistor protection) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51,
Pr. 561) ........................................................................................................................................ 95

4.8.2

Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450) .................................................................................................... 98

4.8.3

To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96).......................................................................... 100

4.9

Motor brake and stop operation .................................................... 104

4.9.1

DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12).......................................................................................... 104

4.9.2

Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) ..................................................................... 105

4.9.3

Stop selection (Pr. 250) ............................................................................................................. 107

4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control ................ 108


4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182)................................................................. 108
4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) .................................................................... 110
4.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT) ...................... 111
4.10.4 Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250) .......................................... 112
4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190, Pr. 192)................................................................. 114
4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43) ................................................ 118
4.10.7 Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167) ................................................... 119
4.10.8 Remote output selection (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496) ........................................................... 121

4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal.................................... 122


4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37).................................................................................. 122
4.11.2 Monitor display selection of operation panel/PU and terminal AM
(Pr. 52, Pr.158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)......................................... 123
4.11.3 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)...................................... 128
4.11.4 Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901)) .................................................... 129

4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power


failure ............................................................................................. 131
4.12.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start
(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611) ................................ 131
4.12.2 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261)..................................................................... 137

4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence........................................... 139


4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ..................................................................................... 139
4.13.2 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) ................................................. 141
4.13.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249) ......................................................................... 141

4.14 Energy saving operation ................................................................ 142


III

4.14.1 Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) ........................................................................................... 142

4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260) .................................. 143
4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653)............................................................................................ 144

4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4) ....................... 145


4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) ..................................................................................... 145
4.16.2 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74).................................................. 147
4.16.3 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)) ........................................................... 148

4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction ........ 153


4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) .................................... 153
4.17.2 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)................................................................................. 156
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) .......................................................................... 157
4.17.4 Extended parameter display (Pr. 160) ....................................................................................... 157
4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)......................................................................................... 158

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location ................... 160


4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)............................................................................................. 160
4.18.2 Operation mode at power-on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) .......................................................................... 170
4.18.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication
operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551) ......................................................................................... 171

4.19 Communication operation and setting ......................................... 175


4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector ................................................................................. 175
4.19.2 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) ........................................................................... 178
4.19.3 Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502) ................. 179
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) .................................................................. 182
4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) ...................................................... 183
4.19.6 Modbus RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549) ................................................... 195

4.20 Special operation and frequency control ..................................... 207


4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) ................................................................... 207
4.20.2 Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) .................................................................... 215
4.20.3 Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597) ....................................................................................... 221
4.20.4 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886)......................... 223

4.21 Useful functions ............................................................................ 225


4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) .................................................................................. 225
4.21.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)........................................................ 226
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) .............................................................................. 230
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) ........................................................ 231

IV

CONTENTS

4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance.................... 143

4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) ............................................................................................. 233

4.22 Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel .................. 234
4.22.1 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40)............................................................................. 234
4.22.2 PU display language selection(Pr.145)...................................................................................... 234
4.22.3 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161)................................. 235
4.22.4 Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)...................................................................... 237
4.22.5 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)............................................................................................................. 238
4.22.6 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) .............................................................................................. 238

4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear ............................................ 239


4.24 Initial value change list ................................................................. 240
4.25 Check and clear of the faults history ............................................ 241

5 TROUBLESHOOTING

243

5.1

Reset method of protective function.............................................. 244

5.2

List of fault or alarm indications .................................................... 245

5.3

Causes and corrective actions ....................................................... 246

5.4

Correspondences between digital and actual characters............. 254

5.5

Check first when you have some troubles ..................................... 255

5.5.1

Motor will not start....................................................................................................................... 255

5.5.2

Motor generates abnormal noise ................................................................................................ 255

5.5.3

Motor generates heat abnormally ............................................................................................... 256

5.5.4

Motor rotates in opposite direction.............................................................................................. 256

5.5.5

Speed greatly differs from the setting ......................................................................................... 256

5.5.6

Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ..................................................................................... 256

5.5.7

Motor current is large.................................................................................................................. 256

5.5.8

Speed does not increase ............................................................................................................ 256

5.5.9

Speed varies during operation.................................................................................................... 257

5.5.10 Operation mode is not changed properly.................................................................................... 257


5.5.11 Operation panel display is not operating .................................................................................... 257
5.5.12 Parameter write cannot be performed ........................................................................................ 257

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION


6.1

259

Inspection items ............................................................................. 260

6.1.1

Daily inspection........................................................................................................................... 260

6.1.2

Periodic inspection...................................................................................................................... 260

6.1.3

Daily and periodic inspection ...................................................................................................... 261

Display of the life of the inverter parts ........................................................................................ 262

6.1.5

Checking the inverter and converter modules ............................................................................ 262

6.1.6

Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................... 262

6.1.7

Replacement of parts ................................................................................................................. 263

6.2

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers ...... 267

6.2.1

Measurement of powers ............................................................................................................. 269

6.2.2

Measurement of voltages and use of PT .................................................................................... 269

6.2.3

Measurement of currents............................................................................................................ 270

6.2.4

Use of CT and transducer .......................................................................................................... 270

6.2.5

Measurement of inverter input power factor ............................................................................... 270

6.2.6

Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals + and -) ........................................ 270

6.2.7

Insulation resistance test using megger ..................................................................................... 271

6.2.8

Pressure test .............................................................................................................................. 271

SPECIFICATIONS
7.1

273

Rating.............................................................................................. 274

7.1.1

Inverter rating ............................................................................................................................. 274

7.2

Common specifications .................................................................. 275

7.3

Outline dimension drawings........................................................... 276

APPENDIX

279

Appendix1 Index........................................................................................................... 280

VI

CONTENTS

6.1.4

MEMO

VII

OUTLINE

This chapter explains the "OUTLINE" for use of this product.


Always read the instructions before using the equipment
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Product checking and parts identification ................................. 2


Inverter and peripheral devices................................................... 3
Removal and reinstallation of the cover ..................................... 5
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design ...................... 7

<Abbreviations>
PU .................................................. Operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)

Inverter ........................................... Mitsubishi inverter FR-D700 series


FR-D700 ........................................ Mitsubishi inverter FR-D700 series
Pr. ................................................... Parameter number
PU operation .................................. Operation using the PU (operation panel/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
External operation .......................... Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation ....................... Operation using both the PU (operation panel/FR-PU04/FRPU07) and external operation
Operation panel for E500, PA02..... FR-E500 series operation panel (FR-PA02-02)
Mitsubishi standard motor .............. SF-JR
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor ... SF-HRCA

<Trademarks>
Microsoft and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
<Mark>

REMARKS :Additional helpful contents and relations with other functions are stated
NOTE

:Contents requiring caution or cases when set functions are not


activated are stated.

POINT

:Useful contents and points are stated.

Parameters referred to : related parameters are stated.

7
1

Product checking and parts identification

1.1

Product checking and parts identification

Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that
the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.

Inverter type

FR - D740 - 036 - EC
Symbol

Voltage class

D740

Three-phase 400V class

D720S

Single-phase 200V class

Displays the rated


current

Operation panel
(Refer to page 48)

Cooling fan
(Refer to page 263)

Voltage/current input switch


(Refer to page 19)

PU connector
(Refer to page 20)

Front cover
(Refer to page 5)

Standard control circuit


terminal block
(Refer to page 19)
Changing the control
logic jumper connector
(Refer to page 21)

Main circuit
terminal block
(Refer to page 15)
Combed shaped
wiring cover
(Refer to page 6)

Capacity plate
036
Inverter type

Rating plate
Serial number

Inverter type
Input rating
Output rating

FR-D740-036-EC

Serial number

Accessory

Fan cover fixing screws (M3 35mm)


These screws are necessary for compliance with the European Directive (Refer to Installation Guideline)

Type

Number

FR-D740-036 to 080
FR-D740-120, 160
FR-D720S-070, 100

1
2
1

Inverter and peripheral devices

Inverter and peripheral devices


Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power
supply specifications of the inverter.

Parameter unit (FR-PU07)


By connecting the connection cable
(FR-CB2) to the PU connector,
operation can be performed from
FR-PU07.

(Refer to page 274)

Moulded case circuit breaker


(MCCB) or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELB), fuse
The breaker must be selected carefully
since an in-rush current flows in the
inverter at power on.

RS-232C - RS-485 converter is


required when connecting to PC
with RS-232C interface.

(Refer to page 26)

(Refer to page 175)

Inverter (FR-D700)

(Refer to page 4)

The life of the inverter is influenced by


surrounding
air
temperature.
The
surrounding air temperature should be as
low as possible within the permissible
range. This must be noted especially
when the inverter is installed in an
enclosure. Refer to page 7
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the
inverter. The control signal lines must be
kept fully away from the main circuit to
protect them from noise. (Refer to page 14)

RS-485 RS-232C
Converter

Magnetic contactor (MC)


Install the magnetic contactor to ensure
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will
cause the inverter life to be shorten.

(Refer to page 40)


Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option)
Reactors (option) must be used when
power harmonics measures are taken,
the power factor is to be improved or the
inverter is installed near a large power
supply system (500kVA or more). The
inverter may be damaged if you do not
use reactors. Select the reactor according
to the model. Remove the jumpers across
terminals + and P1 to connect the DC reactor.
AC reactor (FR-HAL)

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR, MRS)

DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Braking capability can be


improved.
(Refer to page 28)

Noise filter
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Install a noise filter to reduce
the electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 1MHz to 10MHz. When
more wires are passed
through, a more effective result
can be obtained. A wire should
be wound four turns or more.

+
PR

+ P1
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Earth (Ground)

Capacitor type
filter
(FR-BIF)

Reduces the
radio noise.

U VW

OUTLINE

1.2

Noise filter
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Install a noise filter to reduce the
electromagnetic noise generated
from the inverter.
Effective in the range from about
1MHz to 10MHz. A wire should be
wound four turns at a maximum.
Motor

Brake unit
(FR-BU2)

P/+ PR
P/+
PR

High power factor


converter (FR-HC)
Power supply harmonics
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.

Power regeneration
common converter
(FR-CV)
Great braking capability
is obtained.
Install this as required.

Resistor unit (FR-BR)


Discharging resistor (GZG, GRZG)
The regenerative braking capability
of the inverter can be exhibited fully.
Install this as required.

Devices connected to the output Earth (Ground)


Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the output
side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case
circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter,
contact each manufacturer for selection of the
moulded case circuit breaker.
Earth (Ground)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground)
the motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise
from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended
to wire the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the
earth (ground) terminal of the inverter.

NOTE
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output
side. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above
devices are connected, immediately remove them.
Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional capacitor
type filter (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF common mode filter to minimize interference. (Refer
to page 36).
Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.

Inverter and peripheral devices


1.2.1

Peripheral devices

Check the inverter type of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the
capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
Motor
Inverter Type

Output

Single-Phase 200V

Three-Phase 400V

(kW)

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 1


or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (ELB) 2
Reactor connection
without

Magnetic Contactor (MC) 3


Reactor connection

with

without

with

FR-D740-012

0.4

30AF 5A

30AF 5A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D740-022

0.75

30AF 5A

30AF 5A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D740-036

1.5

30AF 10A

30AF 10A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D740-050

2.2

30AF 15A

30AF 10A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D740-080

3.7

30AF 20A

30AF 15A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D740-120

5.5

30AF 30A

30AF 20A

S-N20

S-N11, S-N12

FR-D740-160

7.5

30AF 30A

30AF 30A

S-N20

S-N20

FR-D720S-008

0.1

30AF 5A

30AF 5A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D720S-014

0.2

30AF 5A

30AF 5A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D720S-025

0.4

30AF 10A

30AF 5A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D720S-042

0.75

30AF 15A

30AF 10A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D720S-070

1.5

30AF 30A

30AF 15A

S-N10

S-N10

FR-D720S-100

2.2

30AF 40A

30AF 30A

S-N20, S-N21

S-N10

Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.


Install one MCCB per inverter.

MCCB

INV

IM

MCCB

INV

IM

For installations in the United States or Canada, use the class T type fuse certified by the UL and cUL.

Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is
used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC with class
AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.

NOTE
When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter type
and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter,
etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.

Removal and reinstallation of the cover

1.3

Removal and reinstallation of the cover

1.3.1

Front cover

FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-008 to 100
Removal (Example of FR-D740-036)
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover. (The screws cannot be removed.)
2) Remove the front cover by pulling it like the direction of arrow.

1)

2)

Installation screw

Reinstallation (Example of FR-D740-036)


1) Place the front cover in front of the inverter, and install it straight.
2) Tighten the installation screws on the front cover.

2)
OUTLINE

1)

Installation screw

FR-D740-120, 160
Removal (Example of FR-D740-160)
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover. (The screws cannot be removed.)
2) Remove the front cover by pulling it like the direction of arrow with holding an installation hook on the front cover.

Installation hook

1)

2)

Installation
screw

Removal and reinstallation of the cover


Reinstallation (Example of FR-D740-160)
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the lower side of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Tighten the installation screws on the front cover.

1)

2)

Installation screw

Fixed hook

Socket of the inverter

NOTE
Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Since
these plates have the same serial numbers, always reinstall the removed cover onto the original inverter.

1.3.2

Wiring cover

Removal and reinstallation


FR-D740-012 to 080

FR-D740-120, 160

FR-D720S-008 to 100

The cover can be removed easily by pulling it downward.


To reinstall, fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.

The cover can be removed easily by pulling it toward you.


To reinstall, fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.

Guide

Guide

Guide

Wiring cover

Example of FR-D740-036

Wiring cover

Example of FR-D740-160

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design

1.4

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design

When an inverter panel is to be designed and manufactured, heat generated by contained equipment, etc., the environment of
an operating place, and others must be fully considered to determine the panel structure, size and equipment layout. The
inverter unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of operation, operate the inverter
in the ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.

1.4.1

Inverter installation environment

As the inverter installation environment should satisfy the standard specifications indicated in the following table, operation in
any place that does not meet these conditions not only deteriorates the performance and life of the inverter, but also causes a
failure. Refer to the following points and take adequate measures.
Environmental standard specifications of inverter
Item
Surrounding air
temperature
Ambient humidity
Atmosphere

Description
-10 to +50C (non-freezing)
90%RH maximum (non-condensing)
Free from corrosive and explosive gases, free from dust and dirt

Maximum altitude

1,000m or less

Vibration

5.9m/s2 or less

(1)

Temperature

The permissible surrounding air temperature of the inverter is between -10 and +50C . Always operate the inverter within this
temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts,
capacitors and others. Take the following measures so that the surrounding air temperature of the inverter falls within the
specified range.
1) Measures against high temperature
Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 9)
Install the panel in an air-conditioned electrical chamber.
Block direct sunlight.
Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
Ventilate the area around the panel well.

OUTLINE

2) Measures against low temperature


Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
Do not power off the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter off.)
3) Sudden temperature changes
Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.

(2)

Humidity

Normally operate the inverter within the 45 to 90% range of the ambient humidity. Too high humidity will pose problems of
reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may produce a spatial electrical breakdown. The
insulation distance specified in JEM1103 "Control Equipment Insulator" is defined as humidity 45 to 85%.
1) Measures against high humidity
Make the panel enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
Take dry air into the enclosure from outside.
Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
2) Measures against low humidity
What is important in fitting or inspection of the unit in this status is to discharge your body (static electricity)
beforehand and keep your body from contact with the parts and patterns, besides blowing air of proper humidity into
the panel from outside.
3) Measures against condensation
Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-panel temperature suddenly or if the outside-air
temperature changes suddenly.
Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
Take the measures against high humidity in 1).
Do not power off the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter off.)

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design


(3)

Dust, dirt, oil mist

Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contact of contact points, reduced insulation or reduced cooling effect due to
moisture absorption of accumulated dust and dirt, and in-panel temperature rise due to clogged filter. In the atmosphere
where conductive powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in
a short time.
Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.
Countermeasures
Place in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 9)
Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-panel pressure higher than the outside-air pressure.

(4)

Corrosive gas, salt damage

If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the
relays and switches will result in poor contact.
In such places, take the measures given in Section 3.

(5)

Explosive, flammable gases

As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be
caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has
passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges). The best way is to avoid
installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.

(6)

Highland

Use the inverter at the altitude of within 1000m. If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling
effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric strength.
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).

(7)

Vibration, impact

The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9m/s2 at 10 to 55Hz frequency and 1mm amplitude. Vibration or impact, if
less than the specified value, applied for a long time may make the mechanism loose or cause poor contact to the connectors.
Especially when impact is imposed repeatedly, caution must be taken as the part pins are likely to break.
Countermeasures
Provide the panel with rubber vibration isolators.
Strengthen the structure to prevent the panel from resonance.
Install the panel away from sources of vibration.

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design


1.4.2

Cooling system types for inverter panel

From the panel that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors, etc.)
and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-panel temperature lower than the permissible
temperatures of the in-panel equipment including the inverter.
The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
1) Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (totally enclosed type)
2) Cooling by heat sink (aluminum fin, etc.)
3) Cooling by ventilation (forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type)
4) Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
Cooling System

Panel Structure

Comment
Low in cost and generally used, but the panel size increases

Natural ventilation
(enclosed, open type)

INV

as the inverter capacity increases. For relatively small


capacities.

Natural
cooling
Being a totally enclosed type, the most appropriate for hostile

Natural ventilation

environment having dust, dirt, oil mist, etc. The panel size

Fin cooling

Forced

INV

increases depending on the inverter capacity.

Having restrictions on the heatsink mounting position and

Heatsink
INV

area, and designed for relative small capacities.

1
OUTLINE

(totally enclosed type)

For general indoor installation. Appropriate for panel

Forced ventilation

INV

cooling

downsizing and cost reduction, and often used.

Heat pipe
Heat pipe

Totally enclosed type for panel downsizing.

INV

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design


1.4.3
(1)

Inverter placement

Installation of the inverter


Enclosure surface mounting
FR-D720S-008 to 042

FR-D740-012 or more
FR-D720S-070 and 100
Remove the front cover and
wiring cover to fix the inverter to
the surface.

Front cover
Front cover

Wiring cover
Wiring cover

NOTE
When encasing multiple brake units, install them in parallel as a
cooling measure.

Refer to th

(2)

Vertical

Install the inverter vertically.

e clearanc

es below.

Clearances around inverter

To ensure ease of heat dissipation and maintenance, leave at least the shown clearances around the inverter. At least the
following clearances are required under the inverter as a wiring space, and above the inverter as a heat dissipation space.
Surrounding air temperature and humidity

5cm

Inverter

Measurement
position

Clearances (front)

Measurement
position
5cm
5cm

Clearances (side)

10cm or more

1cm
or more*

1cm
or more*

1cm
or more
*

Temperature: -10 C to +50 C


Humidity: 90% RH maximum
Leave enough clearances and
take cooling measures.

(3)

Inverter

10cm or more
* When using the inverters at the surrounding
air temperature of 40 C or less, the inverters
can be installed without any clearance
between them (0cm clearance).
When surrounding air temperature exceeds
40 C, clearances between the inverters
should be 1cm or more (5cm or more for the
FR-D740-120 or more).

* 5cm or more for the FRD740-120 or more

Inverter mounting orientation

Mount the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.

(4)

Above inverter

Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be
heat resistant.

10

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design


(5)

Arrangement of multiple inverters

When multiple inverters are placed in the same


enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown
in the right figure (a). When it is inevitable to arrange
them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as
to provide guides since heat from the bottom inverters
can increase the temperatures in the top inverters,
causing inverter failures.

Inverter

When mounting multiple inverters, fully take caution not


to make the surrounding air temperature of the inverter
higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation
and increasing the panel size.

Inverter

Enclosure

Inverter

Inverter

Guide

Guide

Inverter

Inverter

Guide

Enclosure

(a) Horizontal arrangement

(b) Vertical arrangement

Arrangement of multiple inverters

Arrangement of ventilation fan and inverter

Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of


the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a
ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation
fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes
through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow
plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)

Inverter

Inverter

<Good example>

OUTLINE

(6)

<Bad example>

Placement of ventilation fan and inverter

11

MEMO

12

WIRING

This chapter describes the basic "WIRING" for use of this


product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Wiring............................................................................................. 14
Main circuit terminal specifications ............................................ 15
Control circuit specifications ...................................................... 19
Connection of stand-alone option unit ....................................... 28

7
13

Wiring

2.1

Wiring

2.1.1

Terminal connection diagram


*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Source logic
Main circuit terminal
Control circuit terminal

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the


jumper across P1- +

Single-phase power input


MCCB

Brake unit
(Option)

MC

Single-phase
AC power
supply

L1
N

*1

Earth
(Ground)

MCCB

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

PR

P1

MC

Three-phase
AC power
supply

*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS)


Install a thermal relay to prevent an
overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
(The brake resistor can not be connected
to the FR-D720S-008 and 014.)

*7

Jumper

*6

Motor

U
V
W

Inrush current
limit circuit

Earth
(Ground)

*6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the


FR-D720S-008 and 014.

IM

Main circuit

Earth (Ground)

Control circuit

Relay output
(Fault output)

STR
A

RM
RL
SD

Open collector output


RUN
Running

Terminal functions vary by Pr. 190


RUN terminal function selection

24V

Open collector output common


Sink/source common

SE
PC *2

Contact input common


24VDC power supply
Contact input common

Terminal functions vary


by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
function selection

RH

SINK

supply, take care not to


short across terminals
PC-SD.

Relay output

C
STF

SOURCE

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)


Forward
Terminal functions vary rotation start
with the input terminal Reverse
assignment (Pr. 178 to rotation start
Pr. 182)
High
speed
Multi-speed selection Middle
speed
*2 When using terminals PCLow
SD as a 24VDC power
speed

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Frequency setting signals (Analog)


10(+5V)

3
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency
can be changed by analog setting
input specifications
potentiometer
switchover (Pr. 73).
*4 Terminal input
specifications can be
changed by analog input
specifications switchover
(Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input
switch in the "V" position
to select voltage input (0
to 5V/0 to10V) and "I"
(initial value) to select
current input (4 to 20mA).

1/2W1k
*5

Terminal 4
(+)
input
(Current (-)
input)

*5 It is recommended to use 2W1k


when the frequency setting signal
is changed frequently.

AM

(+)

(-)

2 0 to 5VDC *3
(0 to 10VDC)
5(Analog common)

Analog signal output


(0 to 10VDC)

PU
connector

4 4 to 20mADC
0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC *4

Voltage/current
input switch *4

NOTE
To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables.
After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
To ensure safety, for single-phase power input specification model, connect the power input to the inverter via a
magnetic contactor and earth leakage circuit breaker or moulded case circuit breaker, and use the magnetic
contactor to switch power on-off.
The output of the single-phase power input specification is three-phase 200V.

14

Main circuit terminal specifications

2.2
2.2.1

Main circuit terminal specifications


Specification of main circuit terminal

Terminal

Terminal Name

Symbol

Description

R/L1,
S/L2,

Connect to the commercial power supply.


AC power input

Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) or

U, V, W

Inverter output

Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

+, PR

Brake resistor connection

+, -

Brake unit connection

+, P1

DC reactor connection

Remove the jumper across terminals + and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Earth (Ground)

For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

T/L3 *

power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).


Connect a brake transistor (FR-ABR, MRS) across terminals + and PR.
(The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-D720S-008 and 014.)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
or high power factor converter (FR-HC).

* When using single-phase power input, terminals are L1 and N.

2.2.2

Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring

Three-phase 400V class


FR-D740-012 to 080

FR-D740-120, 160
Jumper

Screw size (M4)

Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Screw size (M4)


R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

+ PR

PR

IM

IM

Screw size
(M4)
Power supply
Motor

WIRING

Screw size
(M4)

Power supply Motor

Single-phase 200V class


FR-D720S-008 to 042

FR-D720S-070, 100
Jumper

Jumper
Screw size (M3.5)

L1

+
Screw size (M4)
L1 N

PR
PR

Screw size
(M3.5)
Power supply

IM

IM

Screw size
(M4)
Power supply
Motor

Motor

NOTE
Make sure the power cables are connected to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. (Phase need not be matched.) Never connect the
power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
Connect the motor to U, V, W. Turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) at this time rotates the motor
counterclockwise when viewed from the load shaft.

15

Main circuit terminal specifications


2.2.3
(1)

Cables and wiring length

Applied wire size

Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to
decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.

Three-phase 400V class (when input power supply is 440V)

Applicable Inverter
Model

Crimping
Terminal

Terminal Tightening
Screw
Torque
R/L1
Size 4
Nm
S/L2 U, V, W
T/L3

Cable Size
HIV Cables, etc. (mm2) 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

AWG 2

PVC Cables, etc. (mm2)


3

Earth R/L1
R/L1
Earth
U, V, W (ground) S/L2 U, V, W S/L2 U, V, W (ground)
cable
T/L3
T/L3
cable

FR-D740-012 to 080

M4

1.5

2-4

2-4

14

14

2.5

2.5

2.5

FR-D740-120

M4

1.5

5.5-4

2-4

3.5

3.5

12

14

2.5

FR-D740-160

M4

1.5

5.5-4

5.5-4

3.5

3.5

3.5

12

12

Single-phase 200V class (when input power supply is 220V)

Applicable Inverter
Model

FR-D720S-008 to 042

Terminal Tightening
Screw
Torque
Size 4
Nm

Crimping
Terminal
L1
N

U, V, W

Cable Size
HIV Cables, etc. (mm2) 1
L1
N

Earth
U, V, W (ground)
cable

AWG 2
L1
N

U, V, W

PVC Cables, etc. (mm2)


3

L1
N

Earth
U, V, W (ground)
cable

M3.5

1.2

2-3.5

2-3.5

14

14

2.5

2.5

2.5

FR-D720S-070

M4

1.5

2-4

2-4

14

14

2.5

2.5

2.5

FR-D720S-100

M4

1.5

5.5-4

2-4

3.5

3.5

12

14

2.5

The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. Assumes
that the surrounding air temperature is 50C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.

The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75C. Assumes that the surrounding
air temperature is 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)

The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70C. Assumes that the surrounding
air temperature is 40C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)

The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
For single-phase power input, the terminal screw size indicates the size of terminal screw for L1, N, U, V, W, and a screw for earthing (grounding).

NOTE
Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque. A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit
or malfunction. A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit
breakage.
Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.

The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:

3 wire resistance[m/m] wiring distance[m] current[A]


1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
line voltage drop [V]=

16

Main circuit terminal specifications


Earthing (Grounding) precautions
Always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
1) Purpose of earthing (grounding)
Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use.
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture
an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flow into the case.
The purpose of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from getting an electric
shock from this leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, this earthing (grounding) is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers
and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast.
2) Earthing (grounding) methods and earthing (grounding) work
As described previously, earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noiseaffected malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be discriminated clearly, and the following
work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components from entering the
malfunction prevention type earthing (grounding):
(a)Where possible, use independent earthing (grounding) for the inverter. If independent earthing (grounding) (I) is
impossible, use joint earthing (grounding) (II) where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an
earthing (grounding) point. Joint earthing (grounding) as in (III) must be avoided as the inverter is connected with the
other equipment by a common earth (ground) cable.
Also a leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the earth (ground) cables of the inverter
and inverter-driven motor. Therefore, they must use the independent earthing (grounding) method and be separated
from the earthing (grounding) of equipment sensitive to the aforementioned noises.
In a tall building, it will be a good policy to use the noise malfunction prevention type earthing (grounding) with steel
frames and carry out electric shock prevention type earthing (grounding) in the independent earthing (grounding)
method.
(b)This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and
local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
Use an neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard.
(c)Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. The earth (ground) cable should be of not less than the size indicated
in the table on the previous page 16.
(d)The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter, and the ground wire length should be as short as
possible.
(e)Run the earth (ground) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run
them in parallel in the minimum distance.

Inverter

Other
equipment

(I)Independent earthing.......Best

Inverter

Other
equipment

(II)Common earthing.......Good

Inverter

Other
equipment

(III)Common earthing.......Not allowed

POINT
To be compliant with the European Directive (Low Voltage Directive),

refer to the Installation Guideline.

17

2
WIRING

(2)

Main circuit terminal specifications


(3)

Total wiring length

The overall wiring length for connection of a single motor or multiple motors should be within the value in the table
below.
200V class
Pr. 72 PWM frequency
selection Setting
(carrier frequency)

008

014

025

042

070
or More

1 (1kHz) or less

200m

200m

300m

500m

500m

30m

100m

200m

300m

500m

012

022

036

050

080
or More

200m

200m

300m

500m

500m

30m

100m

200m

300m

500m

2 to15
(2kHz to 14.5kHz)

400V class
Pr. 72 PWM frequency
selection Setting
(carrier frequency)
1 (1kHz) or less
2 to15
(2kHz to 14.5kHz)

Total wiring length (FR-D720S-070 or more, FR-D740-080 or more)

500m or less

300m

300m
300m+300m=600m

When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.(Refer to page 78)

NOTE
Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray
capacitances of the wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function, fast response current limit
function, or stall prevention function or a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected on the inverter output side.
If fast-response current limit malfunctions, disable this function. When the stall prevention function misoperates,
increase the stall level. (Refer to page 74 for Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level and Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection )
Refer to page 143 for details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection. Refer to the manual of the option for details of surge voltage
suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H).
When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with wiring length exceeding below,
select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11"). ( Refer to page 131)

Motor capacity
Wiring length

18

0.1K

0.2K

0.4K or more

20m

50m

100m

Control circuit specifications

2.3

Control circuit specifications

2.3.1

Control circuit terminal


indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (I/O terminal function selection).

(Refer to page 108).

Type

Input signal
Terminal
Symbol
STF

STR

Terminal Name
Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

RH,
RM,

Multi-speed selection

RL
Contact input common
Contact input

(sink)
External transistor
SD

common (source)
(initial setting)
24VDC power supply
common

External transistor
common (sink)
PC
Contact input common
(source) (initial setting)
24VDC power supply
10

Frequency setting power


supply
Frequency setting
(voltage)

Description
Turn on the STF signal to
start forward rotation and
turn it off to stop.
Turn on the STR signal to
start reverse rotation and
turn it off to stop.

When the STF and STR


signals are turned on
simultaneously, the stop
command is given.

Multi-speed can be selected according to the


combination of RH, RM and RL signals.

Rated Specifications
Input resistance 4.7k
Voltage when contacts are
open
21 to 26VDC
When contacts are shortcircuited
4 to 6mADC

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink


logic).
When connecting the transistor output (open collector
output), such as a programmable controller, when
source logic is selected, connect the external power

supply common for transistor output to this terminal to


prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power
supply (PC terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector
output), such as a programmable controller, when sink
Power supply voltage range
logic is selected, connect the external power supply
common for transistor output to this terminal to prevent 22 to 26.5VDC
a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
permissible load current
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source
100mA
logic).

Refer to
Page

112

84

22

Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.


Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer 5.0V 0.2VDC
for frequency setting (speed setting) from outside of
permissible load current
the inverter. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection.)
10mA
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum Input resistance10k 1k
output frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output
Permissible maximum
proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to
voltage 20VDC
5VDC input (initial setting) and 0 to 10VDC.
Current input:

WIRING

(1)

145

145

Frequency setting

Input resistance 233 5

PTC thermistor

10
2

Frequency setting
(current)

Frequency setting
common

PTC thermistor input

Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides


the maximum output frequency at 20mA and makes
input and output proportional. This input signal is valid
only when the AU signal is on (terminal 2 input is
invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch from among input 4 to
20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC. Set
the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to
select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).

Common terminal for frequency setting signal


(terminal 2 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do
not earth (ground).
For connecting PTC thermistor output.
When PTC thermistor protection is valid (Pr. 561
"9999"), terminal 2 is not available for frequency
setting.

Maximum permissible
current 30mA
Voltage input:
Input resistance10k 1k
Permissible maximum

145

voltage 20VDC
Current input
(initial status) Voltage input

Adaptive PTC thermistor


resistance:

95

100 to 30k

19

Control circuit specifications


NOTE
Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input analog signals in accordance with the settings.
Applying a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch in
"V" position (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output
devices. Refer to page 145 for details.

(2)

Output signal

Relay

Type

Terminal

Terminal Name

Symbol
A, B, C

Description

Rated Specifications

1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter

Contact capacity:230VAC

Relay output (fault

protective function has activated and the output stopped.

0.3A

output)

Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C),

(power factor =0.4)

Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C)

30VDC 0.3A

Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to


Open collector

or higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz).


RUN

Inverter running

Switched high during stop or DC injection brake operation.


(Low indicates that the open collector output transistor is on
(conducts).
High indicates that the transistor is off (does not conduct).)

Open collector output

Analog

SE

(3)

Page

114

Permissible load 24VDC


(maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
(a voltage drop is 3.4V

114

maximum when the signal


is on)

Common terminal of terminal RUN.

Select one e.g. output


frequency from monitor
items. Not output during
Output item:
inverter reset.
Output frequency (initial
Analog signal output
The output signal is
setting)
proportional to the magnitude
of the corresponding
monitoring item.

Output signal 0 to
10VDC
Permissible load current
1mA
(load impedance 10k or
more)
Resolution 8 bit

123

common

AM

Reference

Communication

Type

Terminal
Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

Reference
Page

RS-485

With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485.


Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)

PU connector

Transmission format: Multidrop link

175

Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps


Overall length: 500m

(4)

Terminal for inverter manufacturer setting


Terminal Symbol

Description

S1
S2

Keep these open. Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.


Do not remove wires for shorting across terminal S1 and SC, across terminal S2 and SC. If one of these wires

SO
SC

20

is removed, the inverter cannot be operated.

Control circuit specifications


Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to source logic (SOURCE) when
shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector above the
control terminal must be moved to the other position.
To change to sink logic, change the jumper connector in the
source logic (SOURCE) position to sink logic (SINK) position
using tweezers, a pair of long-nose pliers etc. Change the
jumper connector position before switching power on.

NOTE
Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
The capacity plate is placed on the front cover and the rating plate is on the inverter. Since these plates have the
same serial numbers, always reinstall the removed cover onto the original inverter.
The sink-source logic change-over jumper connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is fitted in both
positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged.

2
WIRING

2.3.2

21

Control circuit specifications


(1) Sink logic type and source logic type
In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal when sink logic is

Current flow concerning the input/output signal when source logic is

selected

selected
Source logic

Sink logic

PC
Current
STF

Sink
connector

STR

Current
STF

STR

Source
connector

SD

DC input (sink type)


<Example: QX40>

Inverter

RUN

TB1

DC input (source type)


<Example: QX80>

Inverter

TB1

RUN

R
R

R
TB18

SE

TB17

SE

24VDC

24VDC
Current flow

Current flow

When using an external power supply for transistor output


Sink logic type
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of the
inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply.
When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply,
do not install an external power supply in parallel with the
inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter
due to undesirable currents.)
Inverter

QY40P type transistor


output unit
TB1 STF

Source logic type


Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of the
inverter with terminal +24V of the external power supply.
When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply,
do not install an external power supply in parallel with the
inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter
due to undesirable currents.)
Inverter

QY80 type transistor


output unit
PC

24VDC
(SD)

TB1

STF

TB2

STR

Constant
voltage
circuit

TB17
PC
TB18
24VDC SD
Current flow

22

Constant
voltage
circuit

Fuse

TB17
TB18

24VDC

TB2 STR

SD

Current flow

24VDC
(SD)

Control circuit specifications


2.3.3
(1)

Wiring of control circuit

Standard control circuit terminal layout


Recommend cable size:
0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2
10

4 AM

RUN SE SO S1 S2 SC SD

(2)

RL RM RH SD PC STF STR

Wiring method

Wiring
Use a bar terminal and a cable with a sheath stripped off for the control circuit wiring. For a single wire, strip off the sheath of
the cable and apply directly.
Insert the bar terminal or the single wire into a socket of the terminal.
1) Strip off the sheath about the size below. If the length of the sheath peeled is too long, a short circuit may occur among
neighboring wires. If the length is too short, wires might come off.
Cable stripping size

Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from


becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.

10mm

2) Crimp the bar terminal.


Insert wires to a bar terminal, and check that the wires come out for about 0 to 0.5 mm from a sleeve.

e
bl

ell

Ca

WIRING

Sh
ve

ee

Sl

Check the condition of the bar terminal after crimping. Do not use a bar terminal of which the crimping is inappropriate, or
the face is damaged.

Unstranded
wires

Damaged

Wires are not inserted


into the shell

Crumpled tip

Introduced products on bar terminals :(as of Mar., 2008)


Wire Size (mm2)

Bar Terminal Model


With Insulation Sleeve
Without Insulation Sleeve

0.3, 0.5

AI 0,5-10WH

0.75

AI 0,75-10GY

A 0,75-10

AI 1-10RD

A1-10

1.25, 1.5

AI 1,5-10BK

A1,5-10

0.75 (for two cables)

AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-10GY

Maker

Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.

Bar terminal crimping tool: CRIMPFOX ZA3 (Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.)

23

Control circuit specifications


3) Insert the wire into a socket.

When using a stranded wire without a bar terminal, push a open/close button all the way down with a flathead screw
driver, and insert the wire.
Open/close button

Flathead screwdriver

Note
When using a stranded wire without a bar terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or
wires.
Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause to damage of
inverter or injury.

Wire removal
Pull the wire with pushing the open/close button all the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver.
Open/close button

Flathead screwdriver

Note
Use a small flathead screwdriver (Tip thickness: 0.4mm/tip width: 2.5mm).
If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal block may be damaged.
Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause to damage of
inverter or injury.

(3)

Control circuit common terminals (PC, 5, SE)

Terminals PC, SE and 5 are common terminals for I/O signals.(All common terminals are isolated from each other.) Do not
earth them. Avoid connecting the terminal PC and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
Terminal PC is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL). The open collector circuit is
isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 or 4) and analog signal output (AM). It should
be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN). The contact input circuit is isolated from the
internal control circuit by photocoupler

24

Control circuit specifications


(4)

Signal inputs by contactless switches

The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR,


RH, RM, RL) can be controlled using a transistor
instead of a contacted switch as shown on the right.

Inverter
PC
+24V

STF, etc.

External signal input using transistor

2.3.4

Wiring instructions

1) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power
circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
2) Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent
contact faults when using contact inputs since the control circuit input signals
are micro-currents.

3) Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control Micro signal contacts
circuit.
4) Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.

Twin contacts

5) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.

2
WIRING

If the cable gauge is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or the cables are
run improperly, resulting in a fall off of the front cover.
6) The maximum wiring length should be 30m.
7) Do not short terminal PC and SD. Inverter may be damaged.

25

Control circuit specifications


2.3.5

Connection to the PU connector

Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from the FR-PU07, enclosure surface operation panel or
a personal computer etc.
Remove the inverter front cover when connecting.

When connecting the parameter unit, enclosure surface operation panel using a connection cable
Use the optional FR-CB2
or connector and cable available on the market.
Insert the cable plugs securely into the PU connector of the inverter and the connection connector of the FR-PU07, FR-PA07
along the guide until the tabs snap into place.
Install the inverter front cover after connecting.

Parameter unit connection cable


(FR-CB2)(option)
PU connector

STF FWD PU

FR-PA07

FR-PU07

REMARKS
Overall wiring length when the parameter unit is connected: max 20m
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Examples of product available on the market (as of February, 2008)

Product
1)

26

10BASE-T cable

Type
SGLPEV-T 0.5mm 4P

Maker
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Control circuit specifications


RS-485 communication
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can
run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
The protocol can be selected from Mitsubishi inverter and Modbus RTU.

PU connector pin-outs
Pin
Number
1)

Inverter
(receptacle side)
Viewed from bottom

8) to 1)

Name
SG

Description
Earth (ground)
(connected to terminal 5)

2)

Parameter unit power supply

3)

RDA

Inverter receive+

4)

SDB

Inverter send-

5)

SDA

Inverter send+

6)

RDB

Inverter receive-

7)

SG

8)

Earth (ground)
(connected to terminal 5)
Parameter unit power supply

NOTE
Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
When making RS-485 communication between the FR-D700 series, FR-E500 series and FR-S500 series, incorrect
connection of pins No.2 and 8 (parameter unit power supply) of the above PU connector may result in the inverter
malfunction or failure.
Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.
The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.

2
WIRING

For further details, refer to page 175.


Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission form: Multidrop link
Communication speed: Maximum 38400 bps
Overall extension: 500m

27

Connection of stand-alone option unit

2.4

Connection of stand-alone option unit

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.


Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with
the corresponding option unit manual.

2.4.1

Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR)


(FR-D740-012 or more, FR-D720S-025 or more)

Install a dedicated brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR) outside when the motor is made to run by the load, quick deceleration
is required, etc. Connect a dedicated brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR) to terminal + and PR.
(For the locations of terminal + and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page 15).)
Set parameters below.
Connected Brake

Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection

Resistor

Setting

MRS type

0 (initial value)

FR-ABR

Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty Setting

Refer to page 105

10%

NOTE
The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor.

FR-D740-012 to 080
FR-D720S-070 and 100
Connect the brake resistor across terminals + and PR.

FR-D740-120 to 160
Connect the brake resistor across terminals + and PR.

Jumper *1

Jumper *1

Terminal +
Terminal PR
Terminal +
Terminal PR

Brake resistor
Brake resistor

FR-D720S-025 and 042


Connect the brake resistor across terminals + and PR.
Jumper *1
Terminal +
Terminal PR

Brake resistor
1

28

Do not remove a jumper across terminal + and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

Connection of stand-alone option unit


(1)

When using the brake resistor (MRS) and high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)

It is recommended to configure a sequence, which shuts off power in the input side of the inverter by the external thermal
relay as shown below, to prevent overheat and burnout of the brake resistor (MRS) and high duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
in case the regenerative brake transistor is damaged. (The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-D720S-008 or
014.)
<Example 1>

MC

Power supply

Thermal relay High-duty brake


(OCR) (*1)
Inverter
resistor (FR-ABR)
R/L1
R
+
S/L2
T/L3
PR

<Example 2>
Power supply

T *2

T *2

F
OFF

MC

F
ON

OFF

MC

MC

OCR
Contact

MC

Thermal relay High-duty brake


(OCR) (*1)
Inverter
resistor (FR-ABR)
R/L1
R
+
S/L2
PR
T/L3

B
ON

MC

OCR
Contact

1 Refer to the table below for the type number of each capacity of thermal relay and the diagram below for the connection.
2 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.

Brake Resistor

Voltage

200V

TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A

110VAC 5A,

MRS120W100

TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A

220VAC 2A(AC11 class)

MRS120W60

TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A

110VDC 0.5A,

MRS120W40

TH-N20CXHZ-3.6A

220VDC 0.25A(DC11class)

Power
Voltage

400V

Contact Rating

MRS120W200

Supply

200V

Thermal Relay Type


(Mitsubishi product)

High-duty

Thermal Relay Type

Brake Resistor

(Mitsubishi product)

FR-ABR-0.4K
FR-ABR-0.75K
FR-ABR-2.2K
FR-ABR-H0.4K
FR-ABR-H0.75K
FR-ABR-H1.5K
FR-ABR-H2.2K
FR-ABR-H3.7K
FR-ABR-H5.5K
FR-ABR-H7.5K

TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A
TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A
TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A
TH-N20CXHZ-0.24A
TH-N20CXHZ-0.35A
TH-N20CXHZ-0.9A
TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A
TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A
TH-N20CXHZ-2.5A
TH-N20CXHZ-3.6A

Contact Rating

1/L1

5/L3
TH-N20

110VAC 5A,
220VAC 2A(AC11 class)
110VDC 0.5A,

2/T1

220VDC 0.25A(DC11 class)

To the inverter
+ terminal

6/T3
To a resistor

NOTE
Brake resistor can not be used with the brake unit, high power factor converter, power supply regeneration converter,
etc.
Do not use the brake resistor with a lead wire extended.
Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals + and -. This could cause a fire.

29

WIRING

Power
Supply

Connection of stand-alone option unit


2.4.2

Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2(-H)) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration. If the transistors in the
brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot. To prevent unusual overheat and fire, install a magnetic
contactor on the inverter's input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.

(1)

Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor


ON

OFF

MC
MC
GRZG type
discharging resistor
MCCB

MC

R
U

Motor

S/L2

IM

T/L3

R/L1

Three-phase AC
power supply

Inverter

+
-

FR-BU2
PR

P/+

N/-1

BUE
3

SD

5m or less
1
2
3
4

Connect the inverter terminals (+ and -) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with
each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor should be within 5m. Even
when the wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of brake resistors.

<Recommended external thermal relay>


Brake Unit

Discharging Resistor

Recommended External
Thermal Relay

FR-BU2-1.5K

GZG 300W-50

TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A

FR-BU2-H7.5K

GRZG 200-10

TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A

FR-BU2-H15K

GRZG 300-5

TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A

NOTE
Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
Do not remove a jumper across terminal + and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

30

Connection of stand-alone option unit


(2)

Connection example with the FR-BR(-H) type resistor


ON

OFF

MC
MC
FR-BR
MCCB

MC

Three-phase AC
power supply

R/L1

Motor

S/L2

IM

T/L3

P
PR

TH2

FR-BU2

Inverter

PR
1

TH1

+
-

P/+

A
1

N/-

B
C

BUE 5
SD

5m or less
1
2
3
4
5

Connect the inverter terminals (+ and -) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with
each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m. Even
when the wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
Normal: across TH1-TH2...close, Alarm: across TH1-TH2...open
A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the initial status.

NOTE
Do not remove a jumper across terminal + and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC)

When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown
below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.
Outside box
(FR-HCB)
MC1
MC2

Reactor 1
(FR-HCL01)
MCCB

Three-phase
AC power
supply

High power factor converter


(FR-HC)
Reactor 2
(FR-HCL02)

MC1
MC2

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U
V
W

Motor
IM

MC

R
S
T

R2
S2
T2

R2
S2
T2

R3
S3
T3

R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4

R4
S4
T4

P
N

RDY
RSO
R
SE
S Phase
detection
T

1
2

Inverter

+
MRS
RES
SD

3
3

Always keep the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals + and - (between P and +, between N and -). Opposite polarity of terminals - and + will damage the
inverter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the MRS, RES signal. (Refer to page 108)

NOTE
The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
Use sink logic when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC cannot be connected when source logic (factory setting) is
selected.
Do not remove a jumper across terminal + and P1.

31

WIRING

2.4.3

Connection of stand-alone option unit


2.4.4

Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)

When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), connect the inverter terminals (+ and -) and power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV) terminals as shown below so that their symbols match with each other.

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U
*1

IM

MCCB
Three-phase
AC power supply

MC1

Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type power


reactor (FR-CVL)
regeneration common converter
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31

R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32

R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3
R/L11
S/L21 *3
T/MC1

1
2
3
4

P/L+
N/LP24
SD
RDYA
RDYB
RSO
SE

Inverter

+
-

*2

PC
SD
MRS
RES
SD

*4
*4

Always keep the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals + and - (between P/L+ and +, between N/L- and -). Opposite polarity of terminals - and +
will damage the inverter.
Always connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1.
Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the MRS, RES signal. (Refer to page 108)

NOTE
The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
Use sink logic when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic (factory setting) is
selected.
Do not remove a jumper across terminal + and P1.

2.4.5

Connection of a DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it across terminals + and P1.
In this case, the jumper connected across terminals + and P1 must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its
performance.
P1

+
FR-HEL

Remove the jumper.

NOTE
The wiring distance should be within 5m.
The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer
to page 16)

32

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE


OF THE INVERTER

This chapter explains the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE


INVERTER" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment

3.1

EMC and leakage currents .......................................................... 34

3.2

Installation of power factor improving reactor ......................... 39

3.3

Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC) .................................... 40

3.4

Inverter-driven 400V class motor ................................................ 41

3.5

Precautions for use of the inverter ............................................ 42

3.6

Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter ........................ 44

7
33

EMC and leakage currents

3.1

EMC and leakage currents

3.1.1

Leakage currents and countermeasures

Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current
flows. Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the
increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following measures. Select
the earth leakage current breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier frequency setting.

(1)

To-earth (ground) leakage currents

Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the earth (ground) cable,
etc. These leakage currents may operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
Suppression technique
If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selectionmakes the sound inoffensive.
By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line and other
line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
To-earth (ground) leakage currents
Take caution as long wiring will increase the leakage current. Decreasing the carrier frequency of the inverter reduces the
leakage current.
Increasig the motor capacity increases the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400V class is larger than that of
the 200V class.

(2)

Line-to-line leakage currents

Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitances between the inverter output cables may operate the external
thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the 400V class small-capacity model (FR-D740160 or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated
motor current increases.
Line-to-line leakage current data example
Motor Capacity

Rated Motor

(kW)

Current (A)

0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

1.1
1.9
3.5
4.1
6.4
9.7
12.8

Motor: SF-JR 4P

Leakage Current (mA) *


Wiring length 50m
Wiring length 100m
620
680
740
800
880
980
1070

Carrier frequency: 14.5kHz


Used wire: 2mm2, 4 cores

1000
1060
1120
1180
1260
1360
1450

Cabtyre cable

*The leakage currents of the 200V class are about a half.

MCCB
Power
supply

MC

Thermal relay

Motor
IM

Inverter
Line-to-line static
capacitances

Line-to-line leakage currents path


Measures
Use Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature
sensor to directly detect motor temperature.
Installation and selection of moulded case circuit breaker
Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input side.
Select the MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor (which depends on the power supply voltage, output
frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity must be selected
since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an
earth leakage current breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and surge
suppression.

34

EMC and leakage currents


(3)

Selection of rated sensitivity current of earth (ground) leakage current breaker

When using the earth leakage current breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows,
independently of the PWM carrier frequency.

80
60
40
20

1.0
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.07
0.05
0.03
0.02
0.1 0.2

2 3.5 8 142238 80150


5.5
30 60 100

Example of leakage current per 1km during


the commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit
(Three-phase three-wire delta
connection 400V60Hz)
leakage currents (mA)

100

(200V 60Hz)
Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

120

Leakage currents in wire path during commercial


power supply operation
Ign:Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter
Igm:Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply
operation
Igi:Leakage current of inverter unit

Example of leakage current


of three-phase induction motor
during the commercial
power supply operation

Example of leakage current of


cable path per 1km during the
commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in
metal conduit

(200V 60Hz)

Ig1, Ig2:

Cable size (mm2)

0.75 2.2 5.5 11 20


0.4
1.5 3.7 7.5 15

Motor capacity (kW)

120
100
80
60
40
20
0

Example of leakage current of threephase induction motor during the


commercial power supply operation
(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
type motor 400V60Hz)
leakage currents (mA)

Breaker designed for harmonic and


surge suppression
Rated sensitivity current:
In10(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm)
Standard breaker
Rated sensitivity current:
In10{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3(Ig2+Igm)}

2 3.5 8 142238 80150


5.5
30 60100

2. 0
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
0. 3
0. 2
0. 1

1.5
2.2

3.7 7.5 15
5.5 11 20

Cable size (mm )


Motor capacity (kW)
For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
2

<Example>
Breaker Designed for
Harmonic and Surge
Suppression
5.5mm2 5m
Noise
filter

3
IM 400V
2.2kW

Inverter

Ig1

Ign

Ig2

Igm

Leakage current Ign (mA)


Leakage current Igi (mA)
Leakage current Ig2 (mA)

Igi

Motor leakage current Igm (mA)


Total leakage current (mA)
Rated sensitivity current (mA) ( Ig 10)

5m

1
66
3

= 0.11

1000m
0 (without noise filter)
1

1
66
3

60m

= 1.32

1000m
0.36

2.79
30

6.15
100

NOTE
Install the earth leakage breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against an earth (ground) fault in the
inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations
and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even
if the effective value is less than the rating.
In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature
rise.
General products indicate the following models. ...... BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, NV-2F earth leakage
relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection
The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression ....NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BVC2, earth leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H

35

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

ELB

Leakage current Ig1 (mA)

5.5mm2 60m

Standard Breaker

EMC and leakage currents


3.1.2

EMC measures

Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter to malfunction it and others are radiated by the inverter to malfunction
peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to have high immunity performance, it handles low-level signals, so it
requires the following basic techniques. Also, since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency, that could generate
electromagnetic noises. If these electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, EMI measures should be
taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on EMI paths.
(1) Basic techniques
Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
Use twisted shield cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the shield
cables to terminal SD.
Earth (Ground) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
(2) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter and malfunction the inverter (Immunity measures)
When devices that generate many electromagnetic noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays,
for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunctioned by electromagnetic noises, the following
measures must be taken:
Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises.
Fit data line filters (page 37) to signal cables.
Earth (Ground) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
(3) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices (EMI
measures)
Inverter-generated electromagnetic noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter
and inverter main circuits (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral
devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Inverter
generated
electromagnetic
noise

Air propagated
electromagnetic
noise

Electromagnetic
induction noise

Noise directly
radiated from inverter

Path 1)

Noise radiated from


power supply cable

Path 2)

Noise radiated from


motor connection cable

Path 3)

(5)

Telephone

(7)

(7)
(2)

Path 4), 5)

Sensor
power supply

(1)
Electrostatic
induction noise
Electrical path
propagated noise

36

Path 6)

Instrument

Noise propagated through


power supply cable

Path 7)

Noise from earth (ground)


cable due to leakage
current

Path 8)

Receiver

(3) Inverter
(6)

(1)

(4)
Motor

IM

(3) Sensor

(8)

EMC and leakage currents


Propagation Path

Measures
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g.
instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal
cables are run near the inverter, the devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated electromagnetic noises. The
following measures must be taken:

(1)(2)(3)

Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
Insert common mode filters into I/O and capacitors between the input lines to suppress cable-radiated noises.
Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises
may be propagated to the signal cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken:
Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.

(4)(5)(6)

Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the I/O cables of the inverter.
Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same line,
inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to malfunction the devices and the

(7)

following measures must be taken:


Install the common mode filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cable) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may

(8)

flow through the earth (ground) cable of the inverter to malfunction the device. In such a case, disconnection of the
earth (ground) cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly.

Data line filter


As immunity measures it may effective, provide a data line filter for the detector cable etc.

EMC measures
FR- BLF
FR- BSF01

on inverter input side.

Decrease
Enclosure carrier frequency

Inverter
power
supply
Install capacitor type FR-BIF filter
on inverter input side.
Separate inverter and power
line by more than 30cm (at
least 10cm) from sensor circuit.
Control
power
supply
Do not earth (ground)
enclosure directly.

FRBSF01

Inverter

FRBIF

Power
supply
for sensor

Install common mode filter

FR- BLF
FR- BSF01

on inverter output side.

FRBSF01

IM Motor
Use 4-core cable for motor
power cable and use one
cable as earth (ground) cable.

Use a twisted pair shielded cable


Sensor

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

Install common mode filter

Do not earth (ground) shield but


connect it to signal common cable.

Do not earth (ground) control cable.

NOTE
For compliance with the EU EMC directive, please refer the Installation Guideline.

37

EMC and leakage currents


3.1.3

Power supply harmonics

The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power capacitor
etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and transmission path.
Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
The differences between harmonics and RF noises are indicated below:
Item
Frequency
Environment
Quantitative understanding

Harmonics

Noise

Normally 40th to 50th degrees or less


(up to 3kHz or less)

High frequency (several 10kHz to 1GHz order)

To-electric channel, power impedance

To-space, distance, wiring path

Theoretical calculation possible

Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult


Change with current variation ratio (larger as switching

Generated amount

Nearly proportional to load capacity

Affected equipment immunity

Specified in standard per equipment

Different depending on maker's equipment specifications

Provide reactor.

Increase distance.

Suppression example

speed increases)

Suppression technique
The harmonic current generated from the inverter
to the input side differs according to various
conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether
a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and
output current on the load side.
For the output frequency and output current, we
Power
understand that they should be calculated in the supply
conditions under the rated load at the maximum
operating frequency.

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

MCCB

MC
R

AC reactor
(FR-HAL)

+ P1
R/L1 U
S/L2 V

IM

T/L3 W
Inverter
Do not insert
power factor improving
capacitor.

NOTE
The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged
by the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate
overcurrent protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is
driven by the inverter. For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.

38

Installation of power factor improving reactor

3.2

Installation of power factor improving reactor

When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (500kVA or more) or when a power capacitor is to be
switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent this,
always install an optional reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL).

MCCB

MC

Power supply

AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
R

Inverter
R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

W
P1

IM

Power supply system capacity


(kVA)

Three-phase power input


1500
1000

Range requiring
installation of
the reactor

500
0
Wiring length

(m) 10

DC reactor
(FR-HEL) *

Single-phase power input


MCCB
Power supply

MC

AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
R

Inverter
L1

IM

W
P1

DC reactor
(FR-HEL) *
When connecting the FR-HEL, remove the jumper across terminals + and P1.
The wiring length between the FR-HEL and inverter should be 5m maximum and minimized.

REMARKS
Use the same wire size as that of the power supply wire (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 16)

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

39

Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)

3.3
(1)

Power-off and magnetic contactor (MC)


Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
(Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency
stop operation). When cycle operation or heavy-duty operation is performed with an optional brake resistor connected,
overheat and burnout of the discharging resistor can be prevented if a regenerative brake transistor is damaged due to
insufficient heat capacity of the discharging resistor and excess regenerative brake duty.
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3) The control power supply for inverter is always running and consumes a little power. When stopping the inverter for an
extended period of time, powering off the inverter will save power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3 MC for the inverter input side
current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.

REMARKS
Since repeated inrush currents at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times.),
frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the
inverter.

Inverter start/stop circuit example


Inverter
MCCB

MC

Three-phase AC
power supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U
V
W

T *1
C
B

Operation preparation
OFF
ON
MC

MC

As shown on the right, always use the start signal


(ON or OFF across terminals STF or STR-PC) to
make a start or stop.
* When the power supply is 400V class, install
a step-down transformer.

A
RA

MC

Motor

STF(STR)
PC

Start/Stop
Operation
RA
Stop

(2)

RA

Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the
magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate.
When an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it on/off after the inverter and
motor have stopped.

40

Inverter-driven 400V class motor

3.4

Inverter-driven 400V class motor

In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially for a
400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter,
consider the following measures:

Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:

(1)

Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring
length

For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.


Specifically,
1) Specify the "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated
motor".
3) Set Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length

Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection

(2)

50m or less

Wiring Length
50m to 100m

exceeding 100m

15 (14.5kHz) or less

8 (8kHz) or less

2 (2kHz) or less

Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) on the inverter output side.

NOTE
For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 143.
For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H), refer to the manual of each option

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

41

Precautions for use of the inverter

3.5

Precautions for use of the inverter

The FR-D700 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method may
shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the
inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 16 for the recommended wire sizes.
(5) The overall wiring length should be 500m maximum.
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease or the equipment connected to
the secondary side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity
of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 18)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional capacitor
type filter (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF common mode filter to minimize interference.
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are
connected, immediately remove them. When using capacitor type filter (FR-BIF) for single-phase power supply
specification, make sure of secure insulation of T/L3-phase, and connect to the input side of the inverter.
(8) Before starting wiring or other work after the inverter is operated, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has
been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with
high voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase to phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on.
Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Always use the start signal (turn on/off terminals STF, STR-PC) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 40)
(11) Across + and PR terminals, connect only an external regenerative brake discharging resistor. The brake resistor can not
be connected to the FR-D720S-008 and 014. Do not connect a mechanical brake.
The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-D720S-008 and 014. Leave terminals + and PR open. Also, never
short between + and PR.

42

Precautions for use of the inverter


(12) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may
damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected
incorrectly to short terminals 10-5.
(13) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2
which are used for bypass operation. When the wiring is
incorrect and if there is a bypass operation circuit as shown
right, the inverter will be damaged when the power supply is
connected to the inverter U, V, W terminals, due to arcs
generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a
sequence error.

MC1
Power
supply

Interlock
R/L1 U
S/L2 V
T/L3 W
Inverter

MC2

IM

Undesirable current

(14) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the
inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(15) Instructions for overload operation
When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of
the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal
fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting
current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and
the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough allowance for current (up to 2 rank larger in
capacity).
(16) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.

3
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

(17) When the motor speed is unstable, due to change in the frequency setting signal caused by electromagnetic noises from
the inverter, take the following measures when applying the motor speed by the analog signal.
Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
Use shield cables as signal cables.
Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).

43

Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter

3.6

Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter

When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter
fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products,
provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the
inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter,
without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be
detected.
No

Interlock Method

Check Method

Used Signals

1)

Inverter protective
function operation

Operation check of an alarm contact


Circuit error detection by negative logic

2)

Inverter running status

Operation ready signal check

3)

Inverter running status

Logic check of the start signal and


running signal

4)

Inverter running status

Logic check of the start signal and


output current

Refer to Page

Fault output signal


(ALM signal)
Operation ready signal
(RY signal)
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Running signal (RUN signal)
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Output current detection signal
(Y12 signal)
Output frequency

1) Check by the output of the inverter fault signal


When the fault occurs and trips the inverter, the fault output
signal (ALM signal) is output (ALM signal is assigned to
terminal ABC in the initial setting).
Check that the inverter functions properly.
In addition, negative logic can be set (on when the inverter is
ALM
normal, off when the fault occurs).
(when output

117
116
112, 116

112, 119

Inverter fault occurrence


(trip)

Time
ON OFF

at NC contact)
RES

ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON

3) Checking the inverter operating status by the start signal


input to the inverter and inverter running signal.
The inverter running signal (RUN signal) is output when the
inverter is running (RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN
in the initial setting).
Check if RUN signal is output when inputting the start signal
to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse
signal is STR signal). For logic check, note that RUN signal
is output for the period from the inverter decelerates until
output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence
considering the inverter deceleration time

44

Output frequency

2) Checking the inverter operating status by the inverter


Power
operation ready completion signal
supply
Operation ready signal (RY signal) is output when the
STF
inverter power is on and the inverter becomes operative.
RH
Check if the RY signal is output after powering on the
inverter.

ON

OFF
ON

OFF
ON
DC injection brake
operation point
DC injection
brake operation

Pr. 13 Starting frequency


Reset
processing

RY
RUN

Time
ON

OFF
ON

OFF

Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter


4) Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal.
The output current detection signal (Y12 signal) is output when the inverter operates and currents flows in the motor.
Check if Y12 signal is output when inputting the start signal to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse
signal is STR signal). Note that the current level at which Y12 signal is output is set to 150% of the inverter rated current
in the initial setting, it is necessary to adjust the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with
Pr.150 Output current detection level.
For logic check, as same as the inverter running signal (RUN signal), the inverter outputs for the period from the inverter
decelerates until output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time.
Output

Pr. 190, Pr. 192 Setting

signal

Positive logic Negative logic

ALM

99

199

RY

11

111

RUN

100

Y12

12

112

When using various signals, assign functions to Pr.190, Pr.192


(output terminal function selection) referring to the table on the
left.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

(2) Backup method outside the inverter


Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure
status of the inverter itself. For example, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter fault output signal, start signal
and RUN signal output, there is a case where a fault output signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output even if an
inverter fault occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the
backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
1) Start signal and actual operation check
Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to
the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the
start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is
recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.

Controller
System failure

Inverter

3
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

2) Command speed and actual operation check


Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command
and detected speed of the speed detector.

Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor

45

MEMO

46

PARAMETERS

This chapter explains the "PARAMETERS" for use of this


product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment
1
The abbreviations in the explanations below are as follows:
V/F

......V/F control,

......General-purpose magnetic-flux vector control


(Parameters without any indication are valid for both control)

GP MFVC

7
47

Operation panel

4.1
4.1.1

Operation panel
Names and functions of the operation panel

The operation panel cannot be removed from the inverter.


Operation mode indication
PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate external operation
mode.
NET: Lit to indicate network operation
mode.
PU, EXT: Lit to indicate external/PU
combined operation mode 1, 2.
Unit indication
Hz: Lit to indicate frequency.
A: Lit to indicate current.
(Off to indicate voltage and flicker to
indicate set frequency monitor.)
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter number,
etc.
Setting dial
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter dial)
Used to change the frequency setting
and parameter values.
Press to display the following.
Displays the set frequency in the
monitor mode
Currently set value is displayed during
calibration
Displays the order in the faults history
mode
Mode switchover
Used to change each setting mode.
Pressing

simultaneously changes

the operation mode. (Refer to page 54)


Pressing for a while (2s) can lock
operation.
(Refer to page 261)
Determination of each setting
If pressed during operation, monitor
changes as below;

Running frequency

Output current

Output voltage

48

Operating status display


Lit or flicker during inverter operation.
* On:

Indicates

that

forward

rotation

operation is being performed.


Slow flickering (1.4s cycle):
Reverse rotation operation
Fast flickering (0.2s cycle):

When

was pressed or the start

command was given, but the operation


can not be made.
When the frequency command is less
than the starting frequency.
When the MRS signal is input.
Parameter setting mode
Lit to indicate parameter setting mode.
Monitor indication
Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
Stop operation
Used to stop Run command.
Fault can be reset when protective
function is activated (fault).
Operation mode switchover
Used to switch between the PU and
external operation mode.
When using the external operation mode
(operation using a separately connected
frequency setting potentiometer and start
signal), press this key to light up the EXT
indication.
(Press

simultanesouly (0.5s) (Refer

to page 54), or change Pr. 79 setting to


change to combined mode .)
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Cancels PU stop also.
Start command
The rotation direction can be selected by
setting Pr. 40.

Operation panel
4.1.2

Basic operation (factory setting)

Operation mode switchover


At powering on (external operation mode)

Parameter setting

Monitor/frequency setting

PU Jog operation mode

(Example)

PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)

Value change

and frequency flicker.


Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!

Output current monitor

STOP

Output voltage monitor

Display the
current setting

Parameter setting mode (Refer to page 51)

(Example)

Parameter and a setting value


flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!

Value change

Parameter clear

All parameter
clear

Faults history clear

4
PARAMETERS

Faults history

Initial value
change list

[Operation for displaying faults history] (Refer to page 241)


Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists,

is displayed.

49

Operation panel
4.1.3

Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)

Setting of Pr. 79 Operation mode selection according to combination of the start command and speed command can be
easily made.
Operation
example

Start command: external (STF/STR), frequency command: operate with

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

and

3. Turn

until

Flickering

for 0.5s.

Flickering

appears.

(refer to the table below for other settings)


Flickering

Operation Panel Indication

Operation Method
Start command
Frequency command

Flickering

Flickering
Flickering

External

Analog

(STF, STR)

voltage input

Flickering
Flickering

External
(STF, STR)
Flickering
Flickering

Analog
voltage input
Flickering

4. Press

to set.

Flicker Parameter setting complete!!


The monitor display appears after 3s.

REMARKS
is displayed ... Why?
Parameter write is disabled with "1" set in Pr. 77.
is displayed ... Why?
Setting can not be made during operation. Turn the start switch (
Press

before pressing

, STF or STR) off.

to return to the monitor display without setting. In this case, the mode changes to external

operation mode when performed in the PU operation mode (PU JOG operation mode) and PU operation mode when performed
in the external operation mode.
Reset can be made with

50

Operation panel
4.1.4
Changing
example

Change the parameter setting value


Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting.

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

to choose the PU operation mode.

3. Press

to choose the parameter setting

PU indication is lit.

PRM indication is lit.

mode.
(The parameter number read previously
appears.)

4. Turn

until

5. Press
"

to read the currently set value.


"(120.0Hz (initial value) appears.

6. Turn
"

(Pr. 1) appears.

to change the set value to


" (50.00Hz).

7. Press

to set.

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!


Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to show the setting again.

Press

twice to show the next parameter.

Press

twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.

REMARKS
to

is displayed...Why?

appears .................... Write disable error

appears .................... Write error during operation

appears .................... Mode designation error


(For details, refer to page 246.)
The number of digits displayed on the operation panel is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed and set. If the
values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals can not be displayed nor set.
(Example) For Pr. 1
When 50Hz is set, 50.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed and second decimal place is not displayed nor set.

4.1.5

Setting dial push

Push the setting dial (

) to display the set frequency* currently set.

* Appears when PU operation mode or external/PU combined operation mode 1 is selected (Pr. 79 ="3").

51

PARAMETERS

appears .................... Calibration error

Parameter list

4.2.1

Parameter list
Parameter list

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made
from the operation panel. For details of parameters, refer to the instruction manual.
These instruction codes are used for parameter read and write by using Mitsubishi inverter protocol with the RS-485 communication.

REMARKS

(Refer to page 204 for RS-485 communication)


" " indicates valid and "" indicates invalid of "control mode-based correspondence table", "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".

indicates simple mode parameters.


The parameters surrounded by a black border in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial

Parameter List

4.2

Parameter list

value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

JOG

operation

Acceleration/

deceleration time

Stall

setting

Multi-speed

prevention

52

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum
Setting
Increments

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Torque boost
Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
Base frequency
Multi-speed setting (high speed)
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
Acceleration time
Deceleration time

0 to 30%
0 to 120Hz
0 to 120Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 3600s
0 to 3600s

0.1%
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.1s
0.1s

Electronic thermal O/L relay

0 to 500A

0.01A

10

DC injection brake operation frequency

0 to 120Hz

11

DC injection brake operation time

12

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

Customer
Setting

Parameter

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

Remarks

Read

Write

Extended

6/4/3% 1
120Hz
0Hz
50Hz
50Hz
30Hz
10Hz
5/10s 2
5/10s 2
Rated
inverter
current

69
78
78
80
84
84
84
91
91

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08

80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

95

09

89

0.01Hz

3Hz

104

10

0A

8A

0 to 10s

0.1s

0.5s

104

11

0B

8B

DC injection brake operation voltage

0 to 30%

0.1%

6/4% 3

104

12

0C

8C

13
14

Starting frequency
Load pattern selection

0 to 60Hz
0 to 3

0.01Hz
1

0.5Hz
0

93
82

13
14

0D
0E

8D
8E

0
0

15

Jog frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

5Hz

86

15

0F

8F

16

Jog acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600s

0.1s

0.5s

86

16

10

90

17
18
19

MRS input selection


High speed maximum frequency
Base frequency voltage

0, 2, 4
120 to 400Hz
0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999

1
0.01Hz
0.1V

0
120Hz
8888

110
78
80

17
18
19

11
12
13

91
92
93

0
0
0

20

Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency

1 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

50Hz

91

20

14

94

22

Stall prevention operation level

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

74

22

16

96

23

Stall prevention operation level


compensation factor at double speed

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

74

23

17

97

24
25
26

Multi-speed setting (speed 4)


Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz

9999
9999
9999

84
84
84

24
25
26

18
19
1A

98
99
9A

0
0
0

27

Multi-speed setting (speed 7)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

84

27

1B

9B

29

Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection

0, 1, 2

94

29

1D

9D

V/F

GP MFVC

Parameter
Copy

Clear

All clear

4
PARAMETERS

brake

DC injection

Basic functions

Function

Parameter list

Parameter list

0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0, 0.01 to 9998
0, 1
0 to 100%
0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.001
1
0.1%
0.01Hz

0 to 400Hz, 9999

30

Regenerative function selection

0, 1, 2

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42

Frequency jump 1A
Frequency jump 1B
Frequency jump 2A
Frequency jump 2B
Frequency jump 3A
Frequency jump 3B
Speed display
RUN key rotation direction selection
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Output frequency detection

43

Output frequency detection for reverse


rotation

Frequency jump

Parameter

detection

105,

Parameter

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

Remarks

Read

Write

Extended

30

1E

9E

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
0
0
10%
6Hz

131
79
79
79
79
79
79
122
234
118
118

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42

1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
28
29
2A

9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A8
A9
AA

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0.01Hz

9999

118

43

2B

AB

0 to 3600s
0 to 3600s, 9999
0 to 30%, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.1s
0.1s
0.1%
0.01Hz

5/10s 2
9999
9999
9999

91, 215
91, 215
69
80

44
45
46
47

2C
2D
2E
2F

AC
AD
AE
AF

0
0
0
0

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

74

48

30

B0

0.01A

9999

95

51

33

B3

123

52

34

B4

0.01Hz

50Hz

128

55

37

B7

0.01A

Rated
inverter
current

128

56

38

B8

V/F

GP MFVC

Parameter
Copy

Clear

52

DU/PU main display data selection

55

Frequency monitoring reference

0 to 500A, 9999
0, 5, 8 to 12, 14, 20,
23 to 25, 52 to 55, 61,
62, 64, 100
0 to 400Hz

56

Current monitoring reference

0 to 500A

57

Restart coasting time

0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999

0.1s

9999

131

57

39

B9

58

Restart cushion time

0 to 60s

0.1s

1s

131

58

3A

BA

59
60
65

0, 1, 2, 3
0, 9
0 to 5

1
1
1

0
0
0

88
142
139

59
60
65

3B
3C
41

BB
BC
C1

0
0
0

66

0.01Hz

50Hz

74

66

42

C2

67
68
69
70

Remote function selection


Energy saving control selection
Retry selection
Stall prevention operation reduction
starting frequency
Number of retries at fault occurrence
Retry waiting time
Retry count display erase
Special regenerative brake duty

1
0.1s
1
0.1%

0
1s
0
0%

67
68
69
70

43
44
45
46

C3
C4
C5
C6

0
0
0
0

71

Applied motor

0, 1, 3, 13, 23, 40, 43,


50, 53

139
139
139
105
70, 98,

71

47

C7

72
73
74

0 to 15
0, 1, 10, 11
0 to 8

1
1
1

1
1
1

72
73
74

48
49
4A

C8
C9
CA

0
0
0

75

0 to 3, 14 to 17

14

153

75

4B

CB

77
78

PWM frequency selection


Analog input selection
Input filter time constant
Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection
Parameter write selection
Reverse rotation prevention selection

100,
143
145
147

0, 1, 2
0, 1, 2

1
1

0
0

77
78

4D
4E

CD 4
CE

0
0

Operation mode selection

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7

156
157
160,

4F

CF 4

Retry

Monitor functions

Second functions

51

Second acceleration/deceleration time


Second deceleration time
Second torque boost
Second V/F (base frequency)
Second stall prevention operation
current
Second electronic thermal O/L relay

54

44
45
46
47

Setting Range

Customer
Setting

Automatic
restart
functions

Frequency

Name

Refer
to
Page

48

79

0 to 400Hz
0 to 10, 101 to 110
0.1 to 600s
0
0 to 30%

170

79

All clear

Parameter List

Initial
Value

PARAMETERS

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Function

Parameter list

Read

Write

Extended

V/F

D0
D2

0
0

GP MFVC

Parameter
Copy

Clear

PU communication station number

0 to 31 (0 to 247)

118

PU communication speed

48, 96, 192, 384

192

119

PU communication stop bit length

0, 1, 10, 11

120

PU communication parity check

0, 1, 2

121

Number of PU communication retries

0 to 10, 9999

122

PU communication check time interval

0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999

0.1s

123
124

PU communication waiting time setting


PU communication CR/LF selection
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
PID control automatic switchover
frequency

0 to 150ms, 9999
0, 1, 2

1
1

9999
1

195
178
178

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

50Hz

148

125

19

99

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

50Hz

148

126

1A

9A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

207

127

1B

9B

128

PID action selection

0, 20, 21, 40 to 43

128

1C

9C

129

PID proportional band

0.1 to 1000%, 9999

0.1%

100%

129

1D

9D

130

PID integral time

0.1 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

1s

130

1E

9E

131

PID upper limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

131

1F

9F

132

PID lower limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

132

20

A0

133

PID action set point

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01%

9999

133

21

A1

134

PID differential time

0.01 to 10.00s, 9999

0.01s

9999

134

22

A2

145

PU display language selection

0 to 7

234

145

2D

AD

146
150

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.


Output current detection level
0 to 200%
Output current detection signal delay
0 to 10s
time
Zero current detection level
0 to 200%
Zero current detection time
0 to 1s
Stall prevention operation selection
0 to 31, 100, 101
OL signal output timer
0 to 25s, 9999
1 to 3, 5, 8 to 12, 14, 21,
AM terminal function selection
24, 52, 53, 61, 62
Extended function display selection
0, 9999
Frequency setting/key lock operation
0, 1, 10, 11
selection

0.1%

150%

119

146
150

0.1s

0s

119

151

33

B3

0.1%
0.01s
1
0.1s

5%
0.5s
0
0s

119
119
74
74

152
153
156
157

34
35
38
39

B4
B5
B8
B9

1
1
1
1

123

158

3A

BA

9999

157

00

80

235

161

01

81

Motor constants

0, 11, 21

Motor rated voltage

0 to 1000V

84
90

Rated motor frequency


Motor constant (R1)

10 to 120Hz
0 to 50 , 9999

96

Auto tuning setting/status

117

125

126

Current

detection

PID operation

127

151

152
153
156
157

158

functions

Automatic restart

56

160
161

All clear

70, 100
100

80
82

50
52

100

83

53

D3

100
100
100,

84
90

54
5A

D4
DA

0
0

96

60

E0

117

11

91

118

12

92

119

13

93

120

14

94

121

15

95

122

16

96

123
124

17
18

97
98

1
1

131
178,
195
178,
195
178
178,
195
179
179,

207,
215
207,
215
207,
215
207,
215
207,
215
207,
215
207,
215

160

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.


32
B2

Automatic restart after instantaneous


power failure selection

0, 1, 10, 11

131

162

02

82

165

Stall prevention operation level for


restart

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

131

165

05

85

162

Parameter List

Remarks

50Hz
9999

83

0.01kW
0.01A

Parameter

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

0.1V

0.1 to 7.5kW, 9999


0 to 500A, 9999

Customer
Setting

0.01Hz
0.001

Motor capacity
Motor excitation current

Setting Range

Refer
to
Page

9999
9999
200V/400V

PU connector communication

80
82

Name

Initial
Value

PARAMETERS

Parameter

Minimum
Setting
Increments

PU

Function

Parameter list

Parameter list

assignment

Slip

compensation

Name

Refer
to
Page

0.1s

0.1s

119

119

Customer
Setting

Parameter

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

Remarks

Read

Write

Extended

166

06

86

167

07

87

V/F

GP MFVC

Parameter
Copy

Clear

166

Output current detection signal


retention time

0 to 10s, 9999

167

Output current detection operation


selection

0, 1

168
169

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

170

Watt-hour meter clear

0, 10, 9999

9999

123

170

0A

8A

171

Operation hour meter clear

0, 9999

9999

123

171

0B

8B

178

STF terminal function selection

60

108

178

12

92

179

STR terminal function selection

61

108

179

13

93

180
181

RL terminal function selection


RM terminal function selection

1
1

0
1

108
108

180
181

14
15

94
95

2
2

182

RH terminal function selection

108

182

16

96

114

190

1E

9E

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16, 18, 24, 25, 37,
60, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16, 18, 24, 25, 37,
61, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16, 18, 24, 25, 37,
62, 65 to 67, 9999

168
169

190

RUN terminal function selection

192

A,B,C terminal function selection

232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
244

Multi-speed setting (speed 8)


Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
Soft-PWM operation selection
Analog input display unit switchover
Cooling fan operation selection

245

Rated slip

0 to 50%, 9999

0.01%

9999

73

245

35

B5

246

Slip compensation time constant

0.01 to 10s

0.01s

0.5s

73

246

36

B6

0, 9999

9999

73

247

37

B7

0, 1
0 to 100s,
1000 to 1100s,
8888, 9999
0, 1

141

249

39

B9

250

3A

BA

251

3B

BB

247
249

Constant-power range slip


compensation selection
Earth (ground) fault detection at start

250

Stop selection

251

Output phase loss protection selection

99

114

192

20

A0

0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
1
1
1

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
1
0
1

84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
143
148
225

232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
244

28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
34

A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B4

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

0.1s

9999

107,
112
141

All clear

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 70,
90, 91, 93, 95, 96, 98,
99, 100, 101, 103,
104, 107, 108,
111 to 116, 125, 126,
146, 147, 164, 170,
190, 191, 193, 195,
196, 198, 199, 9999
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 70,
90, 91, 95, 96, 98, 99,
100, 101, 103, 104,
107, 108, 111 to 116,
125, 126, 146, 147, 164,
170, 190, 191, 195, 196,
198, 199, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0, 1
0, 1
0, 1

58

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Parameter List

Cumulative

Multi-speed setting

Output terminal function assignment

Input terminal function

monitor clear

Parameter

Minimum
Setting
Increments

4
PARAMETERS

Current detection

Function

Parameter list

Parameter list

Name

Setting Range

Life alarm status display


Inrush current limit circuit life display
Control circuit capacitor life display
Main circuit capacitor life display
Main circuit capacitor life measuring
PWM frequency automatic switchover

(0 to 15)
(0 to 100%)
(0 to 100%)
(0 to 100%)
0, 1 (2, 3, 8, 9)
0, 1

261

Power failure stop selection

0, 1, 2

267
268
269

295

Terminal 4 input selection


0, 1, 2
Monitor decimal digits selection
0, 1, 9999
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
0, 0.01, 0.10, 1.00,
Magnitude of frequency change setting
10.00

Life diagnosis

255
256
257
258
259
260

stop

Refer
to
Page

1
1%
1%
1%
1
1

0
100%
100%
100%
0
0

226
226
226
226
226
143

1
1

Customer
Setting

Parameter

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

Remarks

Read

Write

Extended

255
256
257
258
259
260

3F
40
41
42
43
44

BF
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4

2
2
2
2
2
2

137

261

45

C5

0
9999

145
123

267
268
269

0.01

237

295

67

E7

4B
CB
4C
CC
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

V/F

GP MFVC

Parameter
Copy

Clear

All clear

2
2

1 to 6, 101 to 106, 9999

9999

158

296

68

E8

297

Password lock/unlock

1000 to 9999 (0 to 5,
9999)

9999

158

297

69

E9

298

0 to 32767, 9999

9999

131

298

6A

EA

299

0, 1, 9999

131

299

6B

EB

338

Frequency search gain


Rotation direction detection selection
at restarting
Communication operation command
source
Communication speed command
source
Communication startup mode selection
Communication EEPROM write
selection

0, 1

171

338

26

A6

0, 1, 2

171

339

27

A7

0, 1, 10

170

340

28

A8

0, 1

182

342

2A

AA

343

Communication error count

195

343

2B

AB

450

Second applied motor

0, 1, 9999

9999

98

450

32

B2

495

Remote output selection

0, 1, 10, 11

121

495

5F

DF

496

Remote output data 1

0 to 4095

121

496

60

E0

502

Stop mode selection at communication


error

0, 1, 2

502

02

82

503

Maintenance timer

0 (1 to 9998)

230

503

03

83

504

Maintenance timer alarm output set


time

0 to 9998, 9999

9999

230

504

04

84

549

Protocol selection

0, 1

195

549

31

B1

551

PU mode operation command source


selection

2, 4, 9999

9999

171

551

33

B3

555

Current average time

0.1 to 1s

0.1s

1s

231

555

37

B7

556

Data output mask time

0 to 20s

0.1s

0s

231

556

38

B8

557

Current average value monitor signal


output reference current

0 to 500A

0.01A

231

557

39

B9

561
563

PTC thermistor protection level


Energization time carrying-over times

0.5 to 30k , 9999


(0 to 65535)

0.01
1

95
123

561
563

3D
3F

BD
BF

5
5

Second motor

constant
Output

Remote

function

Password lock level

Password

296

RS-485 communication

Power failure

Initial
Value

time monitor

Current average

Communication

Maintenance

60

339
340
342

Rated
inverter
current
9999
0

179,
195

Parameter List

Parameter

Minimum
Setting
Increments

4
PARAMETERS

Function

Parameter list

Parameter list

Parameter list
Refer
to
Page

(0 to 65535)
0 to 10s, 9999

1
0.1s

0
9999

123
93

Output interruption detection time

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

1s

Output interruption detection level

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

564
571

Operating time carrying-over times


Holding time at a start

575
576

functions
function

Protective
Regeneration avoidance
Free

Extended

564
571

40
47

C0
C7

5
5

207

575

4B

CB

0Hz

207

576

4C

CC

0.1%

1000%

207

577

4D

CD

1
0.1%

0
10%

221
221

592
593

5C
5D

DC
DD

5
5

0 to 50%

0.1%

10%

221

594

5E

DE

0 to 50%

0.1%

10%

221

595

5F

DF

0.1 to 3600s
0.1 to 3600s
0 to 3600s, 9999
0 to 200%

0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1%

5s
5s
9999
0

221
221
131
144

596
597
611
653

60
61
0B
35

E0
E1
8B
B5

5
5
6
6

0 to 200%

0.1%

100

223

665

41

C1

0, 1

141

872

48

C8

0, 1, 2

223

882

52

D2

0.1V

400VDC/
780VDC 6

223

883

53

D3

0.01Hz

6Hz

223

885

55

D5

594

872 8

Input phase loss protection selection

V/F

GP MFVC

Parameter
Copy

Clear

All clear

Regeneration avoidance operation


selection
Regeneration avoidance operation
level
Regeneration avoidance compensation
frequency limit value

300 to 800V

886

Regeneration avoidance voltage gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

223

886

56

D6

888

Free parameter 1

0 to 9999

9999

233

888

58

D8

889

Free parameter 2

0 to 9999

9999

233

889

59

D9

891

Cumulative power monitor digit shifted


times

0 to 4, 9999

9999

123

891

5B

D8

AM terminal calibration

129

5D

DD

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias


frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

148

5E

DE

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

148

5E

DE

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain


frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

50Hz

148

5F

DF

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

148

5F

DF

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias


frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

148

60

E0

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

148

60

E0

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain


frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

50Hz

148

61

E1

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

148

61

E1

9
9

882

parameter

Write

900 to 1100%

665

883
885

C1
(901) 5
C2
(902) 5
C3
Calibration parameters

Read

0, 1, 2
0 to 25%

(902) 5
125
(903) 5
C4
(903) 5
C5
(904) 5
C6
(904) 5
126
(905) 5
C7

PU

Remarks

Output interruption cancel level

62

Parameter

Traverse function selection


Maximum amplitude amount
Amplitude compensation amount
during deceleration
Amplitude compensation amount
during acceleration
Amplitude acceleration time
Amplitude deceleration time
Acceleration time at a restart
Speed smoothing control
Regeneration avoidance frequency
gain

596
597
611
653

Setting Range

592
593

595

Name

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

577

Traverse

PID

operation

Parameter

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

Initial
Value

(905) 5
C22 to C25

0 to 10Hz, 9999

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.


(922 to 923)
990
PU buzzer control
0, 1
991
PU contrast adjustment
0 to 63

1
1

1
58

238
238

C1
(901)
C2
(902)
C3
(902)
125
(903)
C4
(903)
C5
(904)
C6
(904)
126
(905)
C7
(905)
C22 to C25
(922 to 923)
990
991

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.


5A
5B

DA
DB

4
PARAMETERS

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Function

Parameter list

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

Customer
Setting

Parameter

Read

Write

Extended

V/F

GP MFVC

Copy

Clear

All clear

Parameter clear

0, 1

239

Pr.CL

ALLC

All parameter clear

0, 1

239

ALLC

Er.CL

Faults history clear

0, 1

241

Er.CL

Pr.CH

Initial value change list

240

Pr.CH

4
5

The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).

The initial value differs according to the voltage class. (200V class, 400V class)

These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to
page 175 for RS-485 communication)

Available only for the three-phase power input specification model.

Remarks

Pr.CL

Differ according to capacities.


6%: FR-D740-022 or less, FR-D720S-042 or less
4%: FR-D740-036 to 080, FR-D720S-070 and 100
3%: FR-D740-120 and 160
Differ according to capacities.
5s: FR-D740-080 or less, FR-D720S-008 to 100
10s: FR-D740-120 and 160
Differ according to capacities.
6%: , FR-D720S-008 and 014
4%: , FR-D740-012 or more, FR-D720S-025 or more
Write is disabled in the communication mode (network operation mode) from the PU connector.

Parameter

Control Mode-based
Correspondence Table

Instruction Code

Parameter List

Clear parameters
1

Initial value change list

Function

Parameter list

PARAMETERS

64

Parameters according to purposes


4.3

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor

4.3.1

Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) .............................................................................................. 69

4.3.2

General-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80) ..................................................... 70

4.3.3

Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)......................................................................................... 73

4.3.4

Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157) .................................. 74

4.4

Limit the output frequency

78

4.4.1

Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)...................................................................... 78

4.4.2

Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36).................................... 79

4.5

Set V/F pattern

80

4.5.1

Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ............................................................................. 80

4.5.2

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ..................................................................................................... 82

4.6

Frequency setting by external terminals

84

4.6.1

Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239).............. 84

4.6.2

Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ....................................................................................................... 86

4.6.3

Remote setting function (Pr. 59) ................................................................................................... 88

4.7

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/


deceleration pattern

91

4.7.1

Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time


(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) .............................................................................................. 91

4.7.2

Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571).................................................. 93

4.7.3

Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) .................................................................................... 94

4.8

Selection and protection of a motor

95

4.8.1

Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC thermistor protection) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51,
Pr. 561) ......................................................................................................................................... 95

4.8.2

Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450) ..................................................................................................... 98

4.8.3

To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)........................................................................... 100

4.9

Motor brake and stop operation

104

4.9.1

DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)........................................................................................... 104

4.9.2

Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) ...................................................................... 105

4.9.3

Stop selection (Pr. 250) .............................................................................................................. 107

4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control

66

69

108

4.10.1

Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182).................................................................. 108

4.10.2

Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) ..................................................................... 110

4.10.3

Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT) ....................... 111

4.10.4

Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250) ........................................... 112

4.10.5

Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190, Pr. 192).................................................................. 114

4.10.6

Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43) ................................................. 118

4.10.7

Output current detection function


(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167) .................................................... 119

4.10.8

Remote output selection (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496) ............................................................ 121

122

4.11.1

Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37)................................................................................... 122

4.11.2

Monitor display selection of operation panel/PU and terminal AM


(Pr. 52, Pr.158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891) ......................................... 123

4.11.3

Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ...................................... 128

4.11.4

Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901)) ..................................................... 129

131

4.12.1

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start


(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611) ................................. 131

4.12.2

Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261) ..................................................................... 137

4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence

139

4.13.1

Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ...................................................................................... 139

4.13.2

Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) .................................................. 141

4.13.3

Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249) .......................................................................... 141

4.14 Energy saving operation


4.14.1

142

Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) ............................................................................................ 142

4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance

143

4.15.1

PWM carrier frequency and soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260) ................................... 143

4.15.2

Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653) ............................................................................................. 144

4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)

145

4.16.1

Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) ...................................................................................... 145

4.16.2

Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74)................................................... 147

4.16.3

Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)


(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)) ............................................................ 148

4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction

153

4.17.1

Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ..................................... 153

4.17.2

Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77).................................................................................. 156

4.17.3

Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ........................................................................... 157

4.17.4

Extended parameter display (Pr. 160) ........................................................................................ 157

4.17.5

Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297).......................................................................................... 158

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location

160

4.18.1

Operation mode selection (Pr. 79).............................................................................................. 160

4.18.2

Operation mode at power-on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) ........................................................................... 170

4.18.3

Start command source and frequency command source during communication


operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551) .......................................................................................... 171

4.19 Communication operation and setting

Parameters according to purposes

4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power


failure

175

4.19.1

Wiring and configuration of PU connector .................................................................................. 175

4.19.2

Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication


(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) ............................................................................ 178

4.19.3

Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502) .................. 179

67

4
PARAMETERS

4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal

4.19.4

Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) ................................................................... 182

4.19.5

Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) ....................................................... 183

4.19.6

Modbus RTU communication specifications


(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549) .................................................... 195

4.20 Special operation and frequency control


4.20.1

PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) .................................................................... 207

4.20.2

Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)...................................................................... 215

4.20.3

Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597) ........................................................................................ 221

4.20.4

Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886).......................... 223

4.21 Useful functions

225

4.21.1

Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ................................................................................... 225

4.21.2

Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)......................................................... 226

4.21.3

Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)................................................................................ 230

4.21.4

Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) ......................................................... 231

4.21.5

Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) .............................................................................................. 233

4.22 Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel

68

207

234

4.22.1

RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40).............................................................................. 234

4.22.2

PU display language selection(Pr.145)....................................................................................... 234

4.22.3

Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161).................................. 235

4.22.4

Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)....................................................................... 237

4.22.5

Buzzer control (Pr. 990).............................................................................................................. 238

4.22.6

PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) ............................................................................................... 238

4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear

239

4.24 Initial value change list

240

4.25 Check and clear of the faults history

241

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor

4.3

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Set starting torque manually


Automatically control output current
according to load
Compensate for motor slip to secure
low-speed torque
Limit output current to prevent
inverter trip

4.3.1

Pr. 0, Pr. 46

Refer to Page
69

Pr. 71, Pr. 80

70

Pr. 245 to Pr. 247

73

Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156,


Pr. 157

74

Manual torque boost


General-purpose magnetic
flux vector control
Slip compensation
Stall prevention operation

Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)

V/F

You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low-frequency range to improve motor torque reduction in the low-speed range.
Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
Two kinds of start torque boosts can be changed by switching between terminals.
Parameter
Number

Name

FR-D740-022 or less

Torque boost

FR-D720S-008 to 042
FR-D740-036 to 080
FR-D720S-070 and 100
FR-D740-120 and 160

46

Setting
Range

Initial Value

Second torque
boost

Description

6%
4%

0 to 30%

Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.

3%
0 to 30%

9999

9999

Set the torque boost when the RT signal is on.


Without second torque boost

* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Starting torque adjustment


On the assumption that Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage is 100%, set
the output voltage at 0Hz in % to Pr. 0 (Pr. 46).
Adjust the parameter little by little (about 0.5%), and check the
motor status each time. If the setting is too large, the motor will
overheat. The guideline is about 10% at the greatest.

Output voltage

100%

Pr. 0 Setting range


Pr. 46
0

(2)

Set two kinds of torque boosts (RT signal, Pr. 46)

Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

When you want to change torque boost according to applications, switch multiple motors with one inverter, etc., use Second
torque boost.
Pr. 46 Second torque boost is valid when the RT signal is on.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.

REMARKS
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 111)

NOTE
The amount of current flows in the motor may become large according to the conditions such as the motor
characteristics, load, acceleration/deceleration time, wiring length, etc., resulting in an overcurrent trip (OL (overcurrent
alarm) then E.OC1 (overcurrent trip during acceleration), overload trip (E.THM (motor overload trip), or E.THT (inverter
overload trip).
(When a fault occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 setting 1% by 1% to reset.) (Refer to page 244.)
The Pr. 0, Pr. 46 settings are valid only when V/F control is selected.
When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant torque motor) with the FR-D740-120 and 160, set torque boost value to 2%.
When Pr. 0 = "3%"(initial value), if Pr. 71 value is changed to the setting for use with a constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting
changes to 2%.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 3 Base frequency, Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 98
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

Refer to page 80
Refer to page 108

69

PARAMETERS

(1)

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


4.3.2

General-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80)

GP MFVC

General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is available.


Large starting torque and low speed torque are available with general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
What is general-purpose magnetic flux vector control ?
The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation so that the motor current which meets the
load torque to flow. With setting slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247), output frequency compensation (slip
compensation) is made so that the actual motor speed goes closer to a speed command value. Effective when load
fluctuates drastically, etc.
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as the FR-E500 series.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial
Value

Setting Range
0,1, 3,

71

Applied motor

13, 23, 40, 43


50, 53

80

Motor capacity

9999

0.1 to 7.5kW
9999

Description
By selecting a standard motor or constant torque motor,
thermal characteristic and motor constants of each motor
are set.
Applied motor capacity. (general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control)
V/F control

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0".(Refer to page 157)

POINT
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and
uneven rotation may occur.
The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity
should be 0.1kW or more)
Motor to be used is any of Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2kW or more) or
Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.4kW to 7.5kW). When using a motor other
than the above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where
wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m.)
Permissible wiring length between inverter and motor differs according to the inverter capacity and setting value
of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection (carrier frequency). Refer to page 18 for the permissible wiring length.

(1)

Control mode

V/F control (initial setting) and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control are available with this inverter.
V/F control is for controlling frequency and voltage so that the ratio of frequency (F) to voltage (V) is constant when
changing frequency.
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control divides the inverter output current into an excitation current and a torque
current by vector calculation, and makes voltage compensation to flow a motor current which meets the load torque.
(General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as the FR-E500 series.)

70

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


Selection method of general-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Perform secure wiring.
(Refer to page 14)
Display the extended function parameters.
(Pr. 160) (Refer to page 157)
Set "0" in Pr. 160 to display the extended function parameters.
Set the motor. (Pr. 71)
Pr. 71 Setting 1

Motor
Mitsubishi standard
motor
Mitsubishi high
efficiency motor
Mitsubishi constanttorque motor

0 (initial value)
40

Others

Offline auto tuning is necessary. 2

SF-JRCA 4P
SF-HRCA
Others (SF-JRC, etc.)

1
50
13
3

Offline auto tuning is necessary. 2


Offline auto tuning is necessary. 2

13

Offline auto tuning is necessary. 2

Other standard motor


Other constanttorque motor
1
2

Remarks

SF-JR
SF-HR

Refer to page 98, for other settings of Pr. 71.


Refer to page 100 for offline auto tuning.

Set the motor capacity.


(Pr. 80) (Refer to page 74)
Set motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 Motor capacity.
(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
Set the operation command. (Refer to page 160)
Select the start command and speed command.
(1)Start command
1)Operation panel: Setting by pressing
of the operation panel
2)External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse rotation
command (terminal STF or STR)
(2)Speed command
1)Operation panel: Setting by pressing

of the operation panel

2)External analog command (terminal 2 or 4):


Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 (or
terminal 4).
3)Multi-speed command:
The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give speed
command.

Test run

As required
Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to page 100)
Set slip compensation. (Pr. 245, Pr. 246, Pr. 247) (Refer to page 73)

NOTE
Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. (It is not suitable for machines such as grinding
machine and wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.
When a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) is connected between the inverter and motor, output
torque may decrease.)

71

PARAMETERS

(2)

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


(3)

Control method switching by external terminals (X18 signal)

Use the V/F switchover signal (X18) to change the control method (V/F control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector
control) with external terminal.
Turn the X18 signal on to change the currently selected control method (general-purpose magnetic flux vector control) to
V/F control.
For the terminal used for X18 signal input, set "18" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.

REMARKS
When V/F control is selected by V/F switchover (X18 signal), second function is also selected at the same time. Control between
V/F and general-purpose magnetic flux can not be switched while the inverter is running. In case control is switched between V/F
and general-purpose magnetic flux, only second function is selected.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltage
Refer to page 80
Pr.71 Applied motor
Refer to page 98
Pr.77 Parameter write selection
Refer to page 156
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 108

72

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


4.3.3

Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)

Inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed constant.
Parameter

Name

Number

245

Initial Value

Rated slip

9999

Setting Range
0.01 to 50%
0, 9999

Description
Rated motor slip.
No slip compensation
Slip compensation response time. When the

246

Slip compensation time


constant

value is made smaller, response will be faster.


0.5s

0.01 to 10s

However, as load inertia is greater, a


regenerative overvoltage fault (E.OV ) is more
liable to occur.
Slip compensation is not made in the constant

247

Constant-power range
slip compensation
selection

0
9999

power range (frequency range above the


frequency set in Pr. 3)

9999

Slip compensation is made in the constant power


range.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Slip compensation is validated when the motor rated slip calculated by the following formula is set in Pr. 245. Slip
compensation is not made when Pr. 245 = "0" or "9999".

Rated slip =

Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed


Synchronous speed at base frequency

100[%]

REMARKS
When performing slip compensation, the output frequency may become greater than the set frequency. Set the Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency value a little higher than the set frequency.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency
Refer to page 78
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 80

PARAMETERS

73

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


4.3.4

Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157)

This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from
coming to trip due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. In addition, simple torque limit which limits the output torque to the
predetermined value can be selected.
It can also limit stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration, driving or
regeneration.
Stall prevention
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is
automatically varied to reduce the output current.
Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range
0

22

Stall prevention operation


level

150%

23

Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor
at double speed

9999

0.1 to 200%
0 to 200%

Stall prevention operation invalid


Set the current value to start the stall
prevention operation.
The stall operation level can be reduced
when operating at a high speed above the
rated frequency.

9999

48

Second stall prevention


operation current

9999

0
0.1 to 200%
9999

66

Stall prevention
operation reduction
starting frequency

50Hz

0 to 400Hz

156

Stall prevention operation


selection

0 to 31, 100, 101

OL signal output timer

0s

157

Description

Constant according to Pr. 22.


Stall prevention operation invalid
Second stall prevention operation level
Same level as Pr. 22.
Set the frequency at which the stall
operation level is started to reduce.
Select whether stall prevention operation

0 to 25s
9999

and fast-response current limit operation


will be performed or not.
Output start time of the OL signal output
when stall prevention is activated.
Without the OL signal output

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Block diagram

Pr. 22
Pr. 48

74

RT

RT

=0

Stall prevention operation invalid


+
Stall prevention operation level
Output frequency
Pr. 23, Pr. 66

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


(2)

Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22)


Set in Pr. 22 the percentage of the output current to the rated
Output current
Pr. 22

ce

ati
on

Ac

ler

Constant
speed

ce

ler

ati

De

on

Output frequency

Time

OL
Stall prevention operation example

inverter current at which stall prevention operation will be


performed. Normally set this parameter to 150% (initial value).
Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes
deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration during
constant speed, and stops deceleration (makes acceleration)
during deceleration.
When stall prevention operation is performed, the OL signal is
output.

NOTE
If an overload status lasts long, an inverter trip (e.g. electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THM)) may occur.

(3)

Stall prevention operation signal output and output timing adjustment (OL signal, Pr. 157)
When the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, the stall prevention
operation signal (OL signal) turns on for longer than 100ms. When the output current falls to or below the stall prevention
operation level, the output signal turns off.
Use Pr. 157 OL signal output timer to set whether the OL signal is output immediately or after a preset period of time.
This operation is also performed when the regeneration avoidance function or
(overvoltage stall) is executed.
For the Y13 signal, set "3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) and
assign functions to the output terminal.

Pr. 157 Setting


0
(initial value)
0.1 to 25
9999

Description
Output immediately.

Overload state (OL operation)

Output after the set time (s) has elapsed.


Not output.

OL output signal
Pr. 157 set time(s)

NOTE
If the frequency has fallen to 1Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears to trip the
inverter output.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

PARAMETERS

75

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


(4)

Setting of stall prevention operation in high frequency range (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)
Setting example
Pr. 22

Pr. 22 = 150%
Pr. 23 = 100%
Pr. 66 = 50Hz

Stall prevention
operation level (%)

Stall prevention operation


level (%)

When Pr. 23 = 9999


When Pr. 23 = "9999", the stall prevention
operation level is as set in Pr. 22 to 400Hz.

Stall prevention operation level


as set in Pr. 23

150

75
37.5
25
18.75
0

50

100

200

300

400

Output frequency (Hz)

400Hz
Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 66

During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor current
does not increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the current at motor lockup becomes smaller than
the rated output current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not executed even if the motor is at a stop.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high
frequency range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the high-speed range on a centrifugal separator
etc. Normally, set 50Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
Formula for stall prevention operation level

Stall prevention operation level


in high frequency range (%)
However,

A =

= A+B

Pr. 66 (Hz) Pr. 22 (%)


, B =
Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 22 - A
Pr. 22 - B

][

Pr. 23 - 100

100

Pr. 66 (Hz) Pr. 22 (%)


400Hz

By setting "9999" (initial value) in Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed, the stall
prevention operation level is constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.

(5)

Set two types stall prevention operation levels (Pr. 48)


Turning RT signal on makes Pr. 48 Second stall prevention operation current valid.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid.
(Refer to page 111)

76

Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor


(6)

Limit the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit operation according to the
operating status (Pr. 156)
Refer to the following table and select whether fast-response current limit operation will be performed or not and the
operation to be performed at OL signal output.

Deceleration

Setting

Fast-Response
Current Limit
: Activated
: Not activated

speed

Pr. 156

Stall Prevention
Operation Selection
: Activated
: Not activated
Constant

OL
Signal
Output
:Operation
continued
: Operation
not continued
1

Acceleration

Deceleration

speed

Constant

Setting

Fast-Response
Current Limit
: Activated
: Not activated

Acceleration

Pr. 156

Stall Prevention
Operation Selection
: Activated
: Not activated

OL
Signal
Output
:Operation
continued
: Operation
not continued
1

17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Power driving

101
3

Regeneration

100

2
2

2
2
Power driving

16

value)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Regeneration

(initial

When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the

2
3

Since stall prevention is not activated, OL signal and E.OLT are not output.
The settings "100" and "101" allow operations to be performed in the driving and regeneration modes, respectively. The setting "101" disables the fastresponse current limit in the driving mode.

fault (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation stopped.

NOTE

CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Test operation must be performed.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration
distance.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 80
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

4
PARAMETERS

When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention is activated and acceleration/
deceleration may not be made according to the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Set Pr. 156 and stall prevention
operation level to the optimum values.
In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit is not activated. Torque may not be
produced, causing a load drop due to gravity.

Refer to page 108


Refer to page 114

77

Limit the output frequency

4.4

Limit the output frequency


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Set upper limit and lower limit of


output frequency
Perform operation by avoiding
mechanical resonance points

4.4.1

Maximum/minimum
frequency

Refer to Page

Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18

78

Pr. 31 to Pr. 36

79

Frequency jump

Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)

Motor speed can be limited.


Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
Parameter

Name

Number

1
2

Initial Value

Setting Range

120Hz

0 to 120Hz

Upper limit of the output frequency.

0Hz

0 to 120Hz

Lower limit of the output frequency.

120Hz

120 to 400Hz

Maximum frequency
Minimum frequency
High speed maximum
frequency

18

Description

Set when performing the operation at 120Hz


or more.

* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Clamped at the
maximum frequency

Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr. 1
Pr. 18
Pr. 2
0
(4mA)
Clamped at the
minimum frequency

Frequency setting
5, 10V
(20mA)

(1)

Set maximum frequency

Use Pr. 1 Maximum frequency to set the maximum frequency. If the


frequency of the frequency command entered is higher than the
setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
When you want to perform operation above 120Hz, set the upper
limit of the output frequency to Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
(When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 automatically switches to the frequency of
Pr. 18. Also, when Pr. 1 is set, Pr. 18 is automatically changed to the
frequency set in Pr. 1.

REMARKS
When performing operation above 50Hz using the frequency setting analog signal, change Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting
gain).

(2)

Set minimum frequency

Use Pr. 2 Minimum frequency to set the minimum frequency.


If the set frequency is less than Pr. 2, the output frequency is clamped at Pr. 2 (will not fall below Pr. 2 ).

REMARKS
When Pr. 15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr. 2, the Pr. 15 setting has precedence over the Pr. 2 setting.
When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency may drop to Pr. 2 or below.

CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 2 is set to any value equal to or more than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, simply turning on the start
signal will run the motor at the preset frequency according to the set acceleration time even if the command
frequency is not input.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Refer to page 93
Pr. 15 Jog frequency
Refer to page 86
Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency

78

Refer to page 148

Limit the output frequency


4.4.2

Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)

When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters
allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Parameter

Name

Number

31
32
33
34
35
36

Frequency jump 1A
Frequency jump 1B
Frequency jump 2A
Frequency jump 2B
Frequency jump 3A
Frequency jump 3B

Initial Value

Setting Range

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

Description

1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is frequency


jumps
9999: Function invalid

Pr. 36
Pr. 35

Frequency jump

Pr. 34
Pr. 33

Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to


either the top or bottom point of each area.
The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point and operation in
the jump zone is performed at these frequencies.

Pr. 32
Pr. 31

Pr. 34: 35Hz


Pr. 33: 30Hz

Pr. 33: 35Hz


Pr. 34: 30Hz

Example 1

To fix the frequency to 30Hz in the range 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 34 and
30Hz in Pr. 33.

Example 2

To jump the frequency to 35Hz in the range 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 33
and 30Hz in Pr. 34.

NOTE
During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.

4
PARAMETERS

Set frequency (Hz)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

79

Set V/F pattern

4.5

Set V/F pattern


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Refer to Page

Set motor ratings

Base frequency,
Base frequency voltage

Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47

80

Select a V/F pattern according to


applications.

Load pattern selection

Pr. 14

82

4.5.1

Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)

V/F

Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
Parameter

Name

Number

Base frequency

Initial Value

Setting Range

50Hz

0 to 400Hz
0 to 1000V

19

Base frequency voltage

47

Second V/F (base


frequency)

8888

Rated motor frequency. (50Hz/60Hz)


Base voltage.

8888

95% of power supply voltage

9999

Same as power supply voltage

0 to 400Hz

9999

Description

9999

Base frequency when the RT signal is on.


Second V/F invalid

* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Output voltage (V)

(1)

(2)

Pr. 19
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr. 3
Pr. 47

Set two kinds of base frequencies (Pr. 47)

Base frequency setting (Pr. 3)

When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated


frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency. When running the
motor using commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
operation, set Pr. 3 to the same value as the power supply
frequency.
If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "60Hz" only,
always set to "60Hz". It may result in an inverter trip due to
overload.
Special care must be taken when "1" (variable torque load) is set in
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection .
When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, set Pr. 3 to
60Hz.

When you want to change the base frequency when switching two types of motors with one inverter, use the Pr. 47 Second V/
F (base frequency).
Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency) is valid when the RT signal is on. Set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function
selection) and assign the RT signal.

REMARKS
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 111)

80

Set V/F pattern


(3)

Base frequency voltage setting (Pr. 19)

Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
If the setting is less than the power supply voltage, the maximum output voltage of the inverter is as set in Pr. 19.
Pr. 19 can be utilized in the following cases.
(a) When regeneration is high (e.g. continuous regeneration)
During regeneration, the output voltage becomes higher than the reference and may cause an overcurrent trip
(E.OC ) due to an increased motor current.
(b) When power supply voltage variation is large
When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, speed variation or motor overheat may be
caused by excessive torque or increased motor current.

NOTE
When general-purpose magnetic flux vector control is selected, Pr. 3, Pr. 47 and Pr. 19 are invalid and Pr. 83 and Pr. 84
are valid.
Note that Pr. 3 or Pr. 47 value is made valid as inflection points of S-pattern when Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A).
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection
Refer to page 82
Refer to page 94
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Pr. 83 Motor rated voltage, Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency
Refer to page 100
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 108
Refer to page 70
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control

PARAMETERS

81

Set V/F pattern


4.5.2

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)

V/F

You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application and load characteristics.
Parameter

Name

Number

14

Initial Value

Load pattern selection

Setting Range

Description

For constant torque load

For variable torque load

2
3

For constant torque elevators


(at reverse rotation boost of 0%)
For constant torque elevators
(at forward rotation boost of 0%)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Pr. 14 = 0

(1)

Constant-torque load application (setting "0", initial value)

At or less than the base frequency, the output voltage varies linearly with the output
frequency.
Set this value when driving the load whose load torque is constant even if the speed
varies, e.g. conveyor, cart or roll drive.

Output voltage

100%

Pr. 3 Base frequency


Output frequency (Hz)

POINT
If the load is a fan or pump, select for constant-torque load (setting "0") in any of the following cases.
When a blower of large inertia moment (J) is accelerated in a short time
For constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump
When load torque increases at low speed, e.g. screw pump
Pr. 14 = 1

Variable-torque load application (setting "1")

At or less than the base frequency, the output voltage varies with the output frequency
in a square curve.
Set this value when driving the load whose load torque varies in proportion to the
square of the speed, e.g. fan or pump.

Output voltage

100%

Pr. 3 Base frequency


Output frequency (Hz)

82

(2)

Set V/F pattern

100%
Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation

100%

Pr. 0
Pr. 46

Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

Constant-torque

load

application

(setting "2, 3")

For vertical lift loads


At forward rotation boost...0%
At reverse rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46)
setting
Output voltage

Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power


driving load at forward rotation and
regenerative load at reverse rotation.
Pr. 0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation
and torque boost is automatically changed to
"0%" during reverse rotation. Pr. 46 Second
torque boost is made valid when the RT signal
turns on.
Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving
mode during reverse rotation and in the
regenerative load mode during forward rotation
according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight
system.
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr.
182 (input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.

REMARKS
When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load, it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
to prevent trip due to current at regeneration.
In addition, when the RT signal is on, the other second functions are also valid.

NOTE
Load pattern selection does not function under general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 0, Pr. 46 (Torque boost)
Refer to page 69
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 80
Refer to page 108
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Refer to page 70

4
PARAMETERS

Output voltage

For vertical lift loads


At forward rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46)
setting
At reverse rotation boost...0%

Pr. 0
Pr. 46

(3)

Pr. 14 = 3

Pr. 14 = 2

83

Frequency setting by external terminals

4.6

Frequency setting by external terminals


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Make frequency setting by


combination of terminals
Perform jog operation
Infinitely variable speed setting by
terminals

4.6.1

Multi-speed operation
Jog operation

Refer to Page

Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,


Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 15, Pr. 16

Remote setting function

Pr. 59

84
86
88

Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)

Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the contact signals.
Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

50Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency when RH turns on

30Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency when RM turns on.

10Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency when RL turns on.

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999

24
25

Multi-speed setting (high


speed)
Multi-speed setting (middle
speed)
Multi-speed setting (low
speed)
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
Multi-speed setting (speed 5)

26

Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

9999

27
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239

Multi-speed setting (speed 7)


Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999

4
5
6

Description

Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can


be set according to the combination of
the RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
9999: not selected

The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Output frequency (Hz)

(1)

3-speed setting (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)


The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr. 4 when RH signal is on,
Pr. 5 when RM signal is on and Pr. 6 when RL signal is on.

Speed 1
(High speed)
Speed 5
Speed 6

Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 4
Speed 3
(Low speed)

Speed 7
Time

RH
RM
RL

ON

ON
ON

ON
ON

ON ON
ON ON

ON

ON

REMARKS
For multi-speed setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency of the lower
signal.
For example, when the RH and RM signals turn on, the RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
The RH, RM, RL signals are assigned to the terminal RH, RM, RL in the initial setting. By setting "0 (RL)", "1 (RM)", "2 (RH)" in
any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection), you can assign the signals to other terminals.

84

Frequency setting by external terminals


(2)

Multi-speed setting for 4 or more speeds (Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)

Output frequency (Hz)

Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the
running frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (In the initial value setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are unavailable).
For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.

Forward rotation

Speed 10
Speed 11

REX

Speed 12

Speed 9

Speed 13
Speed 8

Multi-speed
selection

Speed 14
Speed 15

ON ON

RL
REX

ON

ON

RM

10
2

Frequency setting
potentiometer

PC

Time

RM

RH

RL

ON ON ON ON

RH

Inverter
STF

Multi-speed operation connection example

ON ON
ON

ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
*1

When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is
performed at frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned off and
REX is turned on.

REMARKS
The priorities of the frequency commands by the external signals are "jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4 analog
input > terminal 2 analog input".
(Refer to page 148 for the frequency command by analog input)
Valid in the external operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "3" or "4").
Multi-speed parameters can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
When Pr. 59 Remote function selection "0", multi-speed setting is invalid as RH, RM and RL signals are remote setting signals.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 15 Jog frequency
Refer to page 86
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 88
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 160
Refer to page 108
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

4
PARAMETERS

85

Frequency setting by external terminals


4.6.2

Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)

You can set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. Jog operation can be performed in either
of the external and the PU operation mode.
This operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Parameter

Initial

Name

Number

Value

15

Jog frequency

16

Jog acceleration/
deceleration time

5Hz
0.5s

Setting Range

Description

0 to 400Hz

Frequency for jog operation.

0 to 3600s

Acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. As the acceleration/


deceleration time, set the time taken to reach the frequency (initial
value is 50Hz) set in Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
Acceleration/deceleration time can not be set separately.

These parameters are displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected. When the parameter unit is not
connected, the above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Jog operation from outside


When the JOG signal is on, a start and stop can be made by the start signal (STF, STR).
For the terminal used for Jog operation selection, set "5" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.

Output frequency (Hz)

Inverter
Three-phase AC
power supply

Pr. 20
Pr. 15 Jog frequency
setting range

Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start
JOG signal

Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
STF
STR
RH (JOG)*

Time

Pr. 16

JOG signal

U
V
W

Motor

PC
10
2
5

ON

* When assigning the JOG signal to


the terminal RH

Forward rotation STF

ON

Reverse rotation STR

Connection diagram
for external jog operation

ON

Operation
1. Screen at powering on

Display

Confirm that the external operation mode is


selected. ([EXT] lit)
If not displayed, press

to change to the

external (EXT) operation mode. If the


operation mode still does not change, set Pr.
79 to change to the external operation mode.

2. Turn on the JOG switch.

JOG
ON

3. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on.


The motor runs while the start switch (STF
or STR) is on.
The motor runs at 5Hz. (initial value of Pr.
15)

4. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.

Forward
rotation
ON

Forward
rotation
OFF

Reverse
rotation

Rotates while ON

Stop
Reverse
rotation

REMARKS
When you want to change the running frequency, change Pr. 15 Jog frequency. (initial value "5Hz")
When you want to change the acceleration/deceleration time, change Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time. (initial value "0.5s")
The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for jog operation.

86

Frequency setting by external terminals


Jog operation from PU
Selects Jog operation mode from the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Operation is performed only while the
start button is pressed.
Three-phase AC
power supply

Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U
V
W

Motor

Operation panel

Operation

Display

1. Confirmation of the RUN indication and


operation mode indication
The monitor mode should have been
selected.
The inverter should be at a stop.

2. Press

to choose the PU Jog operation

mode.

3. Press
While

.
is pressed, the motor rotates.

Hold down.

The motor runs at 5Hz. (Pr. 15 initial value)

4. Release

Stop
Release

[When changing the frequency of PU Jog operation]

5. Press

to choose the parameter setting

PRM indication is lit.

mode.
(The parameter number read previously
appears.)

6. Turn

until Pr. 15 Jog frequency appears.

7. Press

to show the currently set value.

(5Hz)

8. Turn

to set the value to "

".

PARAMETERS

(2)

(10Hz)

9. Press

to set.

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!

10.Perform the operations in steps 1 to 4.


The motor rotates at 10Hz.

87

Frequency setting by external terminals


NOTE
When Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A), the acceleration/
deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 Base frequency.
The Pr. 15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
The JOG signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection).
When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the
function of each terminal.
During jog operation, the second acceleration/deceleration via the RT signal cannot be selected. (The other second
functions are valid. (Refer to page 227))
When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "4", pressing

of the operation panel and

(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) starts the inverter and pressing

of the parameter unit

stops the inverter.

This function is invalid when Pr. 79 = "3".

Parameters referred to
Pr. 13 Starting frequency

Refer to page 93

Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection

Refer to page 94

Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments


Pr. 79 Operation mode selection

Refer to page 160

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

4.6.3

Refer to page 91

Refer to page 108

Remote setting function (Pr. 59)


Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can use contact signals to perform continuous
variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.

Parameter

Name

Number

59

Initial Value

Remote function selection

Setting
Range

Description
RH, RM, RL signal
Frequency setting
function
storage function

Multi-speed setting

Remote setting

With

Remote setting

Not used

Remote setting

Not used
(Turning STF/STR off
clears remotely-set
frequency.)

0
3

Forward rotation
Acceleration
Deceleration
Clear

Inverter
STF
RH
RM

10

RL

PC

Connection diagram
for remote setting

Output frequency (Hz)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 156)

When Pr. 59 = 3
When Pr. 59 = 2, 3

0
Acceleration
(RH)
Deceleration
(RM)

0Hz
ON

Time
ON

ON
ON
ON

Clear (RL)
Forward rotation
(STF)
Power supply

ON

ON
ON

* External running frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency

88

When Pr. 59 = 1

When Pr. 59 = 1, 2

ON

ON
ON

Frequency setting by external terminals


(1)

Remote setting function


Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the frequency setting storage function
in the remote setting mode is used or not.
When Pr. 59 is set to any of "1 to 3" (remote setting function valid), the functions of the RH, RM and RL signals are
changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL).
When using the remote setting function, following frequencies can be compensated to the frequency set by RH and RM
operation according to the operation mode.
During external operation (including Pr. 79 = "4") .................................. external frequency command other than multi-speed
settings
During external operation and PU combined operation (Pr. 79 = "3") .... PU frequency command or terminal 4 input
During PU operation .............................................................................. PU frequency command

(2)

Frequency setting storage

The frequency setting storage function stores the remotely-set frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) into the
memory (EEPROM). When power is switched off once, then on, operation is resumed with that output frequency value.
(Pr. 59 = 1)
<Frequency setting storage conditions>
Frequency at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns off
The remotely-set frequency is stored every one minute after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the
RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) signals. (The frequency is written if the present frequency setting
compared with the past frequency setting every one minute is different. The state of the RL signal does not affect
writing.)

NOTE
The range of frequency changeable by RH
(acceleration) and RM (deceleration) is 0 to

The set frequency is clamped


at (main speed + Pr. 1)

(Hz)

maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting).


Note that the maximum value of set frequency

Output frequency is
clamped at Pr. 1

is (main speed + maximum frequency).


Pr. 1

Set frequency
Output frequency

Main speed setting


0Hz

Time
ON

Acceleration (RH)

ON

Deceleration (RM)
Forward rotation (STF)

ON

When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 44 Second
acceleration/deceleration time and Pr. 45 Second deceleration time. Note that when long time has been set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8, the
acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8. (when RT signal is off)
When the RT signal is on, acceleration/deceleration is made in the time set in Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, regardless of the Pr. 7

preset frequency. (When Pr. 59 = "1" or "2")


When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the
frequency setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr. 59 = "2, 3"). If set valid (Pr. 59 = "1"), frequency
is written to EEPROM frequently, this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
The RH, RM, RL signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function
selection). When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after
confirming the function of each terminal.
Also available for the network operation mode.

89

PARAMETERS

or Pr. 8 setting.
Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal varies the

Frequency setting by external terminals


REMARKS
During jog operation or PID control operation, the remote setting function is invalid.

Even when the remotely-set


frequency is cleared by turning on
the RL (clear) signal after turn off
(on) of both the RH and RM
signals, the inverter operates at
the remotely-set frequency stored
in the last operation if power is
reapplied before one minute has
elapsed since turn off (on) of both
the RH and RM signals

Output frequency (Hz)

Setting frequency is "0"

Remotely-set frequency stored last time


Within 1 minute
Remotely-set frequency
stored last time

Time
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM) OFF
Clear (RL)

ON
ON

Output frequency (Hz)

When the remotely-set frequency


is cleared by turning on the RL
(clear) signal after turn off (on) of
both the RH and RM signals, the
inverter operates at the frequency
in the remotely-set frequency
cleared state if power is reapplied
after one minute has elapsed
since turn off (on) of both the RH
and RM signals.

ON
ON

ON
ON

Forward rotation (STF)


Power supply

Remotely-set frequency
stored last time

1 minute

More than 1 minute

Operation is performed
at the set frequency 0Hz.

Time
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM) OFF

ON
ON

Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)
Power supply

ON
ON

ON
ON

CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency
Refer to page 78
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr. 45 Second deceleration time
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 108

90

Refer to page 91

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/ deceleration pattern

4.7

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/


deceleration pattern
Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Motor acceleration/deceleration
time setting
Starting frequency
Set acceleration/deceleration
pattern suitable for application

4.7.1

Acceleration/deceleration
times
Starting frequency and
start-time hold
Acceleration/deceleration
pattern

Refer to Page

Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45

91

Pr. 13, Pr. 571

93

Pr. 29

94

Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time


(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45)

Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.


Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease.
For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a
restart (page 131).
Parameter
Number

20 1

44 1
45 1

Setting

Initial Value

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-008 to 100

5s

FR-D740-120 and 160

10s

FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-008 to 100

5s

FR-D740-120 and 160

10s

0 to 3600s

Motor acceleration time.

0 to 3600s

Motor deceleration time.


Frequency that will be the basis of

Acceleration/
deceleration
reference frequency
Second acceleration/
deceleration time

Description

Range

50Hz

1 to 400Hz

acceleration/deceleration time.
As acceleration/deceleration time, set the
frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20.

FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-008 to 100

5s

FR-D740-120 and 160

10s

Second deceleration
time

0 to 3600s
0 to 3600s

9999

9999

Acceleration/deceleration time when the RT


signal is on.
Deceleration time when the RT signal is on.
Acceleration time = deceleration time

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Output
frequency (Hz)

Pr. 20
(50Hz)

Running
frequency

Time

Acceleration time Deceleration time


Pr. 7, Pr. 44
Pr. 8, Pr. 45

Acceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 20)


Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to reach Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz.
Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.
Acceleration
time setting

Pr. 20
=

Maximum operating

Acceleration time from stop to maximum


operating frequency

frequency - Pr. 13

Example)When Pr. 20 = 50Hz (initial value), Pr. 13 = 0.5Hz, and acceleration can be
made up to the maximum operating frequency of 40Hz in 10s

Pr. 7 =

50Hz
40Hz - 0.5Hz

10s

12.7s

91

4
PARAMETERS

Name

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/ deceleration pattern


(2)

Deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 20)


Use Pr. 8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency.
Set the deceleration time according to the following expression.
Deceleration

Pr. 20

time setting

Maximum operating frequency - Pr. 10

Deceleration time from maximum operating frequency to stop

Example)When the frequency can be decelerated down to the maximum


operating frequency of 40Hz in 10s with 120Hz set in Pr. 20 and 3Hz set
in Pr. 10

(3)

Pr. 8 =

120Hz
40Hz-3Hz

10s

32.4s

Set two kinds of acceleration/deceleration times (RT signal, Pr. 44, Pr. 45 )
Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on.
When "9999" is set to Pr. 45, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44).
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.

NOTE
When the acceleration/deceleration pattern is S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (refer to page 94), the acceleration/
deceleration time is the time required to reach Pr. 3 Base frequency.
Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher

t=

4
9

T
(Pr. 3)

f 2+

5
9

T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (s)


f: Set frequency (Hz)

Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the Pr. 3 Base frequency of 50Hz (0Hz to set frequency)

Frequency setting (Hz)


50

120

200

400

16

38

145

15

15

47

115

429

Acceleration/
deceleration time (s)

Changing terminal assignment may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each
terminal.

REMARKS
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 111)
If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change.
Set Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 to adjust the gains.
When the Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 settings are 0.03s or less, the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04s. At that time, set Pr.
20 to "120Hz" or less.
Any value can be set to the acceleration/deceleration time but the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter
than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mecanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 80
Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency
Refer to page 104
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Refer to page 94
Pr. 125, Pr. 126 (frequency setting gain frequency)
Refer to page 148
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 108

92

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/ deceleration pattern


4.7.2

Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)

You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want to smooth motor drive at a start.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description
Frequency at start can be set in the range

13

Starting frequency

0.5Hz

0 to 60Hz

0 to 60Hz.
Starting frequency at which the start
signal is turned on.

571

Restart coasting time

9999

0.0 to 10.0s
9999

Holding time of Pr. 13 Starting frequency.


Holding function at a start is invalid

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Starting frequency setting (Pr. 13)


Frequency at start can be set in the range 0 to 60Hz.
You can set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned
on.

60
Setting
range
Pr. 13
0
Time
STF

ON

NOTE
The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.

(2)

Output
frequency (Hz)

This function holds during the period set in Pr. 571 and the output
frequency set in Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
This fnction performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a
start.

60
Setting
range
Pr. 13
0
STF

Start-time hold function (Pr. 571)

Pr. 571 setting time


ON

Time

REMARKS
When Pr. 13 = "0Hz", the starting frequency is held at 0.01Hz.

NOTE
At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold
function is invalid.

CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr. 2 Minimum frequency, simply turning on the
start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not input.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 2 Minimum frequency

Refer to page 78

93

PARAMETERS

When the start signal was turned off during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/ deceleration pattern


4.7.3

Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)

You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for application.


Parameter

Name

Number

29

Initial Value

Acceleration/deceleration
pattern selection

Setting Range

Description

Linear acceleration/ deceleration

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection ="0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Output frequency (Hz)

Setting value "0"


[Linear acceleration/
deceleration]

Linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr. 29 setting "0", initial value)


For the inverter operation, the output frequency is made to change linearly (linear
acceleration/deceleration) to prevent the motor and inverter from excessive stress
to reach the set frequency during acceleration, deceleration, etc. when frequency
changes. Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope.

Output frequency (Hz)

Time

Setting value "1"


[S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration A]

fb

(2)

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr. 29 = "1")


For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
Used when acceleration/deceleration must be made in a short time to a highspeed range of not lower than the base frequency.
In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, Pr. 3 Base frequency (fb) is the inflection
point of the S pattern and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time
appropriate for motor torque reduction in a constant-power operation range of
base frequency (fb) or higher.

Time

NOTE
As the acceleration/deceleration time of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time taken until Pr. 3 Base
frequency is reached, not Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.

Output frequency (Hz)

Set frequency (Hz)

Setting value "2"


[S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration B]

(3)

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr. 29 = "2")


For prevention of load shifting in conveyor and other applications.
Since acceleration/deceleration is always made in an S shape from current
frequency (f2) to target frequency (f1), this function eases shock produced at
acceleration/deceleration and is effective for load collapse prevention, etc.

f1

f2
Time

Parameters referred to
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 80
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency

94

Refer to page 91

Selection and protection of a motor

4.8

Selection and protection of a motor


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Electronic thermal O/L relay


PTC thermistor protection
Applied motor

Motor protection from overheat


Use the constant torque motor
The motor performance can be
maximized for operation in magnetic
flux vector control method.

4.8.1

Offline auto tuning

Refer to Page

Pr. 9, Pr. 51, Pr. 561

95

Pr. 71

98

Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr.


84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96

100

Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC thermistor protection)
(Pr. 9, Pr. 51, Pr. 561)

Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the
optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter

Name

Number

Electronic thermal O/L


relay

9
511

5611
1
2

Initial Value

Setting Range

Inverter

0 to 500A

rated current

Second electronic thermal


O/L relay 2

9999

PTC thermistor protection


level

9999

0 to 500A
9999
0.50 to 30k
9999

Description
Set the rated motor current.
Valid when the RT signal is on.
Set the rated motor current.
Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
Set the level (resistance value) when PTC
thermistor protection activates.
PTC thermistor protection is inactive.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.

Electronic thermal O/L relay (Pr. 9)

Pr. 9 = 100% setting of inverter rating*2


Pr. 9 = 50% setting of inverter rating*1, 2

70 30Hz
or more *3
20Hz
60
10Hz
6Hz
50 0.5Hz

30Hz or more *3
20Hz
Operation range
10Hz
Range on the right of characteristic curve

Characteristic when electronic thermal


relay function for motor protection is turned off
(when Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))

Operation time (s)

240

(s) unit display in this range

Non-operation range
Range on the left of characteristic curve

6Hz
0.5Hz

180
Range for
transistor
protection

120

60
52.5%

105%

100
50
150
Inverter output current(%)
(% to the rated inverter current)

200

This function detects the overload (overheat) of the


motor and trips. (The operation characteristic is shown
on the left)
Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr. 9.
(If the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rating and the
Pr. 3 Base frequency is set to 60Hz, set the 1.1 times of
the 60Hz rated motor current.)
Set "0" in Pr. 9 when you do not want to operate the
electronic thermal O/L relay, e.g. when using an external
thermal relay with the motor. (Note that the output
transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).)
When using a Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
1) Set "1" or "13", "50", "53" in any of Pr. 71. (This
provides
a
100%
continuous
torque
characteristic in the low-speed range.
2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.

When a value 50% of the inverter rated output current (current value) is set to Pr. 9

The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.

When you set the electronic thermal O/L relay dedicated to the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies to operation at 6Hz or
higher.

NOTE
Fault by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary
reset and power-off.
When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal
function. Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective
characteristics of the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
The operation time of the transistor protection thermal shortens when the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting
increases.

95

4
PARAMETERS

Electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic

Operation time (min)

(min) unit display in this range

(1)

Selection and protection of a motor


(2)

Set two different electronic thermal O/L relays (Pr. 51)

Use this function when running two motors of different rated currents individually by a single inverter. (When running two
motors together, use external thermal relays.)
Set the rated current of the second motor to Pr. 51.
When the RT signal is on, thermal protection is provided based on the Pr. 51 setting.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
MC
IM
MC

U
V
W

Pr. 450
Second applied
motor

Pr. 9
Electronic
thermal O/L relay

9999

9999

Other than 0

Other than 9999

Other than 9999

Other than 0

IM

RT
PC

Pr.51
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
9999
0
0.01 to 500
9999
0
0.01 to 500
9999
0
0.01 to 500
9999
0
0.01 to 500

RT = OFF
RT = ON
First Second First Second
motor motor motor motor

... Output current value is used to perform integration processing.


... Output current is assumed as 0A to perform integration processing. (cooling processing)
... Electronic thermal relay function is not activated.

REMARKS
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 111)

(3)

Electronic thermal relay function prealarm (TH) and alarm signal (THP signal)

100%: Electronic thermal O/L relay alarm operation value

Electronic thermal
relay function
operation level

100%
85%

Electronic thermal
O/L relay alarm
(THP)

OFF

ON

ON

Time

The alarm signal (THP) is output and electronic thermal


relay function prealarm (TH) is displayed when the
electronic thermal O/L relay cumulative value reaches
85% of the level set in Pr. 9 or Pr. 51. If it reaches 100%
of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor
overload trip (E.THM/E.THT) occurs.
The inverter does not trip even when the alarm signal
(THP) is output.
For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign
the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108
(negative logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection) .

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190, Pr.192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

(4)

External thermal relay input (OH signal)

Inverter
U
V
W
OH
PC

Thermal relay
protector
Motor
IM

To protect the motor against overheat, use the OH signal when using an external
thermal relay or the built-in thermal protector of the motor.
When the thermal relay operates, the inverter trips and outputs the fault signal
(E.OHT).
For the terminal used for OH signal input, assign the function by setting "7" to any of
Pr. 178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) .

External thermal relay input


connection example

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

96

Selection and protection of a motor


PTC thermistor protection (Pr. 561)
Inverter
U
V
W

Motor

10
2
Thermistor
resistance

Thermistor curve
R2
Pr. 561
R1
Temperature-resistance
existing range TN-T

TN+T

Thermistor
temperature

TN
TN: Rated operational temperature

Terminal 2 and terminal 10 are available for inputting of motor


built-in PTC thermistor output. When the PTC thermistor input
reaches to the resistance value set in Pr. 561 PTC thermistor
protection level, inverter outputs PTC thermistor operation error
signal (E.PTC) and trips.
Check the characteristics of the using PTC thermistor, and set
the resistance value within a protection providing temperature
TN, just around the center or R1 and R2 in a left figure. If the Pr.
561 setting is closer to R1 or R2, the working temperature of
protection goes higher (protection works later), or lower
(protection works earlier).
PTC thermistor resistance can be displayed in operation panel,
parameter unit (FR-PU07) (Refer to page 123), or RS-485
communication (Refer to page 175) when PTC thermistor
protection is active (Pr. 561 "9999").

REMARKS
When using terminal 2 as PTC thermistor input (Pr. 561 "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for analog frequency command.
Also unavailable when using terminal 2 for PID control and Dancer control. When PID control and Dancer control is not active
(Pr. 128 PID action selection = "0"), terminal 4 functions as follows.
When Pr. 79 = "4" or in external operation mode ................Terminal 4 is active whether AU signal is ON/OFF
When Pr. 79 = "3" ................................................................Terminal 4 is active for frequency command when AU signal is ON
For the power supply terminal of PTC thermistor input, do not use power supply other than terminal 10 (external power supply,
etc). PTC thermistor does not work properly.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 98
Refer to page 143
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 160
Refer to page 207
Pr. 128 PID action selection
Refer to page 108
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 114

4
PARAMETERS

(5)

97

Selection and protection of a motor


4.8.2

Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450)

Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor.
Setting is required to use a constant-torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function
suitable for the motor is set.
When general-purpose magnetic flux vector is selected, the motor constants (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA,
etc.) necessary for control are selected as well.
Parameter

Initial

Name

Number

71

Setting Range

Value

Applied motor

0, 1, 3, 13,
23, 40, 43, 50, 53

0, 1

450

Second applied motor

9999

9999

Description
Selecting the standard motor or constant-torque
motor sets the corresponding motor thermal
characteristic.
Set when using the second motor.
Second motor is invalid
(thermal characteristic of the first motor
(Pr. 71))

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Set the motor to be used

Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Pr. 71 (Pr. 450)

Motor ( : Used motor)

Setting
Pr. 71

Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal Relay Function

Pr. 450

0
(Pr. 71 initial value)
1
40

50

13

23

43
53

9999
(initial
value)

1
2

Standard

Constant torque

(SF-JR, etc.)

(SF-JRCA, etc.)

Thermal characteristics of a standard motor


Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor (SF-HR)
Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-HRCA)
Standard motor
Constant-torque motor
Select "Offline auto tuning
Mitsubishi standard motor
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or less)
setting"
Mitsubishi high efficiency motor (SF-HR)
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-HRCA)

1
2

1
2

Without second applied motor

Motor constants of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR.


Motor constants of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA.

REMARKS
When performing offline auto tuning, set any of "3, 13, 23, 43, 53" in Pr. 71.
(Refer to page 100 for offline auto tuning.)
For the FR-D740-120 and 160, the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are automatically
changed according to the Pr. 71 setting as follows.

Automatic Change
Parameter

Standard Motor
Setting 1

Constant-torque Motor
Setting 2

Pr. 0

3%

2%

Pr. 12

4%

2%

1
2

98

Pr. 71 setting: 0, 3, 23, 40, 43


Pr. 71 setting: 1, 13, 50, 53

Selection and protection of a motor


(2)

Use two motors (Pr. 450)

Set Pr. 450 Second applied motor to use two different motors with one inverter.
When "9999" (initial value) is set, no function is selected.
When a value other than 9999 is set in Pr. 450, the second motor is valid when the RT signal turns on.
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.

REMARKS
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 111)

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
Set the electronic thermal relay function to the thermal characteristic for the constant-torque motor when
using a geared motor (GM-G, GM-D, GM-SY, GM-HY2 series) to perform general-purpose magnetic-flux vector
control.

Parameters referred to
Refer to page 104

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 0 Torque boost


Refer to page 69
Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage
Pr. 80 Motor capacity
Refer to page 100

99

Selection and protection of a motor


4.8.3

To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)

The motor performance can be maximized with offline auto tuning.


What is offline auto tuning?
When performing general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, the motor can be run with the optimum operating
characteristics by automatically measuring the motor constants (offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants
differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring length is long.
Parameter
Number

71
80

Name

Applied motor
Motor capacity

Initial Value

Setting Range
0, 1, 3, 13, 23, 40,

43, 50, 53
0.1 to 7.5kW

9999

9999

Description
By selecting a standard motor or constanttorque motor, thermal characteristic and motor
constants of each motor are set.
Applied motor capacity.
V/F control
Tuning data

0 to 500A

82

Motor excitation current

9999

automatically set.)
9999

83

Motor rated voltage

84

Rated motor frequency

200V class

200V

400V class

400V

50Hz

(The value measured by offline auto tuning is


Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR,
SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.

0 to 1000V

Rated motor voltage (V).

10 to 120Hz

Rated motor frequency (Hz).


Tuning data
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is

90

Motor constant (R1)

9999

0 to 50, 9999

automatically set.)
9999: Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SFHR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.

Offline auto tuning is not performed


For general-purpose magnetic flux vector
control

96

Auto tuning setting/


status

11
0

Offline auto tuning is performed without motor


running.
(motor constant (R1) only)
Offline auto tuning for V/F control (automatic

21

restart after instantaneous power failure (with


frequency search)) (Refer to page 134)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

100

Selection and protection of a motor


(1)

Before performing offline auto tuning


POINT
This function is made valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 and general-purpose magnetic
flux vector control is selected.
You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-PU07).
Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC, etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor, high
efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2kW or more), and Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA SF-HRCA
four-pole 0.4kW to 7.5kW) are used or the wiring length is long, using the offline auto tuning function runs the
motor with the optimum operating characteristics.
Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no
problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is
unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
Reading/writing/copy of motor constants (Pr. 90) and motor excitation current tuned by offline auto tuning are
enabled.
The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Do not connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) between the inverter and motor.

Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.


Make sure general-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80) is selected. (Tuning can be performed even under V/F
control selected by turning on X18.)
A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity should be
0.1kW or more)
The maximum frequency is 120Hz.
A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned.
As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem
in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if
the motor runs slightly.
Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASFH/FRBMF-H) connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.

(2)

Setting

1) Select general-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Refer to page 70).


2) Set "11" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status.
Tuning motor constants (R1) only without running the motor. (It takes approximately 9s until tuning is completed.)

Motor
Mitsubishi standard motor
Mitsubishi high efficiency motor

Mitsubishi constant-torque motor

Pr. 71 Setting
SF-JR

SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or less

23

SF-HR

43

Others

SF-JRCA 4P

13

SF-HRCA

53

Others (SF-JRC, etc.)

13

Other standard motor

Other constant-torque motor

13

101

4
PARAMETERS

3) Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 95)
4) Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200V/400V) in Pr. 83 Motor rated voltage and rated motor frequency (initial
value is 50Hz) in Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency.
(For a Japanese standard motor, etc. which has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated values, use it with an initial value(200V/60Hz
or 400V/60Hz).
5) Set Pr. 71 Applied motor according to the motor used.

Selection and protection of a motor


(3)

Execution of tuning
POINT
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
if the inverter is in the status for tuning. (Refer to 2) below) When the start command is turned on under V/F
control, the motor starts.
1) When performing tuning or PU operation, press
of the operation panel or
or
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.

of the parameter unit

NOTE
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press

of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF

signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)


During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value)
Input terminal <valid signal>
Output terminal

STF, STR

RUN, AM, A, B, C

Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in five steps from AM when speed and output frequency
are selected.
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequerence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto
tuning. Auto tuning is not excecuted properly.

2) Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
Parameter Unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
Display
Pr. 96 setting

11

(1) Setting

READ:List

(2)Tuning in progress

Operation Panel Indication


11

11
STOP PU

TUNE

12

STF FWD PU

(3)Normal end

Flickering
TUNE
13
COMPETION
STF STOP PU

(4)Error end
(when inverter protective
function operation is

TUNE
9
ERROR
STF STOP PU

activated)

REMARKS
It takes approximately 9s until tuning is completed.
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.

102

Selection and protection of a motor


3) When offline auto tuning ends, press

of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn off

the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once.


This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
4) If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
Error

Error Cause

Display

Remedy

Forced end

Inverter protective function operation

Make setting again.

91

Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated.

Set "1" in Pr. 156.

92

Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated value.

Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.

Calculation error

Check the motor wiring and make setting again.

A motor is not connected.

Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.

93

5) When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing

Set "11" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.

or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto

tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.

NOTE
The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until
the offline auto tuning is performed again.
An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on,
the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if a fault retry has been set, retry is
ignored.

CAUTION
As the motor may run slightly during offline auto tuning, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure
that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is
unaffected.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
Refer to page 110
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 95
Pr. 80 Motor capacity
Refer to page 70
Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection
Refer to page 74
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 108
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 114

PARAMETERS

103

Motor brake and stop operation

4.9

Motor brake and stop operation


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Motor braking torque adjustment


Improve the motor braking torque with
an option
Coast the motor to a stop

4.9.1

DC Injection brake
Selection of a
regenerative brake
Selection of motor
stopping method

Refer to Page

Pr. 10 to Pr. 12

104

Pr. 30, Pr. 70

105

Pr. 250

107

DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)

The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust the stop timing and braking torque.
In DC injection brake operation, DC voltage is directly applied to the motor to prevent the motor shaft from rotating. The
motor will not return to the original position if the motor shaft rotates due to external force.
Parameter
Number

Name

DC injection brake
operation frequency
DC injection brake
operation time

10
11

DC injection brake
operation voltage

12

Setting

Initial Value

0 to

3Hz

120Hz
0

0.5s

0.1 to 10s

FR-D720S-008 and 014


FR-D740-012 to 160
FR-D720S-025 or more

Description

Range

6%
4%

0 to 30%

Operation frequency of the DC injection brake.


DC injection brake disabled
Operation time of the DC injection brake.
DC injection brake voltage (torque). When "0" is
set, DC injection brake is disabled.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection ="0". (Refer to page 157)

Output frequency (Hz)

(1)

DC injection
brake voltage

Pr. 10
Operation frequency
Time
Pr. 12
Operation
voltage

Time
Pr. 11 Operation time

(3)

Operation frequency setting (Pr. 10)


After the frequency at which the DC injection brake will be operated is
set to Pr. 10, the DC voltage is applied to the motor when this frequency
is reached during deceleration.

(2)

Operation time setting (Pr. 11)


In Pr. 11, set the time of the DC injection brake.
When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increasing
the setting produces an effect.
When Pr. 11 = "0s", the DC injection brake is disabled. (At a stop, the
motor coasts.)

Operation voltage (torque) setting (Pr. 12)


Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage to the power supply voltage.
When Pr. 12 = "0%", the DC injection brake is disabled. (At a stop, the motor coasts.)
When using the constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA) and energy saving motor (SF-HR, SF-HRCA), change the Pr. 12 setting
as follows:
SF-JRCA:
FR-D740-080 or less, FR-D720S-100 or less...4%
FR-D740-120 or more...2%
SF-HR, SF-HRCA:
FR-D740-080 or less, FR-D720S-100 or less...4%
FR-D740-120 or more...3%

104

Motor brake and stop operation


REMARKS
For the FR-D740-120 and 160, when the Pr. 12 setting is the following, changing the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting automatically
changes the Pr. 12 setting. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the Pr. 12 setting.
(a) When 4% (initial value) is set in Pr. 12
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 2% if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the standard motor
(0, 3, 23, 40, 43) to the value selecting the constant torque motor (1, 13, 50, 53).
(b) When 2% is set in Pr. 12
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 4% (initial value) if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the
constant torque motor (1, 13, 50, 53) to the value selecting the standard motor (0, 3, 23, 40, 43).
Even if the Pr. 12 setting is increased, braking torque is limited so that the output current is within the rated inverter current.

CAUTION
As stop holding torque is not produced, install a mechanical brake.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Pr. 71 Applied motor

4.9.2

Refer to page 93
Refer to page 98

Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)

When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional brake resistor (MRS type), high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
and brake unit (FR-BU2) to increase the regenerative brake duty.
Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) for continuous operation in regeneration status.
Use the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or continuously use the
regenerative status.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

Description
Without regenerative function,
Brake resistor (MRS type),

30

Regenerative function
selection

Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)

0
1
2

70

Special regenerative
brake duty

0%

Brake unit (FR-BU2)

0 to 30%

High power factor converter (FR-HC)


High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
High power factor converter (FR-HC) when automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure is selected
Brake duty when using the high-duty brake resistor
(FR-ABR)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

When using the brake resistor (MRS type), brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common

Set Pr. 30 to "0" (initial value). The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid.
At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows.
FR-D720S-025 to 100 ...................................................... 3%
FR-D740-012 or more ...................................................... 2%
Assign the inverter operation enable signal (X10) to the contact input terminal. To make protective coordination with the
FR-HC and FR-CV, use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output.
Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC (RDYB signal of the FR-CV).
For the terminal used for X10 signal input, assign its function by setting "10" (X10) to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182.

(2)

When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) (FR-D720S-025 or more, FR-D740-012 or more)
Set "1" in Pr. 30.
Set "10%" in Pr. 70.

105

PARAMETERS

converter (FR-CV), and high power factor converter (FR-HC).

Motor brake and stop operation


(3)

When a high power factor converter (FR-HC) is used and automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure function is made valid.
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function of both the FR-HC and inverter is made valid (when a
value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 57 Restart coasting time), set "2" in Pr. 30 .
Set Pr. 70 to "0%" (initial value).
When the FR-HC detects power failure during inverter operation, the RDY signal turns on, resulting in the motor coasting.
Turning the RDY signal off after power restoration, the inverter detects the motor speed (depends on the Pr.162 Automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure selection ) and restarts automatically after instantaneous power failure.

(4)

Regenerative brake duty alarm output and alarm signal (RBP signal)
[RB] appears on the operation panel and an alarm
signal (RBP) is output when 85% of the regenerative

100%: regenerative overvoltage protection operation value

Ratio of the brake


duty to the Pr. 70
setting (%)
100
85
Time
Regenerative brake
pre-alarm (RBP)

OFF

ON

ON

brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. If the regenerative


brake duty reaches 100% of the Pr. 70 setting, a
regenerative overvoltage (E.OV1 to E.OV3) occurs.
Note that [RB] is not displayed when Pr. 30 = "0".
The inverter does not trip even when the alarm (RBP)
signal is output.
For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign
the function by setting "7 (positive logic) or 107
(negative logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal
function selection) .

REMARKS
The MRS signal can also be used instead of the X10 signal. (Refer to page 110)
Refer to page 28 to 32 for connecting the brake resistor (MRS type), high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), brake unit (FR-BU2),
high power factor converter (FR-HC), and power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).

NOTE
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) and Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection), the other functions may be affected. Make setting after confirming the function of each
terminal. (Refer to page 108)

WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used.
Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time
Refer to page 131
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

106

Refer to page 108


Refer to page 114

Motor brake and stop operation


4.9.3

Stop selection (Pr. 250)

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal.
You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR). (Refer to page 112 for start signal selection)
Description
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Start signal (STF/


STR)

Stop operation

(Refer to page 112)


0 to 100s

1000s to 1100s

250

Stop selection

9999

STF signal:

The motor is coasted to a stop

Forward rotation start

when the preset time elapses

STR signal:

after the start signal is turned

Reverse rotation start


STF signal: Start signal

off.
The motor is coasted to a stop

STR signal:

(Pr. 250 - 1000)s after the start

Forward/reverse signal
STF signal:

signal is turned off.

Forward rotation start

9999

8888

STR signal:

When the start signal is turned

Reverse rotation start


STF signal: Start signal

off, the motor decelerates to


stop.

STR signal:
Forward/reverse signal

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)
Output
frequency
(Hz)

Deceleration starts
when start signal turns off

Decelerate the motor to a stop


Set Pr. 250 to "9999" (initial value) or "8888".
The motor decelerates to a stop when the start signal
(STF/STR) turns off.

Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
DC brake
Time
ON

RUN signal

OFF
ON

OFF

(2)
Output is shut off
when set time elapses
after start signal turned off
Pr. 250

Output
frequency
(Hz)

The motor coasts to stop


Time
Start signal

OFF

ON

RUN signal

ON

OFF

Coast the motor to a stop


Use Pr. 250 to set the time from when the start signal
turns off until the output is shut off. When any of "1000 to
1100" is set, the output is shut off in (Pr. 250 - 1000)s.
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has
elapsed after the start signal had turned off. The motor
coasts to a stop.
The RUN signal turns off when the output stops.

REMARKS
Stop selection is invalid when the following functions are activated.
Power failure stop function (Pr. 261)
PU stop (Pr. 75)
Deceleration stop because of communication error (Pr. 502)
Jog operation mode

NOTE
When the start signal is turned on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at Pr. 13 Starting frequency.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Refer to page 93

Refer to page 91

107

4
PARAMETERS

Start signal

Function assignment of external terminal and control

4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Assign function to input terminal


Set MRS signal (output shutoff) to
NC contact specification
Assign start signal and forward/
reverse command to other signals
Assign function to output terminal

Detect output frequency

Detect output current


Remote output function

Input terminal function


selection

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182

108

Pr. 17

110

Pr. 250

112

Pr. 190, Pr. 192

114

Pr. 41 to Pr. 43

118

Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167

119

Pr. 495, Pr. 496

121

MRS input selection


Start signal (STF/STR)
operation selection
Output terminal function
assignment
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
Output frequency
detection
Output current detection
Zero current detection
Remote output

Refer to Page

4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182)


Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter
Number

178
179
180
181
182

Name

STF terminal function


selection
STR terminal function
selection
RL terminal function
selection
RM terminal function
selection
RH terminal function
selection

Initial

Initial Signal

Value
60

STF (forward rotation command)

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24,


25, 37, 60, 62, 65 to 67, 9999

61

STR (reverse rotation command)

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24,


25, 37, 61, 62, 65 to 67, 9999

RL (low-speed operation command)

1
2

RM (middle speed operation


command)
RH (high-speed operation
command)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

108

Setting Range

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24,


25, 37, 62, 65 to 67, 9999

Function assignment of external terminal and control


(1)

Input terminal function assignment


Using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, set the functions of the input terminals.
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:

Setting
0

Signal
RL

RM

RH

3
4
5
7

RT
AU
JOG
OH

REX

10
12
14

X10
X12
X14

16

X16

18
24
25
37
60

X18
MRS
STOP
X37
STF

61

STR

62

RES

65

X65

66

X66

67

X67

9999

Function
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)

Low-speed operation command

Pr. 59 0 1

Remote setting (setting clear)

Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)

Middle-speed operation command

Pr. 59 0 1

Remote setting (deceleration)

Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)

High-speed operation command

Pr. 59 0 1
Remote setting (acceleration)
Second function selection
Terminal 4 input selection
Jog operation selection
External thermal relay input 2
15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM,
RH)
Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC, FR-CV connection)
PU operation external interlock
PID control valid terminal
PU-external operation switchover (turning on X16 selects
external operation)
V/F switchover (V/F control is exercised when X18 is on)
Output stop
Start self-holding selection
Traverse function selection
Forward rotation (assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only)
Reverse rotation command (assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179)
only)
Inverter reset
PU/NET operation switchover (turning on X65 selects PU
operation)
External/NET operation switchover (turning on X66 selects
NET operation)
Command source switchover (turning on X67 makes Pr. 338
and Pr. 339 commands valid)
No function

Related Parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59
Pr. 44 to Pr. 51
Pr. 267
Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Pr. 9
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Pr. 79
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134
Pr. 79, Pr. 340
Pr. 80
Pr. 17

Pr. 592 to Pr. 597

Refer to
Page
84
88
84
88
84
88
111
145
86
95
84
105
160
207
167
70, 100
110
112
221
112

112

Pr. 79, Pr. 340

168

Pr. 79, Pr. 340

168

Pr. 338, Pr. 339

171

When Pr. 59 Remote function selection "0", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals are changed as given in the table.

The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens".

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

The priorities of the speed commands are in order of jog > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14).
When the X10 signal (FR-HC, FR-CV connection-inverter operation enable signal) is not set or when the PU operation
external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned with Pr.79 Operation mode selection set to "7", the MRS signal shares this
function.
Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not be set at the same
time.)
When V/F control is selected by V/F switchover (X18 signal), second function is also selected at the same time.
Control between V/F and general-purpose magnetic flux can not be switched during operation. In case control is
switched between V/F and general-purpose magnetic flux, only second function is selected.
Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.

(2)

Response time of each signal


The response time of the X10 signal and MRS signal is within 2ms.
The response time of other signals is within 20ms.

109

PARAMETERS

One function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the terminal inputs are ORed.

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)
The inverter output can be shut off by the MRS signal. Also, logic for the MRS signal can be selected.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description

Normally open input


Normally closed input
(NC contact input specifications)
External terminal: Normally closed input
(NC contact input specifications)
Communication: Normally open input

17

MRS input selection

0
4

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)
The motor coasts to stop

Time

MRS Signal

ON

STF (STR)
signal

ON

Setting value "0" (initial value)

Setting value "2"

Inverter
Output stop

Inverter
Output stop

MRS
PC

MRS
PC

Output shutoff signal (MRS signal)

Turning on the output shutoff signal (MRS) during inverter running shuts
off the output immediately.
Set "24" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to
assign a function to the MRS signal.
MRS signal may be used as described below.
(a) When mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) is used to stop
motor
The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
(b) To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter
With the MRS signal on, the inverter cannot be operated if the start
signal is entered into the inverter.
(c) Coast the motor to a stop.
When the start signal is turned off, the inverter decelerates the motor
to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS signal is
turned on, the motor coasts to a stop.

(2)

MRS signal logic inversion (Pr. 17)


When Pr. 17 is set to "2", the MRS signal (output stop) can be changed
to the normally closed (NC contact) input specification. When the MRS
signal turns on (opens), the inverter shuts off the output.

(3)

Assign a different action for each MRS signal input from communication and external terminal
(Pr. 17 = "4")
When Pr. 17 is set to "4", the MRS signal from external terminal (output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC
contact) input, and the MRS signal from communication can be changed to the normally open (NO contact) input.
This function is useful to perform operation by communication with MRS signal from external terminal remained on.
External MRS

Communication MRS

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Pr. 17 Setting
2

Operation enabled
Output shutoff
Output shutoff
Output shutoff

Output shutoff
Output shutoff
Output shutoff
Operation enabled

Output shutoff
Output shutoff
Operation enabled
Output shutoff

REMARKS
The MRS signal can shut off the output, independently of the PU, external or network operation mode.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

110

Refer to page 108

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.3

Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT)

You can select the second function using the RT signal.


When the RT signal turns on, the second function becomes valid.
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
The second function has the following applications.
(a) Switching between normal use and emergency use
(b) Switching between heavy load and light load
(c) Changing of acceleration/deceleration time by broken line acceleration/deceleration
(d) Switching of characteristic between the main motor and sub motor

Second acceleration/deceleration time


Output frequency

Second function connection diagram


Inverter

Start
Second function
selection
High speed
Middle speed

STF(STR)
RT
RH

Acceleration time
is reflected
Time

RM
PC
RT
RH
RM

First Function

Second Function

Refer to

Parameter Number

Parameter Number

Page

Torque boost

Pr. 0

Pr. 46

69

Base frequency

Pr. 3

Pr. 47

80

Acceleration time

Pr. 7

Pr. 44

91

Deceleration time

Pr. 8

Pr. 44, Pr. 45

91

Electronic thermal O/L relay

Pr. 9

Pr. 51

95

Stall prevention

Pr. 22

Pr. 48

74

Applied motor

Pr. 71

Pr. 450

98

Function

NOTE
When the RT signal is on, the above second function is selected at the same time.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Refer to page 108

PARAMETERS

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

111

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.4 Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250)
You can select the operation of the start signal (STF/STR).
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal.
(Refer to page 107 for stop selection)
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial
Value

Description

Stop
selection

Stop operation

(STF/STR)
0 to 100s

250

Start signal

Setting Range

1000s to 1100s

9999

Refer to page 107


The motor is coasted to a stop

STF signal: Forward rotation start

when the preset time elapses

STR signal: Reverse rotation start

after the start signal is turned off.


When the setting is any of 1000s to

STF signal: Start signal

1100s, the inverter coasts to a stop

STR signal: Forward/reverse signal

in (Pr. 250 - 1000)s.

STF signal: Forward rotation start

9999

When the start signal is turned

STR signal: Reverse rotation start


STF signal: Start signal

8888

off, the motor decelerates to


stop.

STR signal: Forward/reverse signal

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Two-wire type connection (STF, STR signal)


The two-wire connection is shown below.
In the default setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) are used as start and stop signals. Turn on either of
the forward and reverse rotation signals to start the motor in the corresponding direction. Switch on both or switch off (or
both on) the start signal during operation to decelerate the inverter to a stop.
The speed setting signal may either be given by entering 0 to 10VDC across the speed setting input terminal 2-5, by
setting the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (high, middle, low speeds), etc.
(For multi-speed operation, refer to page 84.)
When Pr. 250 is set to any of "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal becomes a start command and the STR signal a
forward/reverse command.

STF
STR Inverter

Reverse rotation start

Forward/reverse
signal

Output frequency

PC

10

Time

Reverse
rotation

ON

STR

PC

10

Forward
rotation

STF

STF
STR Inverter

Start signal

ON

2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "9999")

Output frequency

Forward rotation start

Forward
rotation
Time
Reverse
rotation
STF

ON

STR

ON

2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "8888")

REMARKS
When Pr. 250 is set to any of "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", turning off the start command coasts the inverter to a stop. (Refer to page 107)
The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the default setting. The STF signal can be assigned to
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection, and the STR signal to Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection only.

112

Function assignment of external terminal and control


(2)

Three-wire type (STF, STR, STOP signal)


The three-wire connection is shown below.
Turning the STOP signal on makes start self-holding function valid. In this case, the forward/reverse rotation signal
functions only as a start signal.
If the start signal (STF or STR) is turned on and then off, the start signal is held and makes a start. When changing the
direction of rotation, turn STR (STF) on once and then off.
To stop the inverter, turning off the STOP signal once decelerates it to a stop.
When using the STOP signal, set "25" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 to assign function.
Forward
Stop rotation start

Stop

Start
STF

STF
Reverse
rotation start

Inverter

Inverter
STR

STOP

STOP

STR
Forward rotation
/reverse rotation
PC

Forward
rotation
Time
Reverse
rotation
ON

Output frequency

Output frequency

PC

Forward
rotation
Time
Reverse
rotation
ON

ON

STF

STF
ON

STR

STR

ON

STOP ON

STOP ON
OFF

OFF

OFF

3-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "9999")

OFF

3-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "8888")

REMARKS
When the JOG signal is turned on to enable jog operation, the STOP signal becomes invalid.
If the MRS signal is turned on to stop the output, the self-holding function is not canceled.

Start signal selection

Pr. 250 Setting Inverter Status


0 to 100s, 9999
1000s to 1100s 8888

STF

STR

OFF

OFF

Stop

OFF

ON

Reverse rotation

ON

OFF

Forward rotation

Forward rotation

ON

ON

Stop

Reverse rotation

Stop

PARAMETERS

(3)

Parameters referred to
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 (multi-speed setting)
Refer to page 84
Refer to page 108
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

113

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190, Pr. 192)
You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and relay output terminal.
Parameter

Initial

Name

Number

Initial Signal

Value

190

RUN terminal
function selection

Open collector
output terminal

RUN (inverter running)

192

A,B,C terminal
function selection

Relay
output terminal

99

ALM (fault output)

Setting Range
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 25,
26, 46, 47, 64, 70, 90, 91, 93*, 95,
96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104,
107, 108, 111 to 116, 125, 126,
146, 147, 164, 170, 190, 191,
193*, 195, 196, 198, 199, 9999

* "93" and "193" can not be set in Pr. 192.


The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Output signal list


You can set the functions of the output terminals.
Refer to the following table and set the parameters: (0 to 99: positive logic, 100 to 199: negative logic)

Setting
Positive Negative
logic
logic

Signal

100

RUN

101

SU

Function

Operation

Related
Parameter

Refer
to
Page

Inverter running

Output during operation when the inverter output frequency


rises to or above Pr. 13 Starting frequency.

Up to frequency 1

Output when the output frequency is reached to the set frequency.

Pr. 41

118
74

116

103

OL

Overload alarm

Output while stall prevention function is activated.

Pr. 22, Pr. 23,


Pr. 66

104

FU

Output frequency
detection

Output when the output frequency reaches the frequency


set in Pr. 42 (Pr. 43 for reverse rotation).

Pr. 42, Pr. 43

118

107

RBP

Regenerative brake
pre-alarm

Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr.


70 is reached.

Pr. 70

105

108

THP

Electronic thermal O/L


relay pre-alarm

Output when the electronic thermal value reaches 85% of


the trip level. (Electronic thermal relay function protection
(E.THT/E.THM) activates, when the value reached 100%.

Pr. 9, Pr. 51

95

11

111

RY

Inverter operation
ready

Output when reset process is completed (when the inverter


can be started by switching the start signal on or while it is
running) after powering on inverter.

116

12

112

Y12

Output current
detection

Output when the output current is higher than the Pr. 150
setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 151 .

Pr. 150,
Pr. 151

119

13

113

Y13

Zero current detection

Output when the output power is lower than the Pr. 152
setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 153 .

Pr. 152,
Pr. 153

119

14

114

FDN

PID lower limit

15

115

FUP

PID upper limit

16

116

RL

25

125

FAN

Output when the feedback value falls below the lower limit
of PID control.
Pr. 127 to
Output when the feedback value rises above the upper limit Pr. 134
of PID control
Pr. 575 to Pr.
577
Output when forward rotation is performed in PID control.

207

Fan fault output

Output at the time of a fan fault.

Pr. 244

225

Output when the heatsink temperature reaches about 85%


of the heatsink overheat protection providing temperature.

251

Output when the power failure-time deceleration function is


executed.
(retained until release)

Pr. 261

137

207

PID forward/reverse
rotation output

26

126

FIN

Heatsink overheat
pre-alarm

46

146

Y46

During deceleration at
occurrence of power
failure

Output during PID control.

Pr. 127 to
Pr. 134
Pr. 575 to Pr.
577

47

147

PID

During PID control


activated

64

164

Y64

During retry

Output during retry processing.

Pr. 65 to
Pr. 69

139

PID output interruption

Output when the PID output interruption function is


executed.

Pr. 127 to Pr.


134,
Pr. 575 to Pr.
577

207

70

114

170

SLEEP

Function assignment of external terminal and control


Setting
Positive Negative
logic
logic

Function

Operation

Related
Parameter

Refer
to
Page

90

190

Y90

Life alarm

Output when any of the control circuit capacitor, main


circuit capacitor and inrush current limit circuit or the
cooling fan approaches the end of its service life.

91

191

Y91

Fault output 3
(power-off signal)

Output when a fault occurs due to the internal circuit failure


of the inverter wiring mistake.
Average current value and maintenance timer value are
output as pulses.
The signal can not be set in Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function
selection .

Pr. 555 to
Pr. 557

231

Pr. 255 to
Pr. 259

226
117

93

193

Y93

Current average value


monitor signal

95

195

Y95

Maintenance timer
signal

Output when Pr. 503 rises to or above the Pr. 504 setting.

Pr. 503,
Pr. 504

230

96

196

REM

Remote output

Output to the terminal when a value is set to the parameter.

Pr. 495, Pr.


496

121

98

198

LF

Alarm output

Output when an alarm (fan failure or communication error


warning) occurs.

Pr. 121,
Pr. 244

178,
225

99

199

ALM

Fault output

Output when the fault occurs.


The signal output is stopped when the fault is reset.

117

No function

9999

Note that when the frequency setting is varied using an analog signal or

of the operation panel, the output of the SU (up to frequency) signal may

alternate on and off depending on that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed due to acceleration/deceleration time setting.
(The output will not alternate on and off when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0s".)

REMARKS
The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
When the function is executed, the terminal conducts at the setting of any of "0 to 99", and does not conduct at the setting of
any of "100 to 199".

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190, Pr.192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Do not assign signals which repeat frequent ON/OFF to A, B, and C. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact decreases.

4
PARAMETERS

Signal

115

Function assignment of external terminal and control


(2)

Inverter operation ready signal (RY signal) and inverter running signal (RUN signal)
ON

Power supply

OFF
ON

STF

OFF
ON

Output frequency

RH

DC injection brake operation point


DC injection brake operation
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Time

Reset processing

ON

RY

OFF
ON

RUN

OFF

When the inverter is ready to operate, the output of the operation ready signal (RY) is on. (It is also on during inverter running.)
When the output frequency of the inverter rises to or above Pr. 13 Starting frequency , the output of the inverter running signal
(RUN) is turned on. During an inverter stop or DC injection brake operation, the output is off.
When using the RY and RUN signals, assign functions to Pr.190 or Pr.192 (output terminal selection function) referring to the
table below.
Output

Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 Setting


Positive logic
Negative logic

Signal
RY
RUN

11
0

Inverter
Status

Start
Signal
OFF

Output

(during

signal

stop)

111
100

Automatic Restart after


Start

Start

At Alarm

Signal ON

Signal ON

Under DC

Occurrence

(during

(during

Injection Brake

or MRS Signal ON

stop)

operation)

(output shutoff)

ON

OFF

RY

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON 1

ON

RUN

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

This signal turns OFF during power failure or undervoltage.

REMARKS
The RUN signal (positive logic) is assigned to the terminal RUN in the initial setting.

116

Instantaneous Power Failure


Coasting
Start
Start
Restarting
signal
signal

Function assignment of external terminal and control


(3)

Fault output signal (ALM signal)


Inverter fault occurrence
(Trip)

If the inverter comes to trip, the ALM signal is output.

Output
frequency
Time
ALM
RES

ON OFF
ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON

REMARKS
The ALM signal is assigned to the ABC contact in the default setting. By setting "99 (positive logic) or 199 (negative logic) in
Pr.190 or Pr.192 (output terminal function selection), the ALM signal can be assigned to the other signal.
Refer to page 246 for the inverter fault description.

(4)

Fault output 3 (power-off signal) (Y91 signal)

The Y91 signal is output at occurrence of a fault attributable to the failure of the inverter circuit or a fault caused by a wiring
mistake.
When using the Y91 signal, set "91 (positive logic)" or "191 (negative logic)" to Pr.190 or Pr.192 (output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
The following table indicates the faults that will output the Y91 signal. (Refer to page 245 for the fault description.)
Operation Panel

Name

Indication
E. BE

Brake transistor alarm detection

E.GF

Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at


start

E.LF

Output phase loss

E.PE

Parameter storage device fault

E.CPU

CPU fault

E.IOH

Inrush current limit circuit fault

REMARKS
At occurrence of output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF), overcurrent trip during acceleration(E.OC1) may be
displayed. At this time, the Y91 signal is output.

Parameters referred to
Refer to page 93

PARAMETERS

Pr. 13 Starting frequency

117

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43)
The inverter output frequency is detected and output at the output signals.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

10%

0 to 100%

Level where the SU signal turns on.

6Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency where the FU signal turns on.

Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
Output frequency
detection
Output frequency
detection for reverse
rotation

41
42
43

0 to 400Hz

9999

9999

Description

Frequency where the FU signal turns on in reverse


rotation.
Same as Pr. 42 setting

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)
Output frequency
(Hz)

Set frequency

SU

When the output frequency reaches the set frequency, the


up-to-frequency signal (SU) is output.
The Pr. 41 value can be adjusted within the range 0% to
100% on the assumption that the set frequency is 100%.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running
frequency has been reached to provide the operation start
signal etc. for related equipment.
When using the SU signal, set "1 (positive logic) or 101
(negative logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function
selection) to assign function to the output terminal.

Adjustment
range Pr.41

Time
OFF

ON

OFF

Output frequency (Hz)

(2)

Output signal OFF


FU

Up-to-frequency sensitivity (SU signal, Pr. 41)

Output frequency detection


(FU signal, Pr. 42, Pr. 43)

Forward
rotation

Pr.42

Time
Pr.43

Reverse
rotation
ON

OFF

ON

OFF

The output frequency detection signal (FU) is output when


the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr. 42 setting.
This function can be used for electromagnetic brake
operation, open signal, etc.
When the detection frequency is set to Pr. 43, frequency
detection for reverse operation use only can also be set.
This function is effective for switching the timing of
electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation
(rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation,
etc.
When Pr. 43 "9999", the Pr. 42 setting is used for forward
rotation and the Pr. 43 setting is used for reverse rotation.
When using the FU signal, set "4 (positive logic)" or "104
(negative logic)" to Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.

REMARKS
All signals are off during DC injection brake.
The output frequency to be compared with the set frequency is the output frequency before slip compensation is performed.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190, Pr.192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

118

(Refer to page 114)

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.7 Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)
The output current during inverter running can be detected and output to the output terminal.
Parameter

Name

Number

Setting

Initial Value

Description

Range

150

Output current detection


level

151

Output current detection


signal delay time

152

Zero current detection


level

5%

0 to 200%

153

Zero current detection


time

0.5s

0 to 1s

Pr. 152 value until the zero current detection signal

0 to 10s

Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is on.

150%

0 to 200%

Output current detection level.


100% is the rated inverter current.
Output current detection period.

0s

0 to 10s

The time from when the output current has risen


above the setting until the output current detection
signal (Y12) is output.

(Y13) is output.
0.1s

9999
0

Output current detection


operation selection

167

The rated inverter current is assumed to be 100%.


Period from when the output current drops below the

Output current detection


signal retention time

166

Zero current detection level.

The Y12 signal on status is retained. The signal is


turned off at the next start.
Operation continues when the Y12 signal is on
The inverter is brought to trip when the Y12 signal is
on. (E.CDO)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

9999, Pr. 167 = 0

(Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr. 151, Pr. 166, Pr. 167 )

Output current

Pr. 150

Output current
detection signal
(Y12)

Pr. 151

Pr. 166
Min. 0.1s (initial value)
OFF

Output current detection

ON

OFF

Time

The output current detection function can be used for


excessive torque detection, etc.
If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr.
151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from
the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When the Y12 signal turns on, the ON state is held for the
time set in Pr. 166.
When Pr. 166 = "9999", the ON state is held until a next start.
At the Pr. 167 setting of "1", the inverter trips and the output
current detection fault (E.CDO) is displayed when the Y12
signal turns on. When fault occurs, the Y12 signal is on for
the time set in Pr. 166 at the Pr. 166 setting of other than
9999, and remains on until a reset is made at the Pr. 166
setting of 9999. E.CDO does not occur even if "1" is set in Pr.
167 while Y12 is ON. The Pr. 167 setting is made valid after
Y12 turns OFF.
For the Y12 signal, set "12 (positive logic) or 112 (negative
logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)
and assign functions to the output terminal.

119

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 166

Function assignment of external terminal and control

Output current

(2)

Pr. 152

Pr. 152

0[A]

Start signal

0.1s*
OFF

Zero current
detection time
(Y13)

Time

ON
OFF

ON
Pr. 153
Detection time

OFF

ON

Pr. 153
Detection time

* The zero current detection signal (Y13) holds the


signal for approximately 0.1s once turned on.

Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr. 153)


If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr.
153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the
inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not
be generated. This may cause a drop due to gravity when
the inverter is used in vertical lift application.
To prevent this, the Y13 signal can be output from the
inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output
current has fallen to "zero".
For the Y13 signal, set "13 (positive logic) or 113 (negative
logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)
and assign functions to the output terminal.

REMARKS
This function is also valid during execution of the offline auto tuning.
The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1s. Note that the response time changes according to the load
condition.
When Pr. 152 = "0", detection is disabled.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection time setting not
too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output
current.
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions detection signal, install a
safety backup such as an emergency brake even the zero current detection function is set valid.

Parameters referred to
Offline auto tuning
Refer to page 100
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

120

Refer to page 114

Function assignment of external terminal and control


4.10.8 Remote output selection (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496)
You can utilize the on/off of the inverter's output signals instead of the remote output terminal of the programmable logic
controller.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial

Setting

Value

Range
0
1

Remote output
selection

495

10
11

496*

Remote output data 1

0 to 4095

Description
Remote output data clear at powering off
Remote output data retention at
powering off

Remote output data


clear at inverter reset

Remote output data clear at powering off

Remote output data

Remote output data retention at

retention at inverter

powering off

reset

Refer to the following diagram.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

<Remote output data>


Pr. 496
b11

b0
RUN

ABC

The output terminal can be turned on/off depending on


the Pr. 496 setting. The remote output selection can be
controlled on/off by computer link communication from
the PU connector.
Set "96 (positive logic) or 196 (negative logic)" to Pr. 190
or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection), and assign the
remote output (REM) signal to the terminal used for
remote output,
When you refer to the diagram on the left and set 1 to the
terminal bit (terminal where the REM signal has been
assigned) of Pr. 496, the output terminal turns on (off for
negative logic). By setting 0, the output terminal turns off
(on for negative logic).

Any

Example: When "96 (positive logic)" is set in Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection and "1" (H01) is set in Pr. 496, the
terminal RUN turns on.

Pr. 495 = 0, 10
Power
supply

REM

Pr. 495 = 1, 11
Power
supply

OFF

OFF
REM signal clear

OFF

Inverter
reset time
(about 1s)
ON

REM

REM signal held

When Pr. 495 = "0 (initial value), 10", performing a power on


reset (including a power failure) clears the REM signal
output. (The ON/OFF status of the terminals are as set in Pr.
190, Pr. 192. ) The Pr. 496 setting is also "0".
When Pr. 495 = "1, 11", the remote output data before power
off is stored into the EEPROM, so the signal output at power
recovery is the same as before power off. However, it is not
stored when the inverter is reset (terminal reset, reset
request through communication).
(See the chart on the left)
When Pr. 495 = "10, 11", signal before rest is saved even at
inverter reset.

REMARKS
The output terminal where the REM signal is not assigned using Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 does not turn on/off if 0/1 is set to the terminal
bit of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497. (It turns on/off with the assigned function.)
When the inverter is reset (terminal reset, reset request through communication), Pr. 496 values turn to "0". When Pr. 495 = "1,
11", however, they are the settings at power off. (The settings are stored at power off.)
When Pr. 495 ="10, 11", they are the same as before an inverter reset is made.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

Refer to page 114

121

4
PARAMETERS

ON/OFF example for positive logic

Monitor display and monitor output signal

4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal


Purpose

Refer to

Parameter that should be Set

Display motor speed


Set speed

Speed display and speed setting

Change PU monitor display data

Monitor display/PU main display


data selection
Cumulative monitor clear

Change the monitor output from


terminal AM
Set the reference of the monitor
output from terminal AM
Adjust terminal AM outputs

Page

Pr. 37

122

Pr. 52, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171,


Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891

123

Pr. 158

123

Pr. 55, Pr. 56

128

Pr. 901

129

Terminal AM function selection


Terminal AM standard setting
Terminal AM calibration

4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37)


The monitor display and frequency setting of the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be changed to the machine speed.
Parameter
Number

37

Initial

Name

Value

Speed display

Setting Range
0
0.01 to 9998

Description
Frequency display, setting
Machine speed at 60Hz.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and it can be calculated from the following formula.

Maximum setting value of Pr. 37

<

16777.215 60 (Hz)
Setting value of Pr. 1 (Hz)

Note that the maximum setting value of Pr. 37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.

To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.
For example, when Pr. 37 = "1000", "1000" is displayed on the output frequency and set frequency monitor when the
running frequency is 60Hz. When running frequency is 30Hz, "500" is displayed.
Pr. 37 Setting
0 (initial value)
0.01 to 9998
1
2

Output Frequency

Set Frequency

Monitor

Monitor

Hz
Machine speed 1

Hz
Machine speed 1

Frequency Setting

Parameter Setting

Hz
Machine speed 1

Hz

Machine speed conversion formula ..........Pr. 37 frequency/60Hz


Hz is displayed in 0.01Hz increments and machine speed is in 0.001.

NOTE
Under V/F control, the output frequency of the inverter is displayed in terms of synchronous speed, and therefore,
displayed value = actual speed + motor slip. The display changes to the actual speed (estimated value calculated
based on the motor slip) when slip compensation was made valid.
Refer to Pr. 52 when you want to change the PU main monitor (PU main display).
Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed "----".
When the machine speed is displayed on the FR-PU04/FR-PU07, do not change the speed by using an up/down key in
the state where the set speed exceeding 65535 is displayed. The set speed may become arbitrary value.
While the machine speed is displayed on the monitor, values of other parameters related to speed (Pr. 1 , etc.) are in
frequency increments.
Due to the limitations on the resolution of the set frequency, the indication in the second decimal place may differ
from the setting.

CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed setting is correct.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency
Refer to page 78
Refer to page 123
Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection

122

Monitor display and monitor output signal


4.11.2 Monitor display selection of operation panel/PU and terminal AM
(Pr. 52, Pr.158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be
selected.
In addition, signal to be output from the terminal AM (analog voltage output) can be selected.
Parameter

Name

Number

52

158

DU/PU main display data


selection
AM terminal function
selection

Initial Value

Setting Range

0, 5, 8 to 12, 14, 20,

(output

23 to 25, 52 to 55,

frequency)

61, 62, 64, 100

1 to 3, 5, 8 to 12,

(output

14, 21, 24, 52, 53,

frequency)

61, 62
0

170

Watt-hour meter clear

Select the monitor to be displayed on the


operation panel and parameter unit.
Refer to the following table for monitor
description.
Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
Set the maximum value when monitoring from

10

9999

Description

communication to 0 to 9999kWh.
Set the maximum value when monitoring from

9999

communication to 0 to 65535kWh.
Set "0" in the parameter to clear the operation

171

Operation hour meter clear

9999

0, 9999

time monitor.
Setting 9999 does not clear.

268

563
564

Monitor decimal digits


selection

9999

Displayed as integral value

Displayed in 0.1 increments.

9999

Energization time carryingover times

Operating time carryingover times

No function

0 to 65535
(reading only)
0 to 65535
(reading only)

The numbers of cumulative energization time


monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed.
(Reading only)
The numbers of operation time monitor
exceeded 65535h is displayed. (Reading only)
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative

0 to 4

891

Cumulative power monitor


digit shifted times

power monitor digit.


Clamp the monitoring value at maximum.

9999

No shift
9999

Clear the monitor value when it exceeds the


maximum value.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

Monitor description list (Pr. 52)


Set the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) in Pr. 52 DU/PU main
display data selection .
Set the monitor to be output to the terminal AM (analog voltage output) in Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection .
Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The monitor marked cannot be selected.)

Types of Monitor

Unit

Pr. 52 Setting
Operation
PU
panel
LED

main

Pr.158 (AM)

Terminal AM

Setting

Full Scale Value

Description

monitor

Output frequency

0.01Hz

0/100

Pr. 55

Displays the inverter output frequency.

Output current

0.01A

0/100

Pr. 56

Displays the inverter output current


effective value.

Output voltage

0.1V

0/100

0/100

Fault display
Frequency setting
value

0.01Hz

Converter output
voltage

0.1V

200V class 400V


400V class 800V

Pr. 55
200V class 400V
400V class 800V

Displays the inverter output voltage.


Displays 8 past faults individually.
Displays the set frequency.
Displays the DC bus voltage value.

123

4
PARAMETERS

(1)

Monitor display and monitor output signal

Types of Monitor

Regenerative brake
duty

Unit

0.1%

Pr. 52 Setting
Operation
PU
panel

main

LED

monitor

Pr.158 (AM)

Terminal AM

Setting

Full Scale Value

Description

Pr. 70

Brake duty set in Pr. 30, Pr. 70

Electronic thermal
relay function load
factor

0.1%

10

10

100%

Displays the thermal cumulative value on


the assumption that the thermal operation
level is 100% (Larger thermal between the
motor thermal and transistor thermal).

Output current peak


value

0.01A

11

11

Pr. 56

Holds and displays the peak value of the


output power monitor.
(Cleared at every start)

Converter output
voltage peak value

0.1V

12

12

200V class 400V Holds and displays the peak value of the
DC bus voltage value.
400V class 800V (Cleared at every start)

0.01kW

14

14

Rated inverter
power 2

Displays the input terminal ON/OFF status


on the operation panel.
(Refer to page 126)

Displays the output terminal ON/OFF


status on the operation panel.
(Refer to page 126)

Output power
Input terminal status

Output terminal
status

Displays the power on the inverter output


side

Cumulative
energization time 2,
5

1h

20

Adds up and displays the energization time


after inverter shipment.
You can check the numbers of the monitor
value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563.

Reference voltage
output

21

Terminal AM:
Output 10V

Adds up and displays the inverter operation


time.
You can check the numbers of the monitor
value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
Can be cleared by Pr. 171. (Refer to page
127)

Actual operation time


2, 3, 5

Motor load factor

1h

23

0.1%

24

24

Displays the output current value on the


assumption that the inverter rated current
value is 100%.
Monitor value = output power monitor
value/rated inverter current 100 [%]

200%

Cumulative power 5 0.01kWh 4

25

PID set point

0.1%

52

52

100%

PID measured value

0.1%

53

53

100%

PID deviation

0.1%

54

Adds up and displays the power amount


based on the output power monitor.
Can be cleared by Pr. 170. (Refer to page
126)
Displays the set point, measured value and
deviation during PID control (Refer to page
212 for details)
Displays the ON/OFF status of the inverter

Inverter I/O terminal


monitor

55

input terminal and output terminal on the


operation panel (Refer to page 126 for
details)

Motor thermal load


factor

0.1%

61

61

Thermal relay
operation level
(100%)

Inverter thermal load


factor

0.1%

62

62

Thermal relay
operation level
(100%)

PTC thermistor
resistance

124

0.01k

64

Motor thermal heat cumulative value is


displayed.
(Motor overload trip (E.THM) at 100%)
Transistor thermal heat cumulative value is
displayed.
(Inverter overload trip (E.THT) at 100%)
Displays the PTC thermistor resistance at
terminal 2 when PTC thermistor protection
is active.
(0.10k to 31.5k) (Refer to page 95)

Monitor display and monitor output signal


1
2
3
4
5
6

Frequency setting to output terminal status on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) on the assumption that 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
Actual operation time is not accumulated when the cumulative operation time is less than 1h until turning off of the power supply.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed "----".
Larger thermal value between the motor thermal and transistor thermal is displayed.
A value other than 0% is displayed if the surrounding air temperature (heatsink temperature) is high even when the inverter is at a stop.

REMARKS
By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of output speed to fault display can be selected in sequence by

When the operation panel is used, the displayed units are Hz and A only and the others are not displayed.
The monitor set in Pr. 52 is displayed in the third monitor position. However, change the output current monitor for the motor
load factor.

Initial Value
The monitor displayed at powering on is the first monitor. Display the monitor you want to display on the first monitor and hold
down

for 1s. (To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down

for 1s after displaying the output frequency

monitor.)
Power-on monitor (first monitor)

Output frequency monitor

Second monitor

Third monitor

Fault monitor

With fault

Output voltage monitor

Output current monitor

Example)When Pr. 52 is set to "20" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as described
below.

Power-on monitor (first monitor)

Second monitor

Third monitor

Fault monitor
With fault

(2)

Output current monitor

Cumulative energization time monitor

Display set frequency during stop (Pr. 52)

Pr. 52
0
During

When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the set frequency and


output frequency are displayed during stop and
operation respectively. (LED of Hz flickers during
stop and is lit during operation.)

running/stop

100
During stop

Output

Output

Set

Output

frequency

frequency

frequency

frequency

Output current

Output current

Output voltage

Output voltage

Fault display

Fault display

During
running

The set frequency displayed indicates the frequency to be output when the start
command is on. Different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr. 52 = "5",
the value based on maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jump is
displayed.

REMARKS
During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
During MRS signal is on, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority.

125

PARAMETERS

Output frequency monitor

Monitor display and monitor output signal


(3)

Operation panel I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52)


When Pr. 52 = "55", the I/O terminal status can be monitored on the operation panel.
The I/O terminal monitor is displayed on the third monitor.
The LED is on when the terminal is on, and the LED is on when the terminal is off. The center line of LED is always on.
On the I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal status and the lower the output
terminal status.

RM
RL

Free

RH
Free

Free STF
Free Free
Free
STR
Free

Input terminal

- Display example When signals STF, RH and


RUN are ON
Hz
A
V

Center line is always on

ABC

(4)

Free

RUN Free

Free
Free

Free Free

Free Free

Free

Output terminal

Free

Cumulative power monitor and clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 891)


On the cumulative power monitor (Pr. 52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 1h
increments.
The operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and communication (RS-485 communication) display
increments and display ranges are as indicated below.
Operation Panel 1

Parameter Unit 2

Range

Unit

Range

Unit

0 to 99.99kWh

0.01kWh

0 to 999.99kWh

0.01kWh

100.0 to 999.9kWh

0.1kWh

1000.0 to 9999.9kWh

0.1kWh

1000 to 9999kWh

1kWh

10000 to 99999kWh

1kWh

Power is measured in the range 0 to 9999.99kWh, and displayed in 4 digits.

Power is measured in the range 0 to 99999.99kWh, and displayed in 5 digits.

Communication
Range
Pr. 170 = 10
Pr. 170 = 9999
0 to 9999kWh

0 to 65535kWh
(initial value)

Unit
1kWh/
0.01kWh

When the monitor value exceeds "99.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
When the monitor value exceeds "999.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
3

In monitoring with communication, cumulative power is displayed in 1kWh increments. And cumulative power 2 is displayed in 0.01kWh. (Refer to page 183
for communication)

The monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 891 settings.
For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh when Pr. 891 = "2", the operation panel display or parameter
unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) display is 12.78 (display in 100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that a digit
shift is necessary. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
Writing "0" in Pr. 170 clears the cumulative power monitor.

REMARKS
If "0" is written to Pr. 170 and Pr. 170 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.

126

Monitor display and monitor output signal


(5)

Cumulative energization time and actual operation time monitor (Pr. 171, Pr. 563, Pr. 564)
Cumulative energization time monitor (Pr. 52 = "20") accumulates energization time from shipment of the inverter every
one hour.
On the actual operation time monitor (Pr. 52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not added
up during a stop.)
If the monitored value exceeds 65535, it is added up from 0. You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time
monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
Writing "0" to Pr. 171 clears the cumulative energization power monitor. (The cumulative time monitor can not be cleared.)

REMARKS
The actual operation time is not added up unless the inverter is operated one or more hours continuously.
If "0" is written to Pr. 171 and Pr. 171 is read again, "9999" is always displayed. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual operation
time meter.

You can select the decimal digits of the monitor (Pr. 268)
As the operation panel display is 4 digits long, the decimal places may vary at analog input, etc. The decimal places can
be hidden by selecting the decimal digits.
In such a case, the decimal digits can be selected by Pr. 268.
Pr. 268 Setting
9999 (initial value)

Description
No function
For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers in the first

decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral value (1 increments).The monitor value smaller than
0.99 is displayed as 0.
When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor

displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). The monitored digits in 1 increments are displayed as they are.

REMARKS
The number of display digits on the cumulative energization time (Pr. 52 = "20") and actual operation time (Pr. 52 = "23") does
not change.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection, Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty
Pr. 37 Speed display
Refer to page 122
Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference

Refer to page 105


Refer to page 128

4
PARAMETERS

(6)

127

Monitor display and monitor output signal


4.11.3 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Analog voltage output from the terminal AM is available.
Set the reference of the signal output from terminal AM.
Parameter

Name

Number

55*
56*

Frequency monitoring
reference
Current monitoring
reference

Initial Value

Setting Range

50Hz

0 to 400Hz

Inverter
rated current

0 to 500A

Description
Full-scale value to output the output frequency
monitor value to terminal AM.
Full-scale value to output the output current
monitor value to terminal AM.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

Output voltage

(1)

Frequency monitoring reference (Pr. 55)


Set the frequency when the optional frequency meter (DC voltmeter
10VDC) shows 50Hz or 120Hz (shows full scale) which is connected
to the terminal AM and 5.
Set the frequency (output frequency/set frequency) when the voltage
10VDC
output at terminal AM is 10VDC.
The analog voltage output and frequency at terminal AM are
proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
1Hz

50Hz
(initial value)

400Hz

Setting range of Pr. 55

Current monitoring reference (Pr. 56)


Set the current to be referenced when the current monitor (inverter
output current, etc.) is selected for terminal AM display.
Set the current value when the voltage output at terminal AM is
10VDC.
(10VDC)
The analog voltage output and current value at terminal AM are
proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
Terminal AM
output voltage

(2)

Rated current
(initial value)
Setting range of Pr. 56

128

500A

Monitor display and monitor output signal


4.11.4 Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901))
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal AM to full scale deflection.
Parameter

Name

Number

C1(901)

Initial Value

Setting Range

AM terminal calibration

Description
Calibrates the scale of the meter
connected to terminal AM.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).

The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

(1)

Terminal AM gain calibration (C1 (Pr. 901))

Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale status of the corresponding monitor item.
Calibration parameter C1 (Pr. 901) allows the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter
scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.
Terminal AM
output

Inverter
AM

Gain calibration of output


siganl (Pr. 901)

10VDC
5

Output
signal

Calibrate the terminal AM gain in the following procedure.


1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) to across inverter terminals AM-5. (Note the polarity. The terminal
AM is positive.)
2) Refer to the monitor description list (page 123) and set Pr. 158.
When you selected the running frequency, inverter output current, etc. as monitor, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the
running frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 10V.
3) When outputting the item that cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21"
(reference voltage output) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for
example) in Pr. 158.

REMARKS
When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr. 158 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and make calibration. 10VDC is output from the terminal AM.

PARAMETERS

129

Monitor display and monitor output signal


(2)

How to calibrate the terminal AM when using the operation panel

Operation

Display

1. Confirmation of the RUN indication and

(When Pr. 158 = 1)

operation mode indication

2. Press

PRM indication is lit.

to choose the parameter setting

mode.
(The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Turn

until

appears.

C1 to C7 setting
is enabled.

4. Turn

until

appears.

5. Turn

until

appears.

Set to C1 AM terminal calibration.

6. Press

to enable setting.

The monitor set to Pr. 158


AM terminal function selection
is displayed.

7. If the inverter is at a stop, press the

key

to start the inverter.


(Motor needs not be connected.)

8. Turn

to adjust the indicator needle to the


Analog indicator

desired position.

9. Press

Setting is complete.

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!


Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to return to the

indication (step 4).

Press

twice to show the next parameter (

).

REMARKS
Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in the external operation mode, and make calibration in
the above procedure.
Calibration can be made even during operation.
For operation from the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the instruction manual of the parameter unit.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference
Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference
Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection

130

Refer to page 128


Refer to page 128
Refer to page 123

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure

4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power


failure
Purpose

At instantaneous power failure


occurrence, restart inverter without
stopping motor
When undervoltage or a power
failure occurs, the inverter can be
decelerated to a stop.

Parameter that should be Set

Automatic restart operation


after instantaneous power
failure/flying start
Power failure-time
deceleration-to-stop
function

Refer to Page

Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96,


Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299,
Pr. 611

131

Pr. 261

137

4.12.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start


(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the following cases:
When power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure
When motor is coasting at start

Number

30

Name

Regenerative function
selection

Initial Value Setting Range


0, 1
0
2
0

57

Restart coasting time

9999
0.1 to 5s

58

Restart cushion time

1s

96

Auto tuning setting/status

9999
0 to 60s
0
11

21

162
165

Automatic restart after


instantaneous power
failure selection
Stall prevention operation
level for restart

0
1
10
11

150%

0 to 200%

0 to 32767

298

Frequency search gain

9999
9999

299

611

Rotation direction
detection selection at
restarting
Acceleration time at a
restart

0
1
0
9999

0 to 3600s
9999
9999

Description
The motor starts at the starting frequency when MRS (X10)
turns on then off
Restart operation is performed when MRS (X10) turns on
then off
FR-D740-036 or less, FR-D720S-070 or less . 1s
FR-D740-050 or more, FR-D720S-100........... 2s
The above times are coasting time.
Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after an
instantaneous power failure.
No restart
Voltage starting time at restart.
Offline auto tuning is not performed
For general-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running (motor
constants (R1) only) (Refer to page 70)
Offline auto tuning (tuning performed without motor running)
for V/F control and automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure (with frequency search)
With frequency search
Without frequency search (reduced voltage system)
Frequency search at every start
Reduced voltage at every start
Considers the rated inverter current as 100% and sets the
stall prevention operation level during restart operation.
When offline auto tuning is performed under V/F control,
frequency search gain necessary for frequency search for
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is set as
well as the motor constants (R1).
Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SFHRCA) constants
Without rotation direction detection
With rotation direction detection
When Pr. 78 = 0,
With rotation direction detection
When Pr. 78 = 1, 2
Without rotation direction detection
Acceleration time to reach the acceleration time reference
frequency at a restart.
Acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time
(e.g. Pr. 7)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

131

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


When Pr. 162 = 1, 11 (without frequency search)
Instantaneous (power failure) time

(1)

Automatic restart operation selection


(Pr. 30, Pr. 162, Pr. 299)
Without frequency search
When Pr. 162 = "1" or "11", automatic restart operation is
performed in a reduced voltage system, where the
voltage is gradually risen with the output frequency
unchanged from prior to an instantaneous power failure
independently of the coasting speed of the motor.

Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)

REMARKS
This system stores the output frequency and
rotation direction prior to an instantaneous power

Inverter output
voltage E (V)

failure and restart using the stored value.


Therefore, if the instantaneous power failure time
exceeds 0.2s and the stored value cannot be
retained, the inverter starts at Pr. 13 Starting

Coasting time
Pr. 57 setting

Restart cushion time


(Pr. 58 setting)

frequency (initial value = 0.5Hz) in the starting


direction upon power restoration.

* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.

When Pr. 162 = 0, 10 (with frequency search)


Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter output
frequency f (Hz)

Inverter output
voltage E (V)
Coasting time
Speed
+
(Pr. 57 )
detection time
* The output shut off timing differs
according to the load condition.

Restart cushion time


(Pr. 58 setting)

Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr. 611 setting)

With frequency search


When "0 (initial value) or 10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter
smoothly starts after detecting the motor speed upon
power restoration. (The motor capacity should be equal to
or one rank lower than the inverter capacity)
When using the frequency search, perform offline auto
tuning.
(Refer to page 100 for general-purpose magnetic flux
vector control and page 134 for V/F control.)
During reverse rotation, the inverter can be restarted
smoothly as the direction of rotation is detected.
You can select whether to make rotation direction
detection or not with Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection
selection at restarting.
When capacities of the motor and inverter differ, set "0"
(without rotation direction detection) in Pr. 299.
Pr. 299 Setting
9999
0 (initial value)
1

Pr. 78 Setting
1

: the rotation direction is detected.


: the rotation direction is not detected.

REMARKS
Speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the motor speed. (maximum 100ms)
When the inverter capacity is two rank or more larger than the motor capacity, the inverter may not start due to overcurrent trip (E.OC ).
If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, the inverter functions abnormally. (The inverter does not start smoothly.)
When reverse rotation is detected when Pr. 78 = "1" (reverse rotation disabled), the rotation direction is changed to forward
rotation after decelerates in reverse rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter will not start when the
start command is reverse rotation.

132

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


NOTE
When automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure is activated while the motor is running at a low speed (less
than 10Hz), the motor restarts in the direction prior to instantaneous power failure without detecting the rotation direction (Pr.
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting = "1").
If the frequency search result exceeds the set frequency, the output frequency is limited at the set frequency.
When the wiring length exceeds below, select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11").

Motor capacity
Wiring length

0.1K

0.2K

0.4K or more

20m

50m

100m

Restart operation at every start


When Pr. 162 = "10" or "11", automatic restart operation is also performed every start, in addition to the automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure. When Pr. 162 = "0", automatic restart operation is performed at the first start after power
supply-on, but not performed at the second time or later.
Automatic restart operation selection of MRS (X10) signal (When Pr. 162 = "0, 1")
Restart operation after turning MRS (X10) signal on then off using Pr. 30 can be selected as in the table below. When
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC),
noramally set "2" in Pr. 30.
Pr. 30 Setting
0, 1
2

(2)

Operation after MRS and X10 Signal Turns off, on, then off.
Start at the Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
Frequency search is made and starts at the coasting speed.

Restart coasting time (Pr. 57)


Coasting time is the time from when the motor speed is detected until automatic restart control is started.
Set Pr. 57 to "0" to perform automatic restart operation.
The coasting time is automatically set to the value below. Generally this setting will pose no problems.
FR-D740-036 or less, FR-D720S-070 or less .... 1s
FR-D740-050 or more, FR-D720S-100.............. 2s
Operation may not be performed well depending on the magnitude of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or running
frequency. Adjust the coasting time between 0.1s and 5s according to the load specifications.

(3)

Restart cushion time (Pr. 58)


Cushion time is the length of time when the voltage appropriate to the voltage at the detected motor speed (output
frequency prior to instantaneous power failure when Pr. 162 = "1, 11") from 0V.
Normally the initial value need not be changed for operation, but adjust it according to the magnitude of the moment of
inertia (J) of the load or torque.
Voltage
100%

Pr. 58

(4)

Time

Automatic restart operation adjustment (Pr. 165, Pr. 611)


Using Pr. 165, you can set the stall prevention operation level at a restart.
Using Pr. 611, you can set the acceleration time to the acceleration time reference frequency when automatic restart
operation is performed besides the normal acceleration time.

133

PARAMETERS

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


(5)

Frequency search gain (Pr. 298), offline auto tuning (Pr. 96)
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation (with frequency search) is valid at V/F control, perform
offline auto tuning.
Perform offline auto tuning during V/F control in the following order to set Pr. 298 Frequency search gain automatically.
(Refer to page 100 during general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.)

Before performing offline auto tuning


Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.
The inverter is under V/F control
A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is 0.1kW or
more)
The maximum frequency is 120Hz.
A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned.
The motor may run slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that
there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in vertical lift applications). Note that
tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASFH, FRBMF-H) connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.

Setting
1) Set "21" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status.
Tuning is performed without motor running.
2) Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 95)
3) Set Pr. 71 Applied motor according to the motor used.
Pr.71 Setting 1

Motor
Mitsubishi standard motor
Mitsubishi high efficiency motor
Mitsubishi constant-torque
motor

SF-JR
SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or less
SF-HR
Others
SF-JRCA 4P
SF-HRCA
Others (SF-JRC, etc.)

3
23
43
3
13
53
13

13

Other manufacturer's standard


motor
Other manufacturer's constant
torque motor
1

134

Refer to page 98, for other settings of Pr. 71.

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


Execution of tuning
POINT
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) if the
inverter is in the status for tuning. (Refer to 2) below)

1) When performing PU operation, press

of the operation panel.

For external operation, turn on the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
(Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)

NOTE
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press

of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF

signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)


During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value)
Input terminal <Valid signal> STF, STR
Output terminal RUN, AM, A, B, C
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in five steps from AM when speed and output frequency
are selected.
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequerence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto
tuning. Auto tuning is not excecuted properly.

2) Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
Parameter Unit
(FR-PU04, FR-PU07)
Pr. 96 setting
(1) Setting

(2) Tuning in progress

(3) Normal end

21

Operation Panel Indication


21

READ:List
21
STOP PU

TUNE

22
STF FWD PU
23
TUNE
COMPLETION
STF STOP PU

Flickering

(4) Error end


(when inverter protective function
operation is activated)

TUNE
9
ERROR
STF STOP PU

It takes approximately 9s until tuning is completed.

3) When offline auto tuning ends, press

of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn off

the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once.


This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

135

PARAMETERS

REMARKS

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


4) If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
Error

Error Cause

Display

Remedy

Forced end

Set "21" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.

Inverter protective function operation

Make setting again.

91
92
93

Current limit (stall prevention) function was


activated.
Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated
value.

Set "1" in Pr. 156.


Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.

Calculation error

Check the motor wiring and make setting again.

A motor is not connected.

Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.

5) When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing

or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto

tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.

NOTE
The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until
the offline auto tuning is performed again.
An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on,
the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if a fault retry has been set, retry is
ignored.
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
The SU and FU signals are not output during a restart. They are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed.
Automatic restart operation will also be performed after a reset or when a retry is made by the retry function.

CAUTION
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start
suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
Stay away from the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, apply in easily visible
places the CAUTION stickers supplied to the Installation guideline.
When the start signal is turned off or

is pressed during the restart cushion time after instantaneous

power failure, deceleration starts after Pr. 58 Restart cushion time has elapsed.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 7 Acceleration time
Refer to page 91
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Refer to page 93
Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 Retry function
Refer to page 139
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 98
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection
Refer to page 157
Refer to page 108
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

136

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


4.12.2 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261)
When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and reaccelerated to the set frequency.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

Description
Coasts to stop.

Power failure stop


selection

261

When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output


is shut off.
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can
be decelerated to a stop.
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can
be decelerated to a stop.
If power is restored during a power failure, the inverter
accelerates again.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Power
OFF

Output frequency

ON

When Pr. 261 is set to "1" or "2", the inverter decelerates to a


stop if an undervoltage or power failure occurs.

Pr. 261 = 0
Pr. 261 = 1, 2

(2)

Operation outline of deceleration to stop at power


failure
When undervoltage or power failure has occurred, the output
frequency is decreased and controled so that the converter
circuit (DC bus) voltage is constant and decreased to 0Hz to
stop.

Time

(3)

Pr. 261 = 1
Power
Output frequency

Parameter setting

During deceleration
at occurrence of power failure
During stop
at occurrence
of power failure

Power failure stop function (Pr. 261 = "1")


If power is restored during power failure deceleration,
deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter remains
stopped. To restart, turn off the start signal once, then turn it on
again.

Time

STF
Y46
Turn off STF once to make acceleration again

REMARKS

invalid and automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure is made valid.
After a power failure stop, the inverter will not start even if the power is restored with the start signal (STF/STR) input. After
switching on the power, turn off the start signal once and then on again to make a start.
Power

ON
Not started as inverter
is stopped due to
power failure

Output frequency

Time
STF

OFF

ON

Y46

137

PARAMETERS

When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 "9999"), power failure stop function is made

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure


(4)

Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 261 = "2")


When power is restored during deceleration after a power failure, acceleration is made again up to the set frequency.
When this function is used in combination with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function(Pr.57
"9999"), deceleration can be made at a power failure and acceleration can be made again after power restoration.
Pr. 261 = 2

Pr. 261 = 2, Pr. 57

When power is restored during deceleration


at occurrence of power failure

When used with automatic restart


after instantaneous power failure

IPF

9999

During power failure

Power
Power
Output
frequency

Output
frequency

During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure

Reacceleration

During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure

Time

Y46

* Acceleration time depends on Pr. 7 (Pr. 44).

Y46

Automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Time
Reset time + Pr. 57

NOTE
When operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function is used, keep the starting signal (STF/STR) on
even during instantaneous power failure. If the starting signal turns off during instantaneous power failure, the
inverter decelerates according to the deceleration time setting, causing the motor to coast if enough regenerative
energy is not obtained.

(5)

Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal)


The Y46 signal is on during deceleration at an instantaneous power failure or during a stop after deceleration at an
instantaneous power failure.
After a power failure stop, the inverter can not start even if power is restored the start command is given. In this case,
check the power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal). (at occurrence of input phase loss (E.ILF), etc.)
For the Y46 signal, set "46 (forward operation)" or "146 (reverse operation)" to Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function
selection) to assign the function.

REMARKS
During a stop or trip, the power failure stop selection is not performed.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
Even if the power failure stop function is valid, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to
coast.
The motor will coast if enough regenerative energy is not given from the motor to the inverter.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time
Refer to page 131
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

138

Refer to page 114

Operation setting at fault occurrence

4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Recover by retry operation at fault


occurrence
Do not output input/output phase
failure alarm

Retry operation
Input/output phase failure
protection selection

Refer to Page

Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69

139

Pr. 251, Pr. 872

141

4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)


If a fault occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. You can also select the fault for a retry.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time 9999), restart
operation is performed at the retry operation time which is the same of that of a power failure. (Refer to page 131 for the
restart function.)
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial

Setting

Value

Range
0 to 5
0

65

Retry selection

67

Number of retries at fault


occurrence

1 to 10

101 to 110

68

Retry waiting time

1s

0.1 to 600s

69

Retry count display erase

Description
A fault for retry can be selected. (Refer to the next page)
No retry function
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
A fault output is not provided during retry operation.
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. (The setting
value of minus 100 is the number of retries.)
A fault output is provided during retry operation.
Set the waiting time from when an inverter fault occurs
until a retry is made.
Clear the number of restarts succeeded by retry.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Pr. 68

Retry success
5

Pr. 68
Inverter output
frequency
0

Time
Success count + 1

Retry start
Fault occurrence
Retry success count
ON

Y64

Retry failure example

Pr. 68

Pr. 68

Pr. 68

Inverter output
frequency
0

Time
First retry Second retry

Fault
Fault signal occurrence
(ALM)
Y64

ON

Fault
occurrence
ON

Third retry
Retry failure
Fault
(E.RET)
occurrence
ON
ON

Retry operation automatically resets a fault and restarts


the inverter at the starting frequency when the time set in
Pr. 68 elapses after the inverter is tripped.
Retry operation is performed by setting Pr.67 to any value
other than "0". Set the number of retries at fault
occurrence in Pr. 67.
When retries fail consecutively more than the number of
times set in Pr. 67, a retry count excess fault (E.RET)
occurs, resulting in inverter trip. (Refer to retry failure
example)
Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the inverter
trips until a retry is made in the range 0 to 600s. (When the
setting value is "0s", the actual time is 0.1s.)
Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number
of successful restart times made by retry.
The cumulative count in Pr. 69 is increased by 1 when a
retry is regarded as successful after normal operation
continues without faults occurring for more than five times
longer than the time set in Pr.68 after a retry start.
(When retry is successful, cumulative number of retry
failure is cleared.)
Writing "0" to Pr. 69 clears the cumulative count.
During a retry, the Y64 signal is on. For the Y64 signal,
assign the function by setting "64 (positive operation)" or
"164 (negative operation)" to Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output
terminal fnction selection) .

139

4
PARAMETERS

Retry success example

Operation setting at fault occurrence


Using Pr. 65, you can select the fault that will cause a retry to be executed. No retry will be made for the fault not indicated.
(Refer to page 246 for the fault description.)
indicates the faults selected for retry.

Fault for
Retry
E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THM
E.THT
E. BE
E. GF
E.OHT

Pr. 65 Setting
2
3

Fault for
Retry
E.PTC
E.OLT
E. PE
E.ILF
E.CDO

Pr. 65 Setting
2
3

NOTE
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr.190, Pr.192, the other functions may be affected. Make setting after
confirming the function of each terminal.
The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the fault which occurred the first time.
When an inverter fault is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal
relay function, regeneration brake duty etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)
Retry is not performed if E.PE (Parameter storage device fault) occurred at power on.

CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine when the inverter is
tripped. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the inverter trip.
When you have selected the retry function, apply in easily visible places the CAUTION stickers supplied.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time

140

(Refer to page 131)

Operation setting at fault occurrence


4.13.2 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872)
You can choose whether to make Input/output phase loss protection valid or invalid.
You can disable the output phase loss protection function that trips the inverter if one phase of the inverter output side
(load side) three phases (U, V, W) is lost.
The input phase loss protection function of the inverter input side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be made invalid.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Output phase loss


protection selection
Input phase loss protection
selection

251
872

Setting Range

1
1

Description

Without output phase loss protection

With output phase loss protection

Without input phase loss protection

With input phase loss protection

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
Available only for the three-phase power input specification model.

(1)

Output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251)


When Pr. 251 is set to "0", output phase loss protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.

(2)

Input phase loss protection selection (Pr. 872)


When Pr. 872 is set to "1", input phase loss protection (E.ILF) is provided if a phase loss of one phase among the three
phases is detected for 1s continuously.

NOTE
If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the converter section and capacitor lives of the inverter will be
shorter.
As phase loss is detected according to the bus voltage change, it can not be detected if the load is light. Unbalanced
phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input may also be detected.
Phase loss can not be detected during regeneration load operation.
If parameter copy is performed from single-phase power input specification model to three-phase power input
specification model, Pr. 872 setting may be changed. Check Pr. 872 setting after parameter copy.

4.13.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)


You can choose whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at start valid or invalid. Earth (Ground) fault detection is
executed only right after the start signal is input to the inverter.
Protective function will not activate if an earth (ground) fault occurs during operation.
Parameter

Name

Number

249

Earth (ground) fault


detection at start

Initial Value
1

Setting Range

Description

Without earth (ground) fault detection

With earth (ground) fault detection

NOTE
As detection is executed at starting, output is delayed for approx. 20ms every starting.
If an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is detected and
the inverter trips. (Refer to page 252)
If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity when using the FR-D740-120 or more, earth (ground) fault detection
may not be provided.

141

PARAMETERS

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Energy saving operation

4.14 Energy saving operation


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Energy saving operation

Optimum excitation control

4.14.1 Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)

Refer to Page

Pr. 60

142

V/F

Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically performs energy saving operation.
This inverter is optimum for fan and pump applications
Parameter

Name

Number

60

Energy saving control


selection *

Initial Value
0

Setting Range

Description

Normal operation mode

Optimum excitation control mode

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.

(1)

Optimum excitation control mode (setting "9")


When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the optimum excitation control mode.
The optimum excitation control mode is a control system which controls excitation current to improve the motor efficiency
to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.

REMARKS
When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to one inverter,
the energy saving effect is not expected.

NOTE
When the optimum excitation control mode is selected, deceleration time may be longer than the setting value. Since
overvoltage alarm tends to occur as compared to the constant torque load characteristics, set a longer deceleration
time.
Optimum excitation control functions only under V/F control. Optimum excitation control does not function under
general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Optimum excitation control will not be performed during an automatic restart after instantaneous power failure.
Since output voltage is controlled by optimum excitation control, output current may slightly increase.

Parameters referred to
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Refer to page 70
Refer to page 131
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time

142

Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance

4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance


Purpose of Use
Reduction of the motor noise
Measures against EMI and leakage
currents
Reduce mechanical resonance

Parameter that should be Set


Carrier frequency and
Soft-PWM selection

Refer to Page

Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260

143

Pr. 653

144

Speed smoothing control

4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260)
You can change the motor sound.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description
You can change the PWM carrier frequency.

72 *

PWM frequency selection

240 *

Soft-PWM operation
selection

0 to 15

The setting is in [kHz].


Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15
indicates 14.5kHz.

260

PWM frequency
automatic switchover

Soft-PWM is invalid

When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5", soft-PWM is valid.

0
0

PWM carrier frequency is constant


independently of load.
When the carrier frequency is set to 3kHz
or more (Pr. 72 "3"), perform continuous
operation at less than 85% of the rated
inverter current.
Decreases PWM carrier frequency
automatically when load increases.

The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* The parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

(1)

PWM carrier frequency changing (Pr. 72)


You can change the PWM carrier frequency of the inverter.
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or
motor or on EMI measures or on leakage current reduction caused by the PWM switching.

(2)

Soft-PWM control (Pr. 240)


Soft-PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.

PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr. 260)


When continuous operation is performed at 85% or more of the inverter rated current with the carrier frequency of the
inverter set to 3kHz or more (Pr. 72 "3"), the carrier frequency is automatically reduced to 2kHz to protect the output
transistor of the inverter. (Motor noise increases, but it is not a failure)

When Pr. 260 = "0" (initial value), the carrier frequency becomes constant (Pr. 72 setting) independently of the load,
making the motor sound uniform.
Note that continuous operation should be performed at less than 85% of the inverter rating.

NOTE
Decreasing the PWM carrier frequency effect on EMI measures and on leakage current reduction, but increases
motor noise.
When PWM carrier frequency is set to 1kHz or less (Pr.72 1), fast response current limit may function prior to stall
prevention operation due to increase in ripple currents, resulting in insufficient torque. In such case, set fastresponse current limit operation invalid using Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection .

Parameters referred to
Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection

Refer to page 74

143

4
PARAMETERS

(3)

Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance


4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653)
Vibration due to mechanical resonance influences the inverter control, causing the output current (torque) unstable. In this
case, the output current (torque) fluctuation can be reduced to ease vibration by changing the output frequency.
Parameter
Number

653

Name

Speed smoothing control

Initial Value

Setting Range

0 to 200%

Description
Increase or decrease the value using
100% as reference to check an effect.

The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Control block diagram


Acceleration/deceleration
processing

Speed
command

Output frequency

V/F control

Frequency output
Voltage output

Speed smoothing control


Pr.653

(2)

Torque current

Setting method
If vibration due to mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr. 653, run the inverter at the frequency which generates
maximum vibration and check if the vibration will be reduced or not after several seconds.
If effect is not produced, gradually increase the Pr. 653 setting and check the effect repeatedly until the most effective
value is set in Pr. 653.
If vibration becomes large by increasing the Pr. 653 setting, gradually decrease the Pr. 653 setting than 100% to check the
effect in a similar manner.

NOTE
Depending on the machine, vibration may not be reduced enough or an effect may not be produced.

144

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)

4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


Purpose

Selection of voltage/current input


(terminal 2, 4)
Perform forward/reverse rotation by
analog input.
Adjustment (calibration) of analog
input frequency and voltage (current)

Parameter that should be Set

Analog input selection


Bias and gain of frequency
setting voltage (current)

Refer to Page

Pr. 73, Pr. 267

145

Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241,


C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)

148

4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)


You can select the function that switches between forward rotation and reverse rotation according to the analog input
terminal specifications and input signal.
Parameter
Number

73

Name

Initial Value

Analog input selection

Setting

Description

Range
0

Terminal 2 input 0 to 10V

Terminal 2 input 0 to 5V

10

Terminal 2 input 0 to 10V

11

Terminal 2 input 0 to 5V

Voltage/current input
switch

267

Terminal 4 input
selection

Without reversible operation


With reversible operation

Description

Terminal 4 input 4 to 20mA

Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V

Terminal 4 input 0 to 10V

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Selection of analog input specifications


For the terminal 2 for analog voltage input, 0 to 5V (initial value) or 0 to 10V can be selected.
Either voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA initial value) can be selected for terminal 4 used for
analog input.
Change the input specifications to change Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch.
Rated specifications of terminal 4 change according
to the voltage/current input switch setting.
Voltage input: Input resistance 10k 1k,
Maximum permissible input voltage
20VDC
Current input: Input resistance 233 5,
Maximum permissible input voltage
30mA

4
Current input (initial setting)

PARAMETERS

(1)

Voltage input

145

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


NOTE
Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Incorrect setting as in the table below could cause component damage. Incorrect settings other than below can
cause abnormal operation.

Setting Causing Component Damage


Switch setting
Terminal input
I (current input)

Voltage input

V (voltage input)

Current input

Operation
This could cause component damage to the analog signal output circuit of
signal output devices.
(electrical load in the analog signal output circuit of signal output devices increases)
This could cause component damage of the inverter signal input circuit.
(output power in the analog signal output circuit of signal output devices increases)

Refer to the following table and set Pr. 73 and Pr. 267.
(

indicates main speed setting)


Pr.73
Setting

Terminal 2
Input

0
1

0 to 10V

Terminal 4 Input

Not function

0 to 5V

(initial value)
10
11
0
1

Reversible
Operation

AU signal

OFF

0 to 10V
0 to 5V

Yes
According to the Pr. 267 setting

0:4 to 20mA (initial value)

ON

(initial value)
10
11

Not function

1:0 to 5V

Yes

2:0 to 10V

- : invalid

The terminal used for the AU signal input, set "4" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign functions.

NOTE
Turn the AU signal on to make terminal 4 valid.
Make sure that the parameter and switch settings are the same. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
Use Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at input of the maximum output
frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input.
Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
When Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 is not available for analog frequency command.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

(2)
Inverter
Forward rotation

STF
PC

0 to 5VDC
Frequency setting

10
2
5

Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 5VDC)


Inverter
Forward rotation

STF
PC

0 to 10VDC
Frequency Voltage input
setting
equipment

2
5

Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 10VDC)

Perform operation by analog input selection.


The frequency setting signal inputs 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10VDC) to
across the terminals 2-5. The 5V (10V) input is the maximum output.
The power supply 5V can be input by either using the internal power
supply or preparing an external power supply. Prepare an external
power supply to input the power supply 10V. For the built-in power
supply, terminals 10-5 provide 5VDC output.
Terminal

Inverter Built-in
Power Supply
Voltage

Frequency
Setting
Resolution

Pr.73
(terminal 2 input
power)

10

5VDC

0.1Hz/50Hz

0 to 5VDC input

When inputting 10VDC to the terminal 2, set "0" or "10" in Pr. 73. (The
initial value is 0 to 5V)
Setting "1 (0 to 5VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10VDC)" in Pr. 267 and a voltage/
current input switch in the OFF position changes the terminal 4 to the
voltage input specification. When the AU signal turns on, the terminal
4 input becomes valid.

REMARKS
The wiring length of the terminal 10, 2, 5 should be 30m maximum.

146

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


(3)
Forward rotation

Inverter
STF

When the pressure or temperature is controlled constant by a fan,


pump, etc., automatic operation can be performed by inputting the
output signal 4 to 20mADC of the adjuster to across the terminals 4-5.
The AU signal must be turned on to use the terminal 4.

AU
PC
4 to 20mADC
Frequency setting

Current input
equipment

Perform operation by analog input selection.

4
5

Connection diagram using terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)

Set frequency (Hz)

(4)
Reverse
rotation
Pr. 125

Setting "10" or "11" in Pr. 73 and adjusting Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) Terminal 2
frequency setting gain frequency (Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency) and C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency to
C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain makes reverse operation
by terminal 2 (terminal 4) valid.

Reversible

Not
reversible

Terminal 2
5V input (V)
2.5V
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)
Frequency setting signal

C2(Pr. 902)
0

Perform forward/reverse rotation by analog input


(polarity reversible operation)

Forward
rotation

Reversible operation example

Example)When performing reversible operation by terminal 2 (0 to 5V)


input
1) Set "11" in Pr. 73 to make reversible operation valid.
Set frequency at maximum analog input in Pr. 125 (Pr. 903)
2) Set 1/2 of the value set in C4 (Pr. 903) in C3 (Pr. 902).
3) Reversible operation is performed when 0 to 2.5VDC is input and
forward rotation when 2.5 to 5VDC.

NOTE
When reversible operation is set, be aware of reverse rotation operation when analog input stops (only the start
signal is input).
When reversible operation is valid, reversible operation (0 to 4mA: reverse operation, 4mA to 20mA: forward
operation) is performed by terminal 4 in the initial setting.

Parameters referred to
Refer to page 148
Refer to page 148

4.16.2 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74)
The time constant of the primary delay filter can be set for the external frequency command (analog input (terminal 2, 4)
signal).
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

0 to 8

Description
Primary delay filter time constant for the

74

Input filter time constant

analog input.
A larger setting results in a larger filter.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Valid for eliminating noise of the frequency setting circuit.


Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise.
A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set between approximately 1ms to 1s with the setting
of 0 to 8.)

147

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level
Refer to page 95
C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency to C7 (Pr. 905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


4.16.3 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905))
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5V,
0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC).
Set Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch to switch between 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mADC using terminal 4.
(Refer to page 145)
[Frequency setting bias/gain parameter]
Parameter
Number

125
126
241 1, 3
C2 (902)
1, 2
C3 (902)
1, 2
C4 (903)
1, 2
C5 (904)
1, 2
C6 (904)
1, 2
C7 (905)
1, 2

Name

Terminal 2 frequency setting


gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain frequency
Analog input display unit
switchover
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

50Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency of terminal 2 input gain (maximum).

50Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency of terminal 4 input gain (maximum).

Description

Displayed in %

Displayed in V/mA

0Hz

0 to 400Hz

0%

0 to 300%

100%

0 to 300%

0Hz

0 to 400Hz

20%

0 to 300%

100%

0 to 300%

Unit for analog input display.

Frequency on the bias side of terminal 2 input.


Converted % of the bias side voltage (current) of
terminal 2 input.
Converted % of the gain side voltage (current) of
terminal 2 input.
Frequency on the bias side of terminal 4 input.
Converted % of the bias side current (voltage) of
terminal 4 input.
Converted % of the gain side current (voltage) of
terminal 4 input.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).

The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

148

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)

Output frequency (Hz)

(1)

Change

the

frequency

at

maximum

analog input (Pr. 125, Pr. 126)

Initial value
50Hz

Set Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing frequency


setting (gain) of the maximum analog input voltage
(current) only. (C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr.905) setting
need not be changed)

Gain
Pr. 125

Bias
C2(Pr. 902)

(2)

Output frequency (Hz)

(C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905))

100%
5V
10V
C4(Pr. 903)

0
0
Frequency setting signal
0
C3(Pr. 902)

The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust


the relationship between the input signal entered

Initial value
50Hz

Gain
Pr. 126

Bias
C5(Pr. 904)
20
0
0
4
C6(Pr. 904)

Frequency setting
signal

Analog input bias/gain calibration

100%
20mA
C7(Pr. 905)

from outside the inverter to set the output frequency,


e.g. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC, and the
output frequency.
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using
C2 (Pr. 902).
(It is initially-set to the frequency at 0V)
Set the output frequency in Pr. 125 for the frequency
command voltage set with Pr. 73 Analog input
selection.
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5
(Pr. 904).
(It is initially-set to the frequency at 4mA)
Using Pr. 126, set the output frequency relative to
20mA of the frequency command current (4 to
20mA).
There are three methods to adjust the frequency
setting voltage (current) bias/gain.
a) Method to adjust any point by application of a
voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5 (4-5)
page 150
b) Method to adjust any point without application of
a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5 (4-5)
page 151
c) Method to adjust frequency only without
adjustment of voltage (current)

page 152

NOTE
When voltage/current input signal for terminal 4 was switched using Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch, perform

(3)

Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)


You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias/gain calibration.
Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and voltage/current switch, the display units of C3 (Pr.
902), C4 (Pr. 903), C6 (Pr. 904), C7 (Pr. 905) change as shown below.
Analog Command (terminal 2, 4)
(depending on Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and
voltage/current input switch)

Pr. 241 = 0 (initial value)

0 to 5V input
0 to 10V input
0 to 20mA input

0 to 5V
0 to 100% (0.1%) display
0 to 10V
0 to 100% (0.1%) display
0 to 20mA
0 to 100%(0.1%) display

Pr. 241 = 1

0 to 100%
0 to 100%
0 to 100%

0 to 5V (0.01V) display
0 to 10V (0.01V) display
0 to 20mA (0.01mA) display

149

PARAMETERS

calibration without fail.

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


(4)

Frequency setting signal (current) bias/gain adjustment method


(a) Method to adjust any point by application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5 (4-5).

Operation

Display

1. Confirmation of the RUN indication and


operation mode indication
The inverter should be at a stop.
The inverter should be in the PU operation
mode.
(Using

2. Press

)
PRM indication is lit.

to choose the parameter setting

mode.
(The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Turn

until

appears.

4. Turn

until

appears.

C1 to C7 setting
is enabled.

5. Turn

until

) appears.

Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain.

6. Press

Terminal 2 input is
selected

to display the analog voltage

Terminal 4 input is
selected
Analog voltage (current)
value (%) across terminals 2-

(current) value (%).

5 (across terminals 4-5)

7. Apply a 5V (20mA) voltage (current).

(Turn the external potentiometer connected


across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5) to

* The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of

maximum (any position).)

the potentiometer.

NOTE
After performing operation in step 6, do not touch

8. Press

until completion of calibration.

to set.

Terminal 2 input is
selected

Terminal 4 input is
selected

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!


* The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of
the potentiometer.

Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to return to the

indication (step 4).

Press

twice to show the next parameter (

).

REMARKS
If the frequency meter (display meter) connected across the terminals AM-5 does not indicate just 50Hz, set the calibration
parameter C1 AM terminal calibration. (Refer to page 129)
If the gain and bias of frequency setting voltage (current) are too close, an error (

150

) may be displayed at setting.

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


(b) Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5 (4-5)
(To change from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))

Operation
1. Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation

Display

mode indication
The inverter should be at a stop.
The inverter should be in the PU operation mode.
(Use

2. Press

)
PRM indication is lit.

to choose the parameter setting

mode.
(The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Turn

until

appears.

4. Turn

until

appears.

C1 to C7 setting
is enabled.

5. Turn

until

) appears.

Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain.

6. Press

Terminal 2 input is
selected

Analog voltage (current) value (%)

to display the analog voltage

across terminals 2-5 (across

(current) value (%).

7. Turn

Terminal 4 input
is selected

terminals 4-5)
The gain frequency is reached
when the analog voltage (current)
value across terminals 2-5 (across
terminals 4-5) is 100%.

to set gain voltage (%).

"0V(0mA) is 0%, 10V(5V, 20mA) is 100%"

REMARKS
The current setting at the instant of turning

is

displayed.
You can not check after performing operation in step 7.

Terminal 2 input
is selected

to set.

Terminal 4 input
is selected

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!

(Adjustment completed)
Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to return to the

Press

twice to show the next parameter (

PARAMETERS

8. Press

indication (step 4).


).

REMARKS
By pressing

after step 6, you can confirm the current frequency setting bias/gain setting.

You can not check after performing operation in step 7.

151

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)


(c) Adjusting only the frequency without adjusting the gain voltage (current).
(When changing the gain frequency from 50Hz to 40Hz)

Operation
1. Turn

until

(Pr. 125) or

(Pr. 126) appears

2. Press

Display
or
Terminal 2 input
is selected

Terminal 4 input is
selected

to show the currently set value.

(50.00Hz)

3. Turn
"

to change the set value to


". (40.00Hz)

4. Press

Terminal 2 input is
selected

to set.

Terminal 4 input is
selected

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!

5. Mode/monitor check
Press

twice to choose the monitor/

frequency monitor.

6. Apply a voltage across the inverter terminals 25 (across 4-5) and turn on the start command
(STF, STR).
Operation starts at 40Hz.

REMARKS
Changing C4 (Pr. 903) or C7 (Pr. 905) (gain adjustment) value will not change the Pr. 20 value.
For operation from the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the instruction manual of the FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
When setting the value to 120Hz or more, it is necessary to set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency to 120Hz or more. (Refer to
page 78)
Make the bias frequency setting using the calibration parameter C2 (Pr. 902) or C5 (Pr. 904). (Refer to page 149)

CAUTION
Take care when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0V (0mA). Even if a speed command
is not given, merely turning on the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Refer to page 91
Pr. 73 Analog input selection, Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection
Refer to page 145
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 160
Bias and gain of built-in frequency setting potentiometer
Refer to page 262

152

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction

4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Limits reset function


Trips stop when PU is disconnected
Stops from PU
Prevention of parameter rewrite
Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor
Displays necessary parameters
Parameter restriction with using
password
Control of parameter write by
communication

Refer to Page

Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection

Pr. 75

153

Parameter write disable selection


Reverse rotation prevention selection
Display of applied parameters

Pr. 77
Pr. 78
Pr. 160

156
157
157

Pr. 296, Pr. 297

158

Pr. 342

182

Password function
EEPROM write selection

4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)


You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection function and PU
stop function.
Parameter

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection

14

0 to 3, 14 to 17

Number

75

Description
For the initial value, reset always enabled,
without disconnected PU detection, and
with PU stop function are set.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.

Pr. 75

Reset Selection

Setting
0

Reset input normally enabled


Reset input is enabled only when the fault
occurs.
Reset input normally enabled
Reset input is enabled only when the fault
occurs.

1
2
3
14
(initial value)
15
16
17

Reset input is enabled only when the fault


occurs.
Reset input normally enabled
Reset input is enabled only when the fault
occurs.

PU Stop Selection

If the PU is disconnected, operation


will be continued.
When the PU is disconnected, the
inverter trips.

Pressing

decelerates the motor

to a stop only in the PU operation


mode.

If the PU is disconnected, operation


will be continued.

Pressing

decelerates the motor

to a stop in any of the PU, external


When the PU is disconnected, the

and communication operation modes.

inverter trips.

Reset selection
You can select the enable condition of reset function (RES signal, reset command through communication) input.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "1, 3, 15, 17", a reset can be input only when the inverter is tripped.

NOTE
When the reset signal (RES) is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output.
When reset is performed, cumulative values of electronic thermal O/L relay, regenerative brake duty are cleared.
The reset key of the PU is only valid when the inverter is tripped, independently of the Pr. 75 setting.

(2)

Disconnected PU detection
This function detects that the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for longer than 1s and
causes the inverter to provide a fault output (E.PUE) and come to trip.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15", operation is continued if the PU is disconnected.

REMARKS
When the PU has been disconnected since before power-on, it is not judged as a fault.
To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter.
The motor decelerates to a stop when the PU is disconnected during PU jog operation with Pr. 75 set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15"
(which selects operation is continued if the PU is disconnected).
When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function
is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid.

153

PARAMETERS

(1)

Reset input normally enabled

Disconnected PU Detection

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


(3)

PU stop selection
In any of the PU operation, external operation and network operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing STOP
key of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07, operation panel for FR-E500 (PA02)).
When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, "

" (PS) is displayed. A fault output is not provided.

After the motor is stopped from the PU, it is necessary to perform PU stop (PS) reset to restart. PS reset can be made from
the unit from which PU stop is made (operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/PU07, operation panel for FR-E500
(PA02)).
The motor can be restarted by making PS cancel using a power supply reset or RES signal.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0 to 3", PU stop (PS display) is invalid, deceleration to a stop by

is valid only in the PU

operation mode.

REMARKS
During operation in the PU operation mode through RS-485 communication from the PU connector, the motor decelerates to stop
(PU stop) when entered from the operation panel

(4)

How to restart the motor stopped by

input from the PU in external operation mode (PU stop

(PS) reset method)


a) Operation panel
1)After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the
STF or STR signal.

Speed

Time
Key

2)Press

to display

3)Press

to return to

............... (

reset)

Operation panel
Key

STF ON
(STR) OFF

4)Switch on the STF or STR signal.


Stop/restart example for external operation

b) Parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)


1)After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the
STF or STR signal.
2)Press

EXT

........................................ (

reset)

3)Switch on the STF or STR signal.


The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal.

REMARKS
If Pr. 250 Stop selection is set to other than "9999" to select coasting to a stop, the motor will not be coasted to a stop but
decelerated to a stop by the PU stop function during external operation.

154

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


(5)

Restart (PS reset) method when PU stop (PS display) is made during PU operation
PU stop (PS display) is made when the motor is stopped from the unit where control command source is not selected
(operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07, operation panel for FR-E500 (PA02)) in the PU operation mode.
For example, when Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection = "9999" (initial value), the motor is stopped from
the PU (PS display) if entered from the operation panel

in PU operation mode with the parameter unit mounted.

When the motor is stopped from the PU when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is selected as
control command source.
1) After the motor has decelerated to a stop, press
2) Press

to display

.(

of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).

reset )

3) Press

of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to select the PU operation mode.

4) Press

or

of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).

REMARKS
When Pr. 551 = "9999", the priorities of the PU control source is parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) > operation panel.

CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter while the start signal is being input.
Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to potentially hazardous conditions.

Parameters referred to
Refer to page 171

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 250 Stop selection


Refer to page 107
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection

155

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


4.17.2 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)
You can select whether write to various parameters can be performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter
values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Parameter

Name

Number

77

Initial Value

Parameter write selection

Setting Range

Description

Write is enabled only during a stop.

Parameter can not be written.

Parameter write is enabled in any operation


mode regardless of operation status.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
Pr. 77 can be always set independently of the operation mode and operation status.

(1)

Write parameters only during stop (setting "0" initial value)


Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode.
The shaded parameters in the parameter list (page 52) can always be written regardless of the operation mode and
operating status. However, Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection and Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection can be written when the
inverter is running in the PU operation mode, but cannot be written in the external operation mode.

(2)

Inhibit parameter write (setting "1")


Parameter

Parameter write is not enabled.


(Read is enabled.)
Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot be
performed, either.
The parameters given on the right can be written if Pr. 77 =
"1".

(3)

Name

Number
22
75
77

Stall prevention operation level


Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
PU stop selection
Parameter write selection

79

Operation mode selection

160

Extended function display selection

296

Password lock level

297

Password lock/unlock

Write parameters during operation (setting "2")


Parameters can always be written.
The following prameters cannot be written when the inverter is running if Pr. 77 = "2". Stop the inverter when changing their
parameter settings.
Parameter

Name

Number
23

Stall prevention operation level compensation


factor at double speed

Number
96
178 to 182

Name
Auto tuning setting/status
(input terminal function selection)

40

RUN key rotation direction selection

48

Second stall prevention operation current

255

60

Energy saving control selection

256

Inrush current limit circuit life display

Stall prevention operation reduction starting

257

Control circuit capacitor life display


Main circuit capacitor life display

66

190, 192

(output terminal function selection)


Life alarm status display

frequency

258

71

Applied motor

261

Power failure stop selection

79

Operation mode selection

298

Frequency search gain

80

Motor capacity

343

Communication error count

82

Motor excitation current

450

Second applied motor

83

Motor rated voltage

561

PTC thermistor protection level

84

Rated motor frequency

563

Energization time carrying-over times

90

Motor constant (R1)

564

Operating time carrying-over times

Parameters referred to
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection

156

Parameter

Refer to page 160

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Parameter

Name

Number

Reverse rotation prevention


selection

78

Initial

Setting Range

Value

0
0

Description
Both forward and reverse rotations allowed

Reverse rotation disabled

Forward rotation disabled

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Set this parameter when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the enclosure surface operation panel and
parameter unit(FR-PU04/FR-PU07), the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and
reverse rotation commands through communication.

4.17.4 Extended parameter display (Pr. 160)


Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted.
In the default setting, only the simple mode parameters are displayed.
Parameter

Name

Number

160

Value

Setting Range

9999

9999
0

Description
Displays only the simple mode parameters
Displays simple mode + extended parameters

Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr. 160)


When Pr. 160 = "9999" (initial value), only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel and
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). (Refer to the parameter list , page 52, for the simple mode parameters.)
When Pr. 160 = "0", simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.

REMARKS
When RS-485 communication is used to read the parameters with Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection "2", all
parameters can be read regardless of the Pr. 160 setting.
Pr. 15 Jog frequency, Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time, and Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment are displayed as simple mode
parameter when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 15 Jog frequency
Refer to page 86
Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time
Refer to page 86
Refer to page 171
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection
Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment
Refer to page 238

4
PARAMETERS

(1)

Extended function display


selection

Initial

157

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)
Registering 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/writing.

Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range
1 to 6, 101 to 106

296

Password lock level

9999
9999

Description
Select restriction level of parameter reading/
writing when a password is registered.
No password lock

1000 to 9998

Register a 4-digit password


Displays password unlock error count. (Reading

297

Password lock/unlock

9999

(0 to 5)

only)
(Valid when Pr. 296 = "101" to "106")

(9999)

No password lock (Reading only)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0".
When Pr. 296 "9999" (with password lock), note that Pr. 297 is always available for setting regardless of Pr. 160 setting.

(1)

Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr. 296 )


Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation command can be selected by Pr. 296.
Pr. 296 Setting
9999
1, 101
2, 102
3, 103
4, 104
5, 105
6, 106

PU Mode Operation Command 3


Read 1
Write 2

NET Mode Operation Command 4


Read 1
Write 2

: enabled, : restricted

If the parameter reading is restricted by the Pr. 160 setting, those parameters are unavailable for reading even when " " is indicated.

If the parameter writing is restricted by the Pr. 77 setting, those parameters are unavailable for writing even when " " is indicated.

Parameter access from unit where parameter is written in PU operation mode (initially set to operation panel, parameter unit) is restricted. (Refer to page 171
for PU mode operation command source selection)

Parameter access in NET operation mode with RS-485 communication is restricted.

158

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction


(2)

Password lock/unlock (Pr.296, Pr.297 )

<Lock>
1) Set parameter reading/writing restriction level.(Pr. 296 9999)
Setting "1" to "6":
Not display password unlock error count when reading Pr. 297 .
Setting "101" to "106":
Displays password unlock error count when reading Pr. 297 .
* When Pr. 296 = "101 to 106", if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock the
restriction. Parameter all clear can unlock the restriction.
(In this case, parameter setting are cleared.)
2) Write four-digit numbers (1000 to 9998) in Pr. 297 as a password.
(When Pr. 296 = "9999", Pr. 297 cant write.)
When password is registered, parameter reading/writing is restricted with the restriction set level in Pr. 296 until
unlocking.

REMARKS
After registering a password, a read value of Pr. 297 is always "0" to "5".
When a password restricted parameter is read/written,
is displayed.
Even if a password is registered, parameters which the inverter itself writes, such as inverter parts life, are overwritten
occasionally.
Even if a password is registered, Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment can be read/written when a parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
is connected.

<Unlock>
There are two ways of unlocking the password.
Enter a password in Pr. 297.
Unlocked when a password is correct. If a password is incorrect, an error occurs and not unlocked.
During Pr. 296 = "101 to 106", if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock the restriction.
(During password lock)
Perform parameter all clear.
Password lock is unlocked. Parameter setting are cleared.

NOTE
If the password has been forgotten, perform parameter all clear to unlock the parameter restriction. In that case,
other parameters are also cleared.
Parameter all clear can not be performed during operation of voltage output.

Parameter operation during password locked/unlocked


Unlocked
Parameter operation

Read
Write
Read
Pr. 297
Write
Performing parameter clear
Performing parameter all
Pr. 296

Pr. 296 = 9999

Pr. 296 9999

Pr. 297 = 9999

Pr. 297 = 9999

1
1
1

Locked
Pr. 296 = 101 to 106

Pr. 297 = 0 to 4

Pr. 297 = 5

(Read value)

(Read value)

clear
Performing parameter copy
1
2
3

Password registered
Pr. 296 9999

: enabled, : restricted

Reading/writing is unavailable when there is restriction to reading by the Pr. 160 setting.
Unavailable during operation of voltage output.
Correct password will not unlock the restriction.

REMARKS
When Pr. 296 = "4, 5, 104, 105" and using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), PUJOG operation is unavailable.
When writing is restricted from PU mode operation command (Pr. 296 = 1, 2, 4, 5, 101, 102, 104, 105), switching of operation
mode by easy setting mode is unavailable.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection
Refer to page 156
Pr. 160 Extended function display selection
Refer to page 157
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection
Refer to page 171

159

PARAMETERS

(3)

Selection of operation mode and operation location

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Operation mode selection


Started in network operation mode
Selection of operation location

Operation mode selection


Operation mode at power-on
Operation command source and
speed command source during
communication operation, selection
of operation location

Pr. 79
Pr. 79, Pr. 340
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
Pr. 551

Refer to Page
160
170

171

4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)


Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external command signals (external operation), operation
from the operation panel and PU (FR-PU07/FR-PU04) (PU operation), combined operation of PU operation and
external operation (external/PU combined operation), and network operation (when RS-485 communication is used).
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

LED Indication
Description

:Off
:On

Use external/PU switchover mode (


0

) to switch between the

PU and external operation mode.

External operation
mode
PU operation mode

At power on, the inverter is in the external operation mode.


1

Fixed to PU operation mode


External operation
mode

Fixed to external operation mode


2

Operation can be performed by switching between the external


NET operation mode

and Net operation mode.


External/PU combined operation mode 1

Frequency command

Start command

Operation panel and PU (FR3

PU04/FR-PU07) setting or
external signal input (multi-speed
setting, across terminals 4-5

79

Operation
mode
selection

External signal input


(terminal STF, STR)

(valid when AU signal turns on)).


External/PU combined operation mode 2

Frequency command
4

External signal input


(terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed
selection, etc.)

Start command
Enter from

of the operation

panel and

and

of the

PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
PU operation mode

Switchover mode
6

Switchover between PU operation, external operation, and NET

External operation
mode

operation is available while keeping the same operation status.


NET operation mode

External operation mode (PU operation interlock)


X12 signal ON
7

Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode.


(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF
Operation mode can not be switched to the PU operation mode.

The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.

160

PU operation mode
External operation
mode

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(1)

Operation mode basics

The operation mode specifies the souce of the start command and the frequency command for the inverter.
Select the "external operation mode" when the start command and the frequency command are applied from a
potentiometer, switches, etc. which are provided externally and connecting them to the control terminals. Select "PU
operation mode" when the commands are applied using the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Select
the "network operation mode (NET operation mode)" when the commands are applied from the RS-485 communication
with the PU connector.
The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.

Inverter

PU operation mode
PU operation mode

Personal computer

Operation panel

FR-PU07

PU connector

Personal computer
Network
operation mode

GOT

3
2
1

5 6
7
8
9
10

Potentiometer

Control terminal
PLC

External
operation mode
Switch

REMARKS
Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined mode. Refer to page 160 for details.
The stop function (PU stop selection) activated by pressing

of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-

PU07) is valid even in other than the PU operation mode in the initial setting.
(Refer to Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (page 153))

PARAMETERS

161

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(2)

Operation mode switching method


External operation

When "0 or 1" is set in Pr. 340

Switching from the PU

Switching from the network


Switch to the external
operation mode from
the network.

Switch to network operation


mode from the network.

Press
of
the PU to light

Network operation

When "10" is set in Pr. 340

Press
of
the PU to light

PU operation

Press

of the PU to light

Network operation

PU operation

Press

of the PU to light

REMARKS
Refer to the flow chart on the next page for switching by the external terminal.
PU operation external interlock signal (X12)
PU-external operation switch-over signal (X16)

Refer to page 166


Refer to page 167

External-NET operation switchover signal (X65), NET-PU operation switchover signal (X66)
Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection

162

Refer to page 170

Refer to page 168

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(3)

Operation mode selection flow

In the following flowchart, select the basic parameter setting and terminal connection related to the operation mode.
START

Connection

Parameter setting

Operation

Where is the start command


source?
From outside (STF/STR terminal)
Where is the frequency
command source?
From outside (Terminal 2, 4,
JOG, multi-speed, etc.)

STF (forward rotation)


/STR (reverse rotation)
(Refer to page 108.)
Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM,
RH, JOG, etc.

From PU (digital setting)

Frequency setting terminal ON


STF(STR)-ON

STF (forward rotation)


/STR (reverse rotation)
(Refer to page 108)

Pr. 79 = "3"
(External/PU combined
operation 1)

Operation panel, PU digital setting


STF(STR) ON

STF (forward rotation)


/STR (reverse rotation)
(Refer to page 108)

Pr. 338 = "1"


Pr. 340 = "1"

Communication frequency setting


command sending
STF(STR)-ON

Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM,


RH, JOG, etc..

Pr. 79 = "4"
(external/PU combined
operation 2)

Frequency setting terminal ON


RUN/FWD/REV key ON

Pr. 79 = "1"
(fixed to PU operation)

Digital setting
RUN/FWD/REV key ON

Pr. 339 = "1"


Pr. 340 = "1"

Frequency setting terminal ON


Communication start command
sending

From communication
(PU connector (RS-485
communication))

From the operation panel (RUN/FWD/REV key)

Where is the frequency


command source?
From outside (terminal 2, 4, JOG,
multi-speed, etc.)

From the operation panel (digital setting)


From communication
(PU connector (RS-485 communication)

Disabled

From communication (PU connector (RS-485 communication))


Where is the frequency
command source?
From outside (terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.)

From the operation panel (digital setting)

Disabled

From communication (PU connector (RS-485


communication))

Pr. 340 = "1"

Communication frequency setting


command sending
Communication start command
sending

4
PARAMETERS

Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM,


RH, JOG, etc.

163

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(4)

External operation mode (setting "0" (initial value), "2")

Inverter

Forward rotation start

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
STF

Reverse rotation start

STR

Three-phase AC
power supply

U
V
W

PC
10
Frequency setting
potentiometer

(5)

Motor

Select the extenal operation mode when the start


command and the frequency command are applied
from a frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc.
which are provided externally and connecting them to
the control circuit terminals of the inverter.
Basically, parameter changing is disabled in the external
operation mode. (Some parameters can be changed.
Refer to page 52 for the parameter list.)
When "0" or "2" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters
the external operation mode at power-on. (When using
the network operation mode, refer to page 170.)
When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting
"2" fixes the operation mode to the external operation
mode.
When frequent parameter changing is necessary,
setting "0" (initial value) allows the operation mode to be
changed easily to the PU operation mode by pressing
of the operation panel. When you switched to the

2
5

PU operation mode, always return to the external


operation mode.
The STF and STR signal are used as a start command,
and the voltage or current signal to terminal 2, 4, multispeed signal, JOG signal, etc. are used as a frequency
command.

PU operation mode (setting "1")


Select the PU operation mode when applying start and
frequency command by only the key operation of the
operation panel (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Also select the PU
operation mode when making communication using the PU
connector.
When "1" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the PU
operation mode at power on. You cannot change to the
other operation mode.
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for
setting like a potentiometer. (Refer to Pr. 161 Frequency
setting/key lock operation selection (page 235))

Inverter
Three-phase AC
power supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U
V
W

Operation panel

164

Motor

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(6)

PU/external combined operation mode 1 (setting "3")


Select the PU/external combined operation mode 1
when applying frequency command from the
operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07) and inputting the start command with the
external start switch.
Select "3" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other
operation mode.
When a frequency is applied from the external signal
by multi-speed setting, it has a higher priority than the
frequency command from the PU. When AU is on, the
command signal to terminal 4 is used.

Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Three-phase AC
power supply

U
V
W

Motor

STF

Forward rotation start

STR

Reverse rotation start

PC
Operation panel

Set frequency

PU/external combined operation mode 2 (setting "4")


Select the PU/external combined operation mode 2 when
3

applying frequency command from the external


potentiometer, multi-speed or JOG signal and inputting the
start command by key operation of the operation panel or
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Select "4" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other
operation mode.

5 6
7
8
9
10

Hz

Inverter
Three-phase AC
power supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

U
V
W

Motor

10
Frequency setting
potentiometer

5
Operation panel

PARAMETERS

(7)

165

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(8)

Switch-over mode (setting "6")


While continuing operation, you can switch between the PU operation, external operation and network operation (NET
operation).
Operation Mode

Switching Operation/Operating Status

Switching
External operation

Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.
Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
The frequency set with the potentiometer (frequency command) or like is used unchanged. (Note that
the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)

PU

operation
External operation

Send the mode change command to the network operation mode through communication.
Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
The value set with the setting potentiometer (frequency command) or like is used unchanged. (Note
that the setting will disappear when power is switched off or the inverter is reset.)

NET

operation
PU operation

external

Press the external operation key of the operation panel or parameter unit.
The rotation direction is determined by the input signal of the external operation.
The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.

NET

Send the mode change command to the network operation mode through communication.
Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation.

operation
PU operation
operation
NET operation

external

Command to change to external mode is transmitted by communication.


Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal.
The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.

PU

Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.
The rotation direction and frequency command in the network operation mode are used unchanged.

operation
NET operation
operation

(9)

PU operation interlock (setting "7")


The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode to the external operation mode when the PU
operation interlock signal (X12) input turns off.
This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left
unswitched from PU operation mode.
Set "7" (PU operation interlock) in Pr. 79.
For the terminal used for X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal
function selection) to assign the function. (Refer to page 108 for Pr.178 to Pr.182.)
When the X12 signal is not assigned while MRS signal is assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from output stop
to PU operation interlock signal.
X12 (MRS)

Function/Operation
Operation Mode

Signal
ON

OFF

Parameter Write

Operation mode (external, PU, NET) switching

Parameter write enabled (depending on Pr. 77 Parameter

enabled

write selection and each parameter write conditions

Output stop during external operation


Forcibly switched to external operation mode

(Refer to page 52 for the parameter list))

External operation allowed


Switching between the PU and Net operation mode

Parameter write disabled with exception of Pr. 79

is enabled

<Function/operation changed by switching on-off the X12 (MRS) signal>


Operating Condition
Operation
Status
Mode

X12 (MRS) Signal

During
PU/NET

External

stop
Running
During
stop
Running

ON

OFF 1

ON
OFF 1
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF

Switching to PU,

Operation

Operating Status

Mode

Mode
If external operation frequency setting and

External 2

start

signal

are

entered,

performed in that status.


During stop
External 2

During operation
output stop
Output stop
operation

166

operation

is

Disallowed
Disallowed
Allowed
Disallowed
Disallowed
Disallowed

The operation mode switches to the external operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor
is run in external operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is turned off with either of STF and STR on.

NET Operation

At fault occurrence, pressing

of the operation panel resets the inverter.

Selection of operation mode and operation location


NOTE
If the X12 (MRS) signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode when the start signal
(STF, STR) is on.
When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the MRS signal serves as the normal MRS function (output
stop) by turning on the MRS signal and then changing the Pr. 79 value to other than "7" in the PU operation mode. As
soon as "7" is set to Pr. 79 , the MRS signal acts as the PU interlock signal.
When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the logic of the signal is as set in Pr. 17. When Pr. 17 = "2",
read ON as OFF and OFF as ON in the above explanation.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

(10) Switching of operation mode by external signal (X16 signal)


When external operation and operation from the operation panel are used togheter, use of the PU-external operation
switching signal (X16) allows switching betwen the PU operation mode and external operation mode during a stop (during
a motor stop, start command off).
When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 6, 7", the operation mode can be switched between the PU operation mode and external
operation mode. (Pr. 79 = "6" Switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
For the terminal used for X16 signal input, set "16" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
X16 Signal State Operation Mode

Pr. 79

ON (external)

Setting
0 (initial value)

External operation
mode

1
2

External operation mode

3, 4

External/PU combined operation mode


External operation
mode

X12 (MRS)

External operation

ON

mode

X12 (MRS)
OFF

PU operation mode
PU operation mode

External operation mode

Can be switched to external, PU or NET operation mode


Fixed to PU operation mode
Fixed to external operation mode (can be switched to NET operation
mode)
External/PU combined mode fixed
Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is
enabled while running.
Can be switched to external, PU or NET operation mode (output stop
in external operation mode)
Fixed to external operation mode (forcibly switched to external
operation mode)

REMARKS
The operation mode status changes depending on the setting of Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF
status of the X65 and X66 signals. (For details, refer to page 168 )
The priorities of Pr. 79 , Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other

functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

PARAMETERS

PU operation mode

PU operation mode

Remarks

OFF (PU)

167

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(11) Switching of operation mode by external signals (X65, X66 signals)
When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 2, 6", the operation mode switching signals (X65, X66) can be used to change the PU or external
operation mode to the network operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop or start command off). (Pr. 79 = "6"
Switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
When switching between the network operation mode and PU operation mode
1)Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value) or "6".
2)Set "10" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection.
3)Set "65" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 to assign the NET-PU operation switching signal (X65) to the terminal.
4)The operation mode changes to the PU operation mode when the X65 signal turns on, or to the network operation
mode when the X65 signal turns off.
Pr. 340

Pr. 79

Setting

Setting

X65 Signal State


ON (PU)
OFF (NET)

0 (initial value)

PU operation mode 1

NET operation mode


2

1
2
3, 4

PU operation mode
NET operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode
NET operation mode
6
PU operation mode 1
2
X12 (MRS)
Switching among the external and PU

10

ON
X12 (MRS)
OFF

operation mode is enabled 3


External operation mode

NET operation mode when the X66 signal is on.

PU operation mode when the X16 signal is off.

External operation mode when the X16 signal is on.

Remarks
Cannot be switched to external operation mode
Fixed to PU operation mode
Fixed to NET operation mode
External/PU combined mode fixed
Operation mode can be switched with operation continued
Cannot be switched to external operation mode
Output stop in external operation mode
Forcibly switched to external operation mode

When switching between the network operation mode and external operation mode
1) Set Pr. 79 to "0 (initial value), 2, 6 or 7". (At the Pr. 79 setting of "7", the operation mode can be switched when the X12
(MRS) signal turns on.)
2) Set "0 (initial value) or 1" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection.
3) Set "66" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 to assign the NET-PU operation switching signal (X66) to the terminal.
4) The operation mode changes to the network operation mode when the X66 signal turns on, or to the external
operation mode when the X66 signal turns off.
Pr. 340
Setting

Pr. 79
Setting
0 (initial value)
1
2

0 (initial

3, 4

value)

7
1

X12 (MRS)
ON
X12 (MRS)
OFF

X66 Signal State


ON (NET)
OFF (external)
External operation
mode 1
PU operation mode
External operation
NET operation mode
mode
External/PU combined operation mode
External operation
NET operation mode
mode 1
External operation
NET operation mode
mode 1

Remarks

NET operation mode

External operation mode

Fixed to PU operation mode


Cannot be switched to PU operation mode
External/PU combined mode fixed
Operation mode can be switched with
operation continued
Output stop in external operation mode
Forcibly switched to external operation mode

PU operation mode when the X16 signal is off. When the X65 signal has been assigned, the operation mode changes with the ON/OFF state of
the X65 signal.

REMARKS
The priorities of Pr. 79 , Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

168

Selection of operation mode and operation location


Parameters referred to
Refer to page 86

Pr. 4 to 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Multi-speed operation

Refer to page 84

Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection


Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection

Refer to page 153

Refer to page 235

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)

Refer to page 108

Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

Refer to page 114

Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection

Refer to page 170

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 15 Jog frequency

169

Selection of operation mode and operation location


4.18.2 Operation mode at power-on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)
When power is switched on or when power comes back on after instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be
started up in the network operation mode.
After the inverter has started up in the network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be performed from
a program.
Set this mode for communication operation using PU connector.
Parameter

Name

Number

79

340

Initial Value

Setting Range

0 to 4, 6, 7

Operation mode selection

Communication startup
mode selection

Description
Operation mode selection
(Refer to page 163)

As set in Pr. 79.

Network operation mode


Network operation mode

Operation mode can be changed between

10

the PU operation mode and network


operation mode from the operation panel.

The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Specify operation mode at power-on (Pr. 340)


Depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings, the operation mode at power-on (reset) changes as described below.

Pr. 340
Setting

Pr. 79
Setting

Operation Mode at Power-on, Power


Restoration, Reset

0
(initial
value)

(initial

External operation mode

value)
1

PU operation mode

2
3, 4
6

0
1
2
3, 4
6

10

0
1
2
3, 4

External operation mode


External/PU combined mode
External operation mode

Operation Mode Switching


Switching among the external, PU and Net operation mode is
enabled 1
Fixed to PU operation mode
Switching between the external and NET operation mode is enabled
Switching to PU operation mode disabled
Operation mode switching disabled
Switching among the external, PU, and NET operation mode is

X12 (MRS) signal ON ....External operation

enabled while running.


Switching among the external, PU and Net operation mode is

mode
X12 (MRS) signal off .......External operation

enabled 1
Fixed to external operation mode (Forcibly switched to external

mode
NET operation mode
PU operation mode
NET operation mode
External/PU combined mode
NET operation mode
X12 (MRS) signal ON .......NET operation

operation mode.)

Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"

mode
X12(MRS) signal off ...........External operation
mode
NET operation mode
PU operation mode
NET operation mode
External/PU combined mode

NET operation mode

External operation mode

Switching between the PU and Net operation mode is enabled 2


Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
Fixed to NET operation mode
Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled
while running 2
Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"

Operation mode can not be directly changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode

Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode with

Parameters referred to
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection

170

Refer to page 160

key of the operation panel and X65 signal.

Selection of operation mode and operation location


4.18.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication
operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551)
When the RS-485 communication with the PU connector is used, the external start command and frequency command
can be made valid. Command source in the PU operation mode can be selected.
From the communication device, parameter unit, etc. which have command source, parameter write or start command
can be executed. Parameter read or monitoring can be executed in any operation mode.
Parameter

Name

Number

338

339

551

Communication operation
command source

Communication speed
command source

PU mode operation
command source
selection

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

Description

Start command source communication

Start command source external

Frequency command source communication


Frequency command source external (Frequency command from

communication is invalid, frequency command from terminal 2 is

valid)
Frequency command source external (Frequency command from
2

communication is valid, frequency command from terminal 2 is

2
4

invalid)
PU connector is the command source when PU operation mode.
Operation panel is the command source when PU operation mode.
Parameter unit automatic recognition

9999
9999

Normally, operation panel is the command source. When the


parameter unit is connected to the PU connector, PU is the
command source.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* Pr. 551 is always write-enabled.

(1)

Selects the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr. 551)

Any of the operation panel, PU connector can be specified as the command source in the PU operation mode.
In the PU operation mode, set Pr. 551 to "2" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency command
during the RS-485 communication with PU communication.
PU...PU operation mode, NET...network operation mode, ....without command source
Command Source
Parameter

RS-485

panel

unit

communication

PU

PU 1

PU

NET

PU 2

PU 2

NET

Setting

9999

Remarks
Switching to NET operation mode
disabled

(initial value)
The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. When using the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr. 551 "2".

When Pr. 551 = "9999", the priorities of the PU control source is parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) > operation panel.

NOTE
When performing the RS-485 communication with the PU connector when Pr. 551 = "9999", PU mode command
source does not automatically change to the PU connector.
When Pr. 551 = "2" (PU mode PU connector), the operation mode cannot be switched to the network operation mode.
Changed setting value is made valid when powering on or resetting the inverter.
The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. Select network operation mode (NET mode
command source).

171

PARAMETERS

Operation

Pr. 551

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(2)

Controllability through communication


Controllability through communcation in each operation mode is shown below.
Monitoring and parameter read can be performed from any operation regardless of operation mode.
Operation
Mode

Operation
Condition
Location (Pr. 551 Setting)

PU
Operation

External
Operation

Item

RS-485

NET Operation

Run command (start)

Run command (stop)

Control by

External/PU
External/PU
Combined
Combined
Operation Mode 1 Operation Mode 2
(Pr. 79 = 3)
(Pr. 79 = 4)

Running frequency
(PU connector) setting
Parameter write

communica

Inverter reset

tion from

Run command (start)

PU

Run command (stop)

Running frequency
setting

connector

Other than the


above

Parameter write
Inverter reset
Control
circuit
external

Inverter reset

terminals

Run command
(start, stop)

Frequency setting

: Enabled, : Disabled, : Some are enabled


1
2
3
4
5
6

As set in Pr.338 Communication operation command source and Pr. 339 Communication speed command source (Refer to page 171)
At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.
Enabled only when stopped by the PU. At a PU stop, PS is displayed on the operation panel. As set in Pr. 75 PU stop selection. (Refer to page 153)
Some parameters may be write-disabled according to the Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting and operating status. (Refer to page 156)
Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. When Pr. 77 = "2", write is enabled.
(Refer to the parameter list on page 52) Parameter clear is disabled.
Available with multi-speed setting and terminal 4-5 (valid when AU signal is ON).

(3)

Operation at error occurrence

Error Definition

Operation
Mode
Condition
(Pr. 551 setting)

Inverter

fault

PU Operation

External/PU
External/PU
Combined
Combined
External
Operation Mode Operation Mode
Operation
1
2
(Pr. 79 = 3)
(Pr. 79 = 4)

NET Operation

Stop

2 (PU connector)
PU

9999 (automatic

Stop/continued 1, 3

disconnection of recognition)
the PU

Other than the


above

RS-485
communication

2 (PU connector)

error of the PU

Other than the

connector

above

Stop/continued1
Stop/
continued2

Continued

Continued

Stop/
continued2

Stop/
continued2

Can be selected using Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.

Can be selected using Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.

In the PU JOG operation mode, operation is always stopped when the PU is disconnected. Whether fault (E.PUE) occurrence is allowed or not is as set in
Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.

172

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(4)

Selection of control source in network operation mode (Pr. 338, Pr. 339)
As control sources, there are the operation command source that controls the signals related to the inverter start
command and function selection and the speed command source that controls the signals related to frequency setting.
In network operation mode, the commands from the external terminals and communication are as listed below.

Location
Selection
Fixed
function
(terminalequivalent
function)

command source
Running frequency from
communication
Terminal 2
Terminal 4

3
4
5
7
8

REX Fifteen speed selection

10

X10

12

X12

14

X14

16

X16

18

X18

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 setting

command source
Pr. 339 Communication speed

Low speed operation


command/remote setting
clear
Middle speed operation
RM command/remote setting
function
High speed operation
RH command/remote setting
function
RT Second function selection
AU Current input selection
JOG Jog operation selection
OH External thermal relay input

Selective function

Pr. 338 Communication operation

RL

24 MRS

Inverter operation enable


signal
PU operation external
interlock
PID control valid terminal
PU-external operation
switchover
V/F switching
Output stop

0: NET

Remarks
0: NET

1: External 2: External 0: NET

1: External 2: External

NET

NET

NET

NET

External

External

External

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET
Combined

Pr. 59 = "0"
(multi-speed)
Pr. 59 "0"
(remote)

External
Combined
External

External
NET

External

NET

External

Pr. 59 = "0"
(multi-speed)

External
External
NET

External

NET

External

External
NET
Combined

PU operation interlock

25 STOP Start self-holding selection


37 X37 Traverse function selection
60 STF Forward rotation command
61 STR Reverse rotation command
62 RES Reset
PU/NET operation
65 X65
switchover
NET-external operation
66 X66
switching
Command source
67 X67
switchover

1: External

External
External
External

NET
NET
NET

Pr. 79 "7"
Pr. 79 = "7"
When the X12
signal is not
assigned

External
External
External
External
External

External
External

PARAMETERS

Operation

External

[Explanation of table]
External
: Command is valid only from control terminal.
NET
: Command only from communication is valid
Combined : Command from both control terminal and communication is valid.

: Command from either of control terminal and communication is invalid.

REMARKS
The command source of communication is as set in Pr. 551 .
The Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr. 77 = "2". Note that the setting change is
reflected after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, communication operation command source and
communication speed command source before the setting change are valid.

173

Selection of operation mode and operation location


(5)

Switching of command source by external terminal (X67)


In the network operation mode, the command source switching signal (X67) can be used to switch the start command
source and speed command source.
Set "67" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the X67 signal to the control terminal.
When the X67 signal is off, the start command source and speed command source are control terminal.
X67 Signal State

Start Command Source

Speed Command
Source

No signal
assignment

According to Pr. 338

According to Pr. 339

ON
OFF

Command is valid only from control terminal.

REMARKS
The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is reflected only during a stop. It is reflected after a stop when the terminal is switched
while the inverter is running.
When the X67 signal is off, a reset via communication is disabled.

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection

174

Refer to page 88
Refer to page 160

Communication operation and setting

4.19 Communication operation and setting


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Communication operation from PU


connector
Restrictions on parameter write
through communication

Initial setting of computer link


communication (PU connector)
Modbus-RTU communication
specifications
Communication EEPROM write
selection

Refer to Page

Pr. 117 to Pr. 124

178

Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr.


122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549

195

Pr. 342

182

4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector


Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can
run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.

PU connector pin-outs
Pin Number

Inverter
(receptacle side)
viewed from bottom

8) to 1)

Name

1)

SG

2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

RDA
SDB
SDA
RDB

7)

SG

8)

Description
Earth (ground)
(connected to terminal 5)
Parameter unit power supply
Inverter receive+
Inverter sendInverter send+
Inverter receiveEarth (ground)
(connected to terminal 5)
Parameter unit power supply

NOTE
Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
When making RS-485 communication between the FRWhen pins No.2 and No.8 are connected
D700 series, FR-E500 series and FR-S500 series, Incorrect
Battery supply mode
Protective
connection of pins No.2 and No.8 (parameter unit power
ON
OFF
OFF
circuit
supply) of the above PU connector may result in the
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
operation
inverter malfunction or failure.
PU
PU
PU
(shut-off)
connector
connector
connector
When multiple inverters are connected using pins No.2
and No.8, power is provided from the inverter which is
Communication
powered on to the inverters which are powered off in case
stop
inverters which are powered on and off are mixed. In such
a case, a protective circuit of the inverter, which is on,
functions to stop communication.
Power supply
When connecting multiple inverters for RS-485
communication, make sure to disconnect cables from No.2 and No.8 so that pins No.2 and No.8 are not connected
between inverters.
When using the RS-485 converter which receives power from the inverter, make sure that power is provided from one
inverter only. (Refer to the figure below.)

Computer

Station 1

Station 2

Station n

RS-232C
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

RS-232C

RS-485

converter
Distributor
Terminating resistor
Connect pins No.2 and No.8
of one inverter and a converter only.

Do not connect pins No.2 and No.8


of the other inverters.

Power supply

Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.
The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.

175

4
PARAMETERS

(1)

Communication operation and setting


(2)

PU connector communication system configuration


Connection of a computer to the inverter (1:1 connection)
Computer

Inverter

PU
connector RS-485
interface/terminals

FR-PU07

Station 0

Computer

Station 0

Inverter

RS-232C
connector

Inverter

PU
connector

RJ-45 connector

RS-232C
Maximum
cable
15m
RS-232C RS-485
converter

RJ-45
connector
10BASE-T cable 1)

10BASE-T cable 1)

PU
connector

RJ-45
connector

10BASE-T cable 1)

Combination of computer and multiple inverters (1:n connection)


Computer

Station 0

Station 1

Station n
(max. 32 inverters)

Inverter
PU
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

RS-485
interface/terminals
Distributor
Terminating resistor
RJ-45 connector

10BASE-T cable 1)
Computer
RS-232C
Connector
RS-232C
cable

Maximum
15m

RS-232C RS-485
converter

Station 1

Station 2

Station n

Inverter
PU
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

Inverter
PU
connector

Distributor
RJ-45 connector

10BASE-T cable 1)

Terminating resistor

REMARKS
Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Examples of product available on the market (as of February, 2008)

Product
1) 10BASE-T cable

Type
SGLPEV-T 0.5mm 4P 1

1 Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the 10BASE-T cable. (Refer to page 175)

176

Maker
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

Communication operation and setting


(3)

Connection with RS-485 computer


Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter

Inverter

Cable connection and signal direction


Computer side terminals *1

PU connector

10BASE-T cable

Receive data

SDA

Receive data

SDB

Send data

RDA
RDB

Send data

0.2mm2 or more

Signal ground

SG

Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" (multiple) inverters


Cable connection and signal direction

Computer *1

10 BASE-TCable

Receive
Send

RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

SG

RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA

Terminating
resistor*2

SG
Station 1

SG
Station 2

SG
Station n

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter
1
2

Make connection in accordance with the instruction manual of the computer to be used with.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
The inverters may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders
communication, provide a terminating resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use a distributor since a terminating
resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the terminating resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Terminating resistor: 100)

NOTE
Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the 10BASE-T cable. (Refer to page 175)
When making RS-485 communication between the FR-D700 series, FR-E500 series and FR-S500 series, incorrect
connection of pins No.2 and 8 (parameter unit power supply) of the above PU connector may result in the inverter
malfunction or failure. (Refer to page 175)

(4)

Two-wire type connection

If the computer is 2-wire type, a connection from the inverter can be changed to 2-wire type by passing wires across
reception terminals and transmission terminals of the PU connector pin.
Inverter
SDA

PARAMETERS

Computer

SDB

Transmission enable

RDA
Reception enable

SG

Pass a wire

RDB
SG

REMARKS
A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception
is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.
The passed wiring length should be as short as possible.

177

Communication operation and setting


4.19.2 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549)
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer.
Use PU connector of the inverter for communication.
You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using Mitsubishi inverter protocol or Modbus-RTU protocol.
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, initialization of the communication
specifications must be made to the inverter.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error.

Parameter

Name

Number

117

PU communication
station number

Initial
Value
0

Setting Range
0 to 31 (0 to 247)
1

Description
Inverter station number specification
Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
Communication speed

118

PU communication speed

192

48, 96, 192, 384

The setting value X 100 equals the communication


speed.
Example)19200bps if 192
Stop bit length

119

120

123

124
549

PU communication stop
bit length

PU communication parity
check
PU communication
waiting time setting
PU communication CR/LF
selection
Protocol selection

9999

1bit

2bit

10

1bit

11

2bit

Without parity check

With odd parity check

With even parity check

0 to 150ms
9999

Data length
8bit
7bit

Set the waiting time between data transmission to


the inverter and response.
Set with communication data.

Without CR/LF

With CR

With CR/LF

Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol

Modbus-RTU protocol

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
1

When "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549, the setting range within parenthesis is applied.

NOTE
Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After you have changed the
communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.

178

Communication operation and setting


4.19.3 Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502)
You can select the inverter operation when a communication line error occurs during RS-485 communication from the
PU connector.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

Description
Number of retries at data receive error occurrence If the number of

121

Number of PU
communication
retries

consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will

0 to 10

come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).

Valid only Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol


9999

If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to trip.


RS-485 communication can be made. Note that a communication

122

PU communication
check time interval

fault (E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the


operation mode with command source. (NET mode at initial value)
Communication check (signal loss detection) time interval

0.1 to

If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible

999.8s

time, the inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).

9999

No communication check (signal loss detection)

At fault

Indication

occurrence

502

Stop mode selection


at communication
error

Fault output

Coasts to stop

E.PUE

Output

Decelerates to
stop

After stop
E.PUE

Output after
stop

Decelerates to
stop

After stop
E.PUE

Without output

At fault
removal
Stop
(E.PUE)
Stop
(E.PUE)
Automatic
restart
functions

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

Retry count setting (Pr.121)


Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to page 187 for data receive error for retry)
When data receive errors occur consecutively and exceed the permissible number of retries set, an inverter trips (E.PUE)
and a motor stops (as set in Pr. 502).
When "9999" is set, an inverter fault is not provided even if data receive error occurs but an alarm signal (LF) is output.
For the terminal used for the LF signal output, assign the function by setting "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in
Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).

Wrong

Computer
Reception error
LF

OFF

Normal
ACK

NAK

ENQ

Wrong

NAK

ENQ

Inverter

PARAMETERS

Reception error

Reception error

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "9999"


Computer
Wrong
Inverter

ENQ

Computer

Fault (E. PUE)


NAK

Wrong
NAK

ACK

ENQ

Computer
Inverter
Inverter

ENQ

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "1" (initial value)

ACK

(1)

Reception error
ON

OFF

REMARKS
Pr. 121 is valid only when Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol is selected. Pr. 121 is not valid when ModbusRTU communication protocol is selected.

179

Communication operation and setting


(2)

Signal loss detection (Pr.122)


If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and master as a result of a signal loss detection, a
communication fault (E.PUE) occurs and the inverter trips. (as set in Pr. 502).
When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
When the setting value is "0" (initial value), RS-485 communication can be made. However, a communication fault
(E.PUE) occurrs as soon as the inverter is switched to the operation mode (network operation mode in the initial setting)
with the control.
A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1s to 999.8s". To make a signal loss detection, it is necessary
to send data (refer to Mitsubishi inverter protcol control code (page 186), Modbus-RTU comunciation protocol (page 196))
from the computer within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes communication check (clearing of
communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master).
Communication check is made from the first communication in the operation mode with control source valid (network
operation mode in the initial setting).
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"
Operation mode

External

PU
ENQ

Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
Pr. 122
Communication
check counter

Fault (E.PUE)
Check start

Time

CAUTION
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a
communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the
inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter trips
(E.PUE).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by turning on its RES signal or by switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault, etc. the inverter does not detect
such a fault. This should be fully noted.

180

Communication operation and setting


(3)

Stop operation selection at occurrence of communication fault (Pr. 502)


Stop operation when retry count excess (Mitsubishi inverter protocol only) or signal loss detection error occurs can be selected.
Operation at fault occurrence
Pr. 502 Setting
Operation
Indication
Fault Output
0 (initial value)
1
2

Coasts to stop.

E. PUE lit

Decelerates to stop

E. PUE lit after stop

Operation at fault removal


Pr.502 Setting
0 (initial value)
1
2

Operation

Indication

Fault Output

Kept stopped

E. PUE

Kept provided

Automatic restart functions

Normal display

Not provided

Pr. 502 setting "0" (initial value)

Pr. 502 setting "1"

Fault occurrence

Fault occurrence

Fault removal

ON

Communication
fault

OFF

Motor coasting

Fault display
(E.PUE)
Fault output
(ALM)

Time
Display
OFF

OFF

ON

Fault display
(E.PUE)
Fault output
(ALM)

Fault removal

ON

Output frequency

OFF

Output frequency

Communication
fault

Provided
Provided after stop
Not provided

OFF

Decelerates to stop

Time
Display
OFF

ON

Pr. 502 setting "2"


Fault occurrence
OFF

Fault removal

ON

Output frequency

Communication
fault

OFF

Decelerates
to stop

Time
Display
OFF

REMARKS
The fault output indicates fault output signal (ALM signal) or alarm bit output.
When the setting was made to provide a fault output, the fault description is stored into the faults history. (The fault description
is written to the faults history when a fault output is provided.)
When no fault output is provided, the fault definition overwrites the fault indication of the faults history temporarily, but is not
stored.
After the fault is removed, the fault indication returns to the ordinary monitor, and the faults history returns to the preceding fault
indication.
When the Pr. 502 setting is "1 or 2", the deceleration time is the ordinary deceleration time setting (e.g. Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45). In
addition, acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7, Pr. 44).
When "2" is set in Pr. 502, run command/speed command at restarting follows the command before an fault occurrence.
When "2" is set in Pr. 502 at occurrence of a communication error and the error is removed during deceleration, the inverter
accelerates again at that point.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

Refer to page 91
Refer to page 114

181

PARAMETERS

Fault display
(E.PUE)
Fault output
(ALM)

Communication operation and setting


4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)
When parameter write is performed from RS-485 comuunication with the inverter PU connector, parameters storage
device can be changed from EEPROM + RAM to RAM only. Set when a frequent parameter change is necessary.

Parameter
Number
342

Name
Communication EEPROM
write selection

Initial Value

Setting Range
0

0
1

Description
Parameter values written by communication are
written to the EEPROM and RAM.
Parameter values written by communication are
written to RAM.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write them to the RAM only.
The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial
value)" (EEPROM write).

REMARKS
When "1" (write to RAM only) is set in Pr. 342, powering off the inverter will erase the changed parameter values. Therefore, the
parameter values available when power is switched on again are the values stored in EEPROM previously.

182

Communication operation and setting


4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. from the PU connector of the inverter using the Mitsubishi inverter
protocol (computer link communication).

(1)

Communication
The communication specifications are given below.
Item

Description

Communication protocol

Mitsubishi protocol (computer link)

Conforming standard

speed

PU connector

1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations

Pr. 117

Selected from among 4800/9600/19200 and 38400bps

Pr. 118

Asynchronous

Control procedure
Communication method
Character system

Half-duplex

ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected)

Pr. 119

Start bit
Communication

1bit

1 bit or 2 bits can be selected

Pr. 119

Parity check

Check (even, odd) or no check can be selected

Pr. 120

Error check

Sum code check

Terminator

CR/LF (presence/absence selectable)

Pr. 124

Selectable between presence and absence

Pr. 123

Stop bit length

Waiting time setting

Communication procedure
When data is read

Computer
(Data flow)

*2
1)

Inverter

4)

5)
Time

2)

Inverter

3)

*1
(Data flow)
Computer

When data is written

Data communication between the computer and


inverter is made in the following procedure.
1) Request data is sent from the computer to
the inverter. (The inverter will not send data
unless requested.)
2) After waiting for the waiting time
3) The inverter sends return data to the
computer in response to the computer
request.
4) After waiting for the inverter data processing
time
5) Answer from the computer in response to
reply data 3) of the inverter is transmitted.
(Even if 5) is not sent, subsequent
communication is made properly.)

If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to trip if the number of consecutive
retries exceeds the parameter setting.

On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns retry data 3) to the computer again. The inverter comes to trip if the number of consecutive data
errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

183

4
PARAMETERS

(2)

Pr. 549

EIA-485 (RS-485)

Number of connectable devices


Communication

Related
Parameter

Communication operation and setting


(3)

Communication operation presence/absence and data format types


Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
No.

Run

Operation
Communication request is sent to the
inverter in accordance with the user
program in the computer.
Inverter data processing time
No error 1

1)
2)

Parameter

Inverter

Command Frequency command

Write

Reset

A1

A, A2 3

A3

A, A2 3

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

Present

C14

C 2

D 2

(Request
accepted)
inverter (Data 1) is
With error.
checked for error)
(Request
rejected)
Computer processing delay time
No error 1
Answer from
Reply data from the

3)

4)

Multi

Monitor

E, E1, E2,
E3 3

Parameter
Read

E, E2 3

10ms or more

computer in response (No inverter


processing)
to reply data 3).
With error.
(Data 3) is checked
(Inverter outputs
for error)
3) again.)

5)

Operation

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent
(C)
F

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent

Absent
(C)

Absent (C)

In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 186)

Reply from the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 190)

When any of "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code HFF sets data format to A2 or E2. In addition, data format is always A2 and E2
for read or write of Pr. 37.

At mode error, and data range error, C1 data contains an error code. (Refer to page 194) Except for those errors, the error is returned with data format
D.

Data writing format


Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
Format

ENQ
1

A1

ENQ
1

A2

ENQ
1

A3

ENQ
1

Inverter
station
number 2
Inverter
station
number 2
Inverter
station
number 2
Inverter
station
number 2

Instruction
code

Instruction
code

Instruction
code

Instruction
code

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12
Sum
check

Data
Sum
check

Data

14

15

16

17

18

19

4
Sum
check

Data
Send Receive
data data
type type

13

Data1

4
Sum
check

Data2

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format
C

C1

Inverter
ACK
station
4
1
number 2
Inverter
Send Receive
Error Error
STX
station
data data
code 1code 2
1
number 2 type type

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

Data1

13

14

Data2

15

16

ETX
1

17

18

Sum
check

19

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format

D
1
2
3
4

184

Number of Characters
2
3
4
5

NAK
1

Inverter
Error
station
code
number 2

Indicate a control code


Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
Set waiting time. When the Pr. 123 (waiting time setting) is other than 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data
format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group
on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or
absent can be selected using Pr. 124 (CR, LF selection).

Communication operation and setting


Data reading format
Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
Format
B

ENQ
1

Number of Characters
4
5
6

Inverter
Instruction code
station number 2

8
Sum
check

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format
E
E1
E2

Format
E3

STX
1
STX
1
STX
1

Inverter
station number 2
Inverter
station number 2
Inverter
station number 2

STX
1

Number of Characters
6
7
8

Read data

ETX
1

Read data

Sum
check

Read data

Number of Characters
4 to 23

Inverter
station number 2

ETX
1

Read data (Inverter type information)

10
Sum
check

11

12

13

4
ETX
1

24

ETX
1

Sum
check

25

26
Sum
check

27

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format

Number of Characters
2
3
4

NAK
1

Inverter
station number 2

Error
code

Send data from computer to inverter during data read 5)


Format

C
(Without
data error)

F
(With data
error)

Number of Characters
2
3
4

ACK
1

Inverter
station number 2

NAK
1

Inverter
station number 2

Indicate a control code


Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
Set waiting time. When the Pr. 123 (waiting time setting) is other than 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data
format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group
on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or
absent can be selected using Pr. 124 (CR, LF selection).

4
PARAMETERS

1
2
3

185

Communication operation and setting


(4)

Data definitions

1) Control code
Signal

ASCII Code

STX

H02

Description
Start of Text (Start of data)

ETX

H03

End of Text (End of data)

ENQ

H05

Enquiry (Communication request)

ACK

H06

Acknowledge (No data error detected)

LF

H0A

Line Feed

CR

H0D

Carriage Return

NAK

H15

Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)

2) Inverter station number


Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter
can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 52)
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of
set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 52)
5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data.
Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments.
(e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer

Inverter data processing time


= Waiting time + Data check time
(Setting 10ms) (About 10 to 30ms, which
depends on the instruction code)

Inverter
Inverter
Computer

REMARKS
When the Pr. 123 PU communication waiting time setting setting is other than 9999, create the communication request data without
"waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
The data check time changes depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 187)

(Example 1)
Computer

Inverter

ASCII Code

ENQ

H05

Station Instruction
number
code

*Waiting
time

6) Sum check code


The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived
from the checked ASCII data.
Sum
check
code

Data

0
1
E
1
0
7
A
D
F
4
1
H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34

Binary code

H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
=H1F4

Sum
When the Pr. 123 Waiting time setting "9999", create the communication request
=
data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
(Example 2)
Inverter

Computer

ASCII Code

STX

H02

Station
number

Sum
Data read

code

0
1
1
7
0
3
0
7
H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30
= H130

Sum

186

ETX check

Binary code

Communication operation and setting


7) Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK
code.
Error
Code

Error Item

H0

Computer NAK error

H1

Parity error

H2

H3

Protocol error
Framing error

H5

Overrun error

H6

Inverter Operation

The number of errors consecutively detected in communication request


data from the computer is greater than allowed number of retries.
The parity check result does not match the specified parity

Sum check error

H4

Error Description

The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data Brought to trip (E. PUE)
received by the inverter.

if error occurs

The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake.

continuously more than

Alternatively, data receive is not completed within the predetermined

the allowable number of

time. CR or LF is not as set in the parameter.

retry times.

The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.


New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes
receiving the preceding data.

Does not accept

H7

Character error

The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code).

received data but is not


brought to trip.

H8

H9

Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation
HA

Mode error

mode, when operation command source is not selected or during inverter


operation.

HB
HC

error
Data range error

Does not accept


received data but is not

The specified command does not exist.

brought to trip.

Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, frequency setting,
etc.

HD

HE

HF

Response time
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer

Inverter data processing time = waiting time + Data check time


(Setting 10ms)
(depends on the instruction
code (see the following table))
Time
10ms or more necessary
Data sending time (refer to the following formula)

[Formula for data sending time]


1
Communication speed (bps)

Number of data characters


(Refer to page 184)

Communication specifications

Name
Stop bit length
Data length

Number of
Bits

Communication
(Total number of bits) = data send time (s)
(Refer to the following.)

Data check time

Item

1 bits

Various monitors, operation command,

2 bits
7 bits

frequency setting (RAM)


Parameter read/write, frequency setting

8 bits
Present
1 bits
Parity check
Absent
0
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.
Minimum number of total bits .................9 bits
Maximum number of total bits ................12 bits

(EEPROM)
Parameter clear/all clear
Reset command

Check Time
< 12ms
< 30ms
< 5s
No answer

187

PARAMETERS

(5)

Instruction code

Communication operation and setting


(6)

Instructions for the program

1) When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always
insert a retry program for data error.
2) All data communication, e.g. run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication request.
The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer
gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
3) Program example
To change the operation mode to computer link operation

Programming example of Microsoft Visual C++ (Ver.6.0)


#include <stdio.h>
#include <windows.h>
void main(void){
HANDLE
hCom;
DCB
hDcb;
COMMTIMEOUTS
char
char
char
int
int
BOOL
int
int

hTim;

//Communication handle
//Structure for communication setting
// Structure for time out setting

szTx[0x10];
// Send buffer
szRx[0x10];
// Receive buffer
szCommand[0x10];// Command
nTx,nRx;
// For buffer size storing
nSum;
// For sum code calculation
bRet;
nRet;
i;

// Opens COM1 port


hCom = CreateFile ("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);
if (hCom != NULL) {
// Makes a communication setting of COM1 port
GetCommState(hCom,&hDcb);
// Retrieves current communication information
hDcb.DCBlength = sizeof(DCB);
// Structure size setting
hDcb.BaudRate = 19200;
// Communication speed=19200bps
hDcb.ByteSize = 8;
// Data length=8bit
hDcb.Parity = 2;
// Even parity
hDcb.StopBits = 2;
// Stop bit=2bit
bRet = SetCommState(hCom,&hDcb);
// Sets the changed communication data
if (bRet == TRUE) {
// Makes a time out setting of COM1 port
Get CommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);
// Obtains the current time out value
hTim.WriteTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000;
// Write time out 1s
hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000;
// Read time out 1s
SetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);
// Changed time out value setting
// Sets the command to switch the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to the network operation mode
sprintf(szCommand,"01FB10000");
// Send data (NET operation write)
nTx = strlen(szCommand);
//Send data size
// Generates sum code
nSum = 0;
// Initialization of sum data
for (i = 0;i < nTx;i++) {
nSum += szCommand[i];
// Calculates sum code
nSum &= (0xff);
// Masks data
}
// Generates send data
memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx));
// Initialization of send buffer
memset(szRx,0,sizeof(szRx));
// Initialization of receive buffer
sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum);// ENQ code+send data+sum code
nTx = 1 + nTx + 2;
// Number of ENQ code+number of send data+number of sum code
nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL);
// Sending
if(nRet != 0) {
nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL);
// Receiving
if(nRet != 0) {
// Displays the receive data
for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) {
printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Consol output of receive data
// Displays ASCII coder in hexadecimal. Displays 30 when "0"
}
printf("\n\r");
}
}
}
CloseHandle(hCom);
}
}

188

// Close communication port

Communication operation and setting


General flowchart
Port open
Communication setting
Time out setting
Send data processing
Data setting
Sum code calculation
Data transmission
Receive data waiting
Receive data processing
Data retrieval
Screen display

CAUTION
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a
communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal loss etc., the inverter
cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to trip
(E.PUE, E.SER).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect
such a fault. This should be fully noted.

PARAMETERS

189

Communication operation and setting


(7)

Setting items and set data

After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data then start communication from the computer to
allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
No.

Item

Read/
Write

Instruction

Read

H7B

Write

HFB

Number of

Operation mode

Data Digits

Data Definition

Code

(Format)
4 digits

H0000: Network operation

(B, E/D)
4 digits

H0001: External operation


H0002: PU operation

(A, C/D)

H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01Hz increments


Speed increments 0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01 to 9998)
Output
frequency

Read

H6F

/speed

When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code


HFF, the data format is E2.
When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the monitor value is different
depending on whether the inverter is at a stop or running.

Output
current
Output
voltage

Monitor

Special
monitor
Special

Read

H70

Read

H71

Read

H72

Read

H73

monitor
Selection No.

Write

HF3

4 digits
(B, E/D),
6 digits
(B, E2/D)

(Refer to page 123)


H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A

4 digits

increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V

(B, E/D)
4 digits

increments

(B, E/D)
4 digits

H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3

(B, E/D),
6 digits
(B, E2/D)
2 digits

H01 to H3C: Monitor selection data

(B, E1/D)
2 digits

Refer to the special monitor No. table (page 192)

(A1, C/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two latest fault definitions
b15
H74

Fault
description

Read

b8b7

First fault in past

H75 Third fault in past

H74 to H77

b0
Latest fault

Second fault in past

4 digits
(B, E/D)

Fifth fault in past

Fourth fault in past

H77 Seventh fault in past

Sixth fault in past

H76

Refer to the alarm data table (page 193)


Run command
3

(expansion)
Run command

Write

HF9

Write

HFA

Read

H79

4 digits
Control input commands such as the forward rotation signal (STF)
and reverse rotation signal (STR). (For details, refer to page 193)

(A1, C/D)

Inverter status
monitor
4

(expansion)
Inverter status
monitor
Set frequency

Read

Set frequency

HED

(RAM)

page 193)
Read set frequency/speed from RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01Hz increments
When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code
HFF, the data format is E2.
Write set frequency/speed to RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to H9C40 (0 to 400.00Hz): Frequency increments 0.01Hz
Speed increments 0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01 to 9998)

Set frequency
(RAM, EEPROM)

Write

When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code


HEE

HFF, the data format is A2.


To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the

inverter RAM. (instruction code: HED)


Refer to page 184 for data format (A, A1, A2, A3, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3)

190

4 digits
(B, E/D)
2 digits
(B, E1/D)

Speed increments 0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01 to 9998)


H6E

(EEPROM)
5

H7A
H6D

(RAM)
Set frequency

Monitor the states of the output signals such as forward rotation,


reverse rotation and inverter running (RUN). (For details, refer to

Read

(A, C/D)
2 digits

4 digits
(B, E/D),
6 digits
(B, E2/D)

4 digits
(A, C/D),
6 digits
(A2, C/D)

Communication operation and setting

No.

Item

Read/
Write

Number of

Instruction

Data Digits

Data Definition

Code

(Format)
H9696: Inverter reset
As the inverter is reset at start of communication by the computer,

Inverter reset

Write

HFD

the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.


H9666: Inverter reset
When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to the computer
and then the inverter is reset.

Fault definition all


clear

Write

HF4

4 digits
(A, C/D)
4 digits
(A, D)
4 digits

H9696: Faults history batch clear

(A, C/D)

All parameters return to the initial values.


Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be
selected according to data. ( : Clear, : Not clear)
Refer to page 52 for parameter clear, all clear, and communication
parameters.

Clear Type

Parameter clear
All clear

Data

Parameter clear
Write

HFC
All parameter clear

Communication Pr.

H9696
H5A5A

H9966
H55AA

4 digits
(A, C/D)

When clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communicationrelated parameter settings also return to the initial values. When
resuming operation, set the parameters again.
Executing clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF
settings. During password lock, only all parameter clear is
available with H9966 and H55AA.
4 digits
Read

H00 to H63

Refer to the instruction code (Refer to page 52) and write and/or
read parameter values as required.

Parameter

When setting Pr. 100 and later, link parameter extended setting
must be set.

10

11

Write

Link parameter
expansion setting

Second parameter
12

Read

H80 to HE3

H7F

Write

HFF

Read

H6C

Data format of Pr. 37 read and write is E2 and A2


Parameter description is changed according to the H00 to H09
setting.
For details of the settings, refer to the parameter instruction code
(Refer to page 52).
Setting calibration parameter 1
H00: Frequency 2
H01: Parameter-set analog value

changing

H02: Analog value input from termin

(instruction code

HFF = 1, 9)

Write

Refer to the list of calibration parameters on the next page for


calibration parameters.

HEC
2

The gain frequency can also be written using Pr. 125 (instruction code:

6 digits
(B, E2/D)
4 digits
(A, C/D),
6 digits
(A2, C/D)
2 digits
(B, E1/D)
2 digits
(A1, C/D)
2 digits
(B, E1/D)

2 digits
(A1, C/D)

H99) or Pr. 126 (instruction code: H9A).

13

Multi command

14

Inverter type monitor

Inverter type

Write/
Read

Read

HF0

H7C

Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for


reading data (Refer to page 194 for detail)
Reading inverter type in ASCII code.

10 digits
(A3, C1/D)

"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area

20 digits

Example of FR-D740

(B, E3/D)

H46, H52, H2D, H44, H37, H34, H30, H20 ..H20


Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1kW, and rounds down 0.01kW
increments
Capacity

Read

H7D

"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area


Example
0.4K ................. "

6 digits
(B, E2/D)

4" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H34)

0.75K ............... "


7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
Refer to page 184 for data format (A, A1, A2, A3, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3)

191

PARAMETERS

(B, E/D),

Communication operation and setting


REMARKS
Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all
clear is performed.

Example) When reading the C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) settings from the inverter of station 0
Computer Send Data

Inverter Send Data

ENQ 00 FF 0 01 82

ACK 00

Set "H01" to the expansion link parameter.

ENQ 00 EC 0 01 7E

ACK 00

Set "H01" to second parameter changing.

ENQ 00 5E 0 0F

STX 00 0000 ETX 25

C3 (Pr. 902) is read. 0% is read.

ENQ 00 60 0 FB

STX 00 0000 ETX 25

C6 (Pr. 904) is read. 0% is read.

1)
2)
3)
4)

Description

To read/write C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from 1) again.

List of calibration parameters


Instruction

C4 (903)
C5 (904)
C6 (904)
126 (905)
C7 (905)

frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

Extended

125 (903)

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency


Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

Write

C2 (902)
C3 (902)

Code

Name

Read

Parameter

5E

DE

5E

DE

5F

DF

5F

DF

60

E0

60

E0

61

E1

61

E1

[Special monitor selection No.]


Refer to page 123 for details of the monitor description.
Data

Description

H01

Output frequency/speed 1

H02
H03

Output current
Output voltage

H05

Frequency setting/speed setting 1

H08
H09

Converter output voltage


Regenerative brake duty
Electronic thermal relay function

H0A
H0B
H0C
H0E
H0F

load factor
Output current peak value
Converter output voltage peak value
Output power
Input terminal status 2

Unit

Data

0.01Hz/

H10
H14
H17
H18
H19
H34
H35
H36
H3D
H3E
H3F
H40

0.001
0.01A
0.1V
0.01Hz/
0.001
0.1V
0.1%
0.1%
0.01A
0.1V
0.01kW

Description

When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code HFF, the data format is 6 digits (E2).

Input terminal monitor details

b15

Unit

Output terminal status 3


Cumulative energization time
Actual operation time
Motor load factor
Cumulative power
PID set point
PID measured value
PID deviation
Motor thermal load factor
Inverter thermal load factor
Cumulative power 2
PTC thermistor resistance

1h
1h
0.1%
1kWh
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.01kWh
0.01k

RH

RM

RL

STR

b0
STF

ABC

b0
RUN

Output terminal monitor details

b15

192

Communication operation and setting


[Fault data]
Refer to page 245 for details of fault description
Data
H00

Definition
No fault

H10
H11
H12
H20
H21
H22
H30

present
E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THT

Data
H31
H40
H52
H60
H70
H80
H81
H90
H91

Definition
E.THM
E.FIN
E.ILF
E.OLT
E.BE
E.GF
E.LF
E.OHT
E.PTC

Data
HB0
HB1
HB2
HC0
HC4
HC5
HC7

Definition
E.PE
E.PUE
E.RET
E.CPU
E.CDO
E.IOH
E.AIE

Fault definition display example (instruction code H74)


For read data H3010
(Previous fault ...... THT)
(Latest fault...OC1)
b15

b8b7

b0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Previous fault
(H30)

Latest fault
(H10)

[Run command]
Item

Run
command

Instruction

Bit

Code

Length

HFA

8bit

Run
command

HF9

16bit

(expansion)

Description
b0: AU (current input selection) 2
b1: forward rotation command
b2: reverse rotation command
b3: RL (low speed operation
command) 12
b4: RM (middle speed operation
command) 12
b5: RH (high speed operation
command) 12
b6: RT (second function selection)2
b7: MRS (output stop) 2
b0: AU (current input selection) 2
b1: forward rotation command
b2: reverse rotation command
b3: RL (low speed operation
command) 12
b4: RM (middle speed operation
command) 12
b5: RH (high speed operation
command) 12
b6: RT (second function selection)2
b7: MRS (output stop) 12
b8 to b15:

Example

[Example 1] H02... Forward rotation


b7
b0
0

[Example 2] H00... Stop


b7
0

b0

[Example 1] H0002... Forward rotation


b15
0

b0
0

[Example 2] H0020... Low speed operation


(When Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection
is set to "0")
b15
0

b0
0

1 The signal within parentheses is the default setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
(page 108).
2 When Pr. 551 = "2" (PU Mode control source is PU connector), only forward rotation and reverse rotation can be used.

[Inverter status monitor]


Instruction

Bit

Code

Length

Inverter
status

H7A

8bit

monitor

Inverter
status
monitor
(expansion)

H79

16bit

Description
b0: RUN (inverter running)
b1: Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation
b3: SU (up-to-frequency)
b4: OL (overload)
b5:
b6: FU (frequency detection)
b7: ABC (fault)
b0: RUN (inverter running)
b1: Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation
b3: SU (up-to-frequency)
b4: OL (overload)
b5:
b6: FU (frequency detection)
b7: ABC (fault)
b8 to b14:
b15: Fault occurrence

Example

[Example 1] H02... During forward rotation


b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
[Example 2] H80... Stop at fault occurrence
b7
b0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

[Example 1] H0002... During forward rotation


b15
0

b0
0

[Example 2] H8080... Stop at fault occurrence


b15
1

b0
0

The signal within parentheses is the default setting. Definitions change according to the Pr.190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).

193

PARAMETERS

Item

Communication operation and setting


[Multi command (HF0)]
Sending data format from computer to inverter
Format
A3

ENQ

Inverter
station
number

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

Send Receive
Instruction
Waiting
data data
Code
time
(HF0)
type1 type2

13

14

15

16

Data2
3

Data13

17

18

Sum
check

19
CR/LF

Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
Format
C1
1
2
3

STX

0
1

Inverter
station
number

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

Send Receive Error Error


data data code 1 code 2
type1 type2 5
5

Data14

13

14

15

Data2

16

ETX

17

18

Sum
check

19
CR/LF

Data 1

Data 2

Remarks

Run command

Set frequency

(expansion)
Run command

(RAM)
Set frequency

(expansion)

(RAM, EEPROM)

Run command (expansion) is same as instruction code HF9


(Refer to page 193)
The unit of set frequency is always by four digits, even when "0.01
to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" is set in instruction code HFF.

Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply

Data Type
0

Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter).


Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer).
Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending

Data Type

Data 1

Data 2

Inverter status

Output frequency

monitor (expansion)

(speed)

Inverter status
monitor (expansion)

Special monitor

Remarks
Inverter status monitor (expansion) is same as instruction code
H79 (Refer to page 193)
The unit of speed monitor is always by four digits (rounds down
after the decimal point), even when "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37
and "01" is set in instruction code HFF.
Replys the monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 for
special monitor.(Refer to page 192)

Error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2.
Mode error (HA), instruction code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is replied.

194

Communication operation and setting


4.19.6 Modbus RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549)
Using the Modbus RTU communication protocol, communication operation or parameter setting can be performed from
the PU connector of the inverter.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting

117

PU communication
station number

Description

Range
No reply to the master *

Inverter station number specification

0
1 to 247

Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
connected to one personal computer.

118

PU communication
speed

96

48, 96, 192,


384
0

120

PU communication
parity check

1
2

Communication speed
The setting value 100 equals the communication speed.
Example) 9600bps if 96
Without parity check
Stop bit length 2bit
With odd parity check
Stop bit length 1bit
With even parity check
Stop bit length 1bit
RS-485 communication can be made. Note that a communication

122

PU communication
check time interval

operation mode with command source.


0

0.1 to
999.8s
9999

343

Communication error
count

fault (E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the

Communication check (signal loss detection) time interval


If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
time, the inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).
No communication check (signal loss detection)
Displays the number of communication errors during Modbus-RTU
communication (reading only)

At Fault

Indication

Occurrence

502

549

Stop mode selection


at communication
error

Protocol selection

Removal

Output

Stop
(E.PUE)

After stop
E.PUE

Output after
stop

Stop
(E.PUE)

After stop
E.PUE

Without output

Automatic
restart functions

Coasts to stop. E.PUE

Decelerates to
stop

Decelerates to
stop

Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol

Modbus-RTU protocol

At Fault

Fault Output

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
* When Modbus-RTU communication is performed from the master with address 0 (station number 0) set, broadcast communication is selected and the
inverter does not send a response message. When response from the inverter is necessary, set a value other than "0" (initial value is 0) in Pr. 117 PU

communication station number.

NOTE
When "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549 and "384" (38400bps) in Pr. 118, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
is disabled. When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), change parameter using the operation panel.

REMARKS
Set Pr. 549 Protocol selection to "1" to use the Modbus RTU protocol.
When PU connector is selected as NET mode operation source (when Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection "2"),
Modbus RTU communication operation can be performed. (Refer to page 171)

195

PARAMETERS

Some functions are invalid for broadcast communication. (Refer to page 198 )

Communication operation and setting


(1)

Communication
The communication specifications are given below.
Item

Communication protocol
Conforming standard
Number of connectable
devices
Communication speed
Control procedure
Communication method
Character system
Start bit
Communi
cation

Stop bit length


Parity check

Error check
Terminator
Waiting time setting

(2)

Description

Related
Parameter

Modbus-RTU protocol
EIA-485(RS-485)

Pr. 549

1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations

Pr. 117

Selected from among 4800/9600/19200 and 38400bps


Asynchronous
Half-duplex
Binary (always 8 bits)
1bit
Select from the following three types

Pr. 118

No parity, stop bit length 2 bits


No odd parity, stop bit length 1 bits
Even parity, stop bit length 1 bit
CRC code check
Not used
Not used

Pr. 120

Outline

The Modbus protocol is the communication protocol developed by Modicon for PLC.
The Modbus protocol performs serial communication between the master and slave using the dedicated message frame.
The dedicated message frame has the functions that can perform data read and write. Using the functions, you can read
and write the parameter values from the inverter, write the input command of the inverter, and check the operating status. In
this product, the inverter data are classified in the holding register area (register addresses 40001 to 49999). By accessing
the assigned holding register address, the master can communicate with the inverter which is a slave.

REMARKS
There are two different serial transmission modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and RTU
(Remote Terminal Unit) mode. This product supports only the RTU mode in which 1-byte (8-bit) data is transmitted as-is.
Only the communication protocol is defined by the Modbus protocol, and the physical layer is not stipulated.

196

Communication operation and setting


(3)

Message format
Inverter response time
(Refer to the following table for the data check time)

Query communication
PLC (master)

Query message

Inverter (slave)

Data absence time


(3.5 bytes or more)

Response message

Broadcast communication
PLC (master)

Query message
No Response

Inverter (slave)

Data check time


Item
Various monitors, operation command,
frequency setting (RAM)
Parameter read/write, frequency setting
(EEPROM)

Check Time
<20ms
<50ms

Parameter clear/all clear

<5s

Reset command

No answer

1) Query
The master sends a message to the slave (= inverter) at the specified address.
2) Normal Response
After receiving the query from the master, the slave executes the requested function and returns the corresponding normal
response to the master.
3) Error Response
If an invalid function code, address or data is received, the slave returns it to the master.
When a response description is returned, the error code indicating that the request from the master cannot be executed is
added.
No response is returned for the hardware-detected error, frame error and CRC check error.
4) Broadcast
By specifying address 0, the master can send a message to all slaves. All slaves that received the message from the
master execute the requested function. In this communication, the slaves do not return a response to the master.

REMARKS

4
PARAMETERS

The slave executes the function independently of the inverter station number setting (Pr. 117) during broadcast communication.

197

Communication operation and setting


(4)

Message frame (protocol)


Communication method
Basically, the master sends a query message (question) and the slave returns a response message (response).
When communication is normal, Device Address and Function Code are copied as they are, and when
communication is abnormal (function code or data code is illegal), bit 7 (= 80h) of Function Code is turned on and the
error code is set to Data Bytes.
Query message from Master
Device Address

Device Address

Function Code

Function Code

Eight-Bit

Eight-Bit

Data Bytes

Data Bytes

Error Check

Error Check
Response message from slave

The message frame consists of the four message fields as shown above.
By adding the no-data time (T1: Start, End) of 3.5 characters to the beginning and end of the message data, the slave
recognizes it as one message.
Protocol details
The four message fields will be explained below.
Start

1) ADDRESS

T1

8bit

2) FUNCTION

3) DATA

8bit

n8bit

Message Field

4) CRC CHECK
L

8bit

8bit

End
T1

Description
The address code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 0 to 247 can be set. Set 0 to send a broadcast

1) ADDRESS field

message (all-address instruction) or any of 1 to 247 to send a message to each slave.


When the slave responds, it returns the address set from the master.
The value set to Pr. 117 PU communication station number is the slave address.
The function code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 1 to 255 can be set. The master sets the function
that it wants to request from the slave, and the slave performs the requested operation. The following
table gives the supported function codes. An error response is returned if the set function code is
other than those in the following table.
When the slave returns a normal response, it returns the function code set by the master. When the
slave returns an error response, it returns H80 + function code.

Code
2) FUNCTION
field

Function Name

H03

Read Holding Register

H06

Preset Single Register

H08

Diagnostics

H10

Preset Multiple Registers

H46

Read Holding Register


Access Log

Outline
Reads the holding register data.
Writes data to the holding
register.
Function diagnosis
(communication check only)
Writes data to multiple
consecutive holding registers.
Reads the number of registers
that succeeded in communication
last time.

Broadcast
Communication
Disallowed
Allowed
Disallowed
Allowed
Disallowed

Table 1:Function code list

3) DATA field

The format changes depending on the function code (Refer to page 199). Data includes the byte count,
number of bytes, description of access to the holding register, etc.
The received message frame is checked for error. CRC check is performed, and 2 byte long data is
added to the end of the message. When CRC is added to the message, the low-order byte is added

4) CRC CHECK
field

first and is followed by the high-order byte.


The CRC value is calculated by the sending side that adds CRC to the message. The receiving side
recalculates CRC during message receiving, and compares the result of that calculation and the
actual value received in the CRC CHECK field. If these two values do not match, the result is defined
as error.

198

Communication operation and setting


(5)

Message format types

The message formats corresponding to the function codes in Table 1 on page 198 will be explained.
Read holding register data (H03 or 03)
Can read the description of 1) system environment variables, 2) real-time monitor, 3) faults history, and 4) inverter
parameters assigned to the holding register area (refer to the register list (page 204))
Query message
1) Slave

2) Function

Address
(8bit)

Starting Address

No. of Points

CRC Check

H03

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


1) Slave

2) Function

Address

Byte Count

H03

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Data

CRC Check

...

(8bit)

(8bit)

(n 16bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Query message setting


Message

Setting Description
Address to which the message will be sent

1) Slave Address

Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid).

2) Function

Set H03.
Set the address at which holding register data read will be started.
Starting address = Starting register address (decimal)-40001

3) Starting Address

For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding
register 40002.
Number of holding registers from which data will be read

4) No. of Points

The number of registers from which data can be read is a maximum of 125.

Description of normal response


Message

Setting Description
The setting range is H02 to H14 (2 to 20).

5) Byte Count

Twice greater than the No. of Point specified at 4) is set.


The number of data specified at 4) is set. Data are read in order of Hi byte and Lo

6) Data: Read data

byte, and set in order of starting address data, starting address + 1 data, starting
address + 2 data,

Example: To read the register values of 41004 (Pr. 4) to 41006 (Pr. 6) from the slave address 17 (H11)

Query message
Function

H11

H03

H03

Starting Address
HEB

H00

No. of Points
H03

H77

CRC Check
H2B

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

PARAMETERS

Slave Address

Normal response (Response message)


Slave Address

Function

Byte Count

H11

H03

H06

H17

H70

H0B

Data
HB8

H03

HE8

H2C

CRC Check
HE6

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Read value
Register 41004(Pr. 4): H1770 (60.00Hz)
Register 41005(Pr. 5): H0BB8 (30.00Hz)
Register 41006(Pr. 6): H03E8 (10.00Hz)

199

Communication operation and setting


Write holding register data (H06 or 06)
Can write the description of 1) system environment variabls and 4) inverter parameters assigned to the holding
register area (refer to the register list ( page 204)).
Query message
1) Slave Address
(8bit)

2) Function

3) Register Address

4) Preset Data

CRC Check

H06

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


1) Slave Address
(8bit)

2) Function

3) Register Address

4) Preset Data

CRC Check

H06

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Query message setting


Message

Setting Description
Address to which the message will be sent

1) Slave Address

Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication

2) Function

Set H06.
Address of the holding register to which data will be written
Register address = Holding register address (decimal)-40001

3) Register Address

For example, setting of register address 0001 writes data to the holding register
address 40002.
Data that will be written to the holding register

4) Preset Data

The written data is always 2 bytes.

Description of normal response


1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
No response is made for broadcast communication.
Example: To write 60Hz (H1770) to 40014 (running frequency RAM) at slave address 5 (H05).

Query message
Slave Address

Function

H05

H06

H00

Register Address
H0D

H17

Preset Data
H70

H17

CRC Check
H99

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


Same data as the query message

NOTE
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be
made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.

200

Communication operation and setting


Function diagnosis (H08 or 08)
A communication check can be made since the query message sent is returned unchanged as a response message
(function of sub function code H00).
Sub function code H00 (Return Query Data)
Query message
1) Slave Address
(8bit)

2) Function

3) Subfunction

4) Date

CRC Check

H08

H00

H00

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


1) Slave Address
(8bit)

2) Function

3) Subfunction

4) Date

CRC Check

H08

H00

H00

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Query message setting


Message

Setting Description
Address to which the message will be sent

1) Slave Address

Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid).

2) Function

Set H08.

3) Subfunction

Set H0000.

4) Data

Any data can be set if it is 2 bytes long. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF

Description of normal response


1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.

NOTE
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be
made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.

Write multiple holding register data (H10 or 16)


You can write data to multiple holding registers.
Query message
1)Slave
Address

2)
Function

(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

3)
Starting
Address
H
(8bit)

4)
No. of
Registers

L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

5)
ByteCount

L
(8bit)

(8bit)

6)
Data
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
...
(n28bit)

L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


2)Function

(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

3)Starting Address
H
(8bit)

4)No. of Registers

L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Query message setting


Message
1) Slave Address
2) Function

Setting Description
Address to which the message will be sent
Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication
Set H10.
Address where holding register data write will be started

3) Starting Address

Starting address = Starting register address (decimal)-40001


For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding
register 40002.

4) No. of Points
5) Byte Count

Number of holding registers where data will be written


The number of registers where data can be written is a maximum of 125.
The setting range is H02 to HFA (0 to 250).
Set a value twice greater than the value specified at 4).
Set the data specified by the number specified at 4). The written data are set in

6) Data

order of Hi byte and Lo byte, and arranged in order of the starting address data,
starting address + 1 data, starting address + 2 data

201

PARAMETERS

1)Slave Address

Communication operation and setting


Description of normal response
1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
Example: To write 0.5s (H05) to 41007 (Pr. 7) at the slave address 25 (H19) and 1s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr.8).

Query message
Slave
Address

Starting

Function

No. of Points

Address

Byte

Data

Count

CRC Check

H19

H10

H03

HEE

H00

H02

H04

H00

H05

H00

H0A

H86

H3D

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


Slave
Address

Starting

Function

No. of Points

Address

CRC Check

H19

H10

H03

HEE

H00

H02

H22

H61

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Read holding register access log (H46 or 70)


A response can be made to a query made by the function code H03 or H10.
The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access during previous communication and the
number of successful registers are returned.
In response to the query for other than the above function code, 0 is returned for the address and number of
registers.
Query message
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H46
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H46
(8bit)

3) Starting Address
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

4) No. of Points
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Query message setting


Message

Setting Description
Address to which the message will be sent

1) Slave Address

Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid).

2) Function

Set H46.

Description of normal response


Message

Setting Description
The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.
Starting address = Starting register address (decimal)-40001

3) Starting Address

For example, when the starting address 0001 is returned, the address of the
holding register that succeeded in access is 40002.

4) No. of Points

The number of holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.

Example: To read the successful register starting address and successful count from the slave address 25 (H19).

Query message
Slave Address

Function

H19

H46

H8B

CRC Check
HD2

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)


Slave Address

Function

H19

H10

Starting Address
H03

HEE

H00

No. of Points
H02

H22

H61

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

Success of two registers at starting address 41007 (Pr. 7) is returned.

202

CRC Check

Communication operation and setting


Error response
An error response is returned if the query message received from the master has an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for a parity, CRC, overrun, framing or busy error.

NOTE
No response message is sent in the case of broadcast communication also.

Error response (Response message)


1) Slave Address

2) Function

3) Exception Code

H80 + Function

(8bit)

(8bit)

(8bit)

CRC Check
L

(8bit)

(8bit)

Message

Setting Description

1) Slave Address

Address received from the master

2) Function

Master-requested function code + H80

3) Exception Code

Code in the following table

Error code list


Code
01

02

03
1

Error Item

Error Description

ILLEGAL FUNCTION

The set function code in the query message from the master cannot be

(Function code illegal)

handled by the slave.


The set register address in the query message from the master cannot be

ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS 1

handled by the inverter.

(Address illegal)

(No parameter, parameter read disabled, parameter write disabled)


The set data in the query message from the master cannot be handled by the

ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

inverter.

(Data illegal)

(Out of parameter write range, mode specified, other error)

An error will not occur in the following cases.


1) Function code H03 (Read holding register data)
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is one or more holding registers from which data can be read
2) Function code H10 (Write multiple holding register data)
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is 1 or more holding registers to which data can be written
Namely, when the function code H03 or H10 is used to access multiple holding registers, an error will not occur if a non-existing holding register
or read disabled or write disabled holding register is accessed.

REMARKS
An error will occur if all accessed holding registers do not exist.
Data read from a non-existing holding register is 0, and data written there is invalid.

Message data mistake detection


To detect the mistakes of message data from the master, they are checked for the following errors.
If an error is detected, a trip will not occur.

PARAMETERS

Error check item


Error Item
Parity error
Framing error
Overrun error

Error Description
specified parity (Pr. 334 setting).
The data received by the inverter differs from the
specified stop bit length (Pr. 333).
The following data was sent from the master before
the inverter completes data receiving.
The message frame data length is checked, and the

Message frame error

Inverter Operation

The data received by the inverter differs from the

received data length of less than 4 bytes is regarded

1) Pr.343 is increased by 1 at error


occurrence.
2)The terminal LF is output at error
occurrence.

as an error.
A mismatch found by CRC check between the
CRC check error

message frame data and calculation result is


regarded as an error.

203

Communication operation and setting


(6)

Modbus registers
System environment variable

1
2
3

Register

Definition

Read/write

Remarks

40002
40003
40004
40006
40007
40009
40010

Inverter reset
Parameter clear
All Parameter clear
Parameter clear 1
All parameter clear 1
Inverter status/control input instruction2
Operation mode/inverter setting 3

Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Read/write
Read/write

40014

Running frequency (RAM value)

Read/write

Any value can be written


Set H965A as a written value.
Set H99AA as a written value.
Set H5A96 as a written value.
Set HAA99 as a written value.
See below.
See below.
According to the Pr. 37 settings, the frequency

40015

Running frequency (EEPROM value)

and selectable speed are in 1r/min

Write

increments.

The communication parameter values are not cleared.


For write, set the data as a control input instruction.
For read, data is read as an inverter operating status.
For write, set data as the operation mode setting.
For read, data is read as the operation mode status.

<Inverter status/control input instruction>

Definition
Control input instruction

Bit
0
1
2

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Read Value

EXT
PU
EXT

H0000
H0001

H0010

H0002

H0004
H0005

H0014

Value

The restrictions depending on the operation

command)1
0
RT (second function selection)
AU (current input selection)
0
MRS (output stop)
0
0
0
0
0

Written

Mode

JOG
NET
PU+EXT

OL (overload)

command)1
RL (low-speed operation

SU (up-to-frequency)

command)1
RM (middle-speed operation

Inverter status

RUN (inverter running) 2


Forward rotation
During reverse rotation

Stop command
Forward rotation command
Reverse rotation command
RH (high-speed operation

<Operation mode/inverter setting>

mode changes according to the computer

FU (frequency detection)
ABC (fault) 2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Fault occurrence

link specifications.

The signal within parentheses is the default setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function
selection) (refer to page 108).
Each assigned signal is valid or invalid depending on NET. (Refer to page 171)

The signal within parentheses is the default setting. Definitions change according to the Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) (refer to page114).

Real time monitor


Refer to page 123 for details of the monitor description.
Register
40201
40202
40203
40205
40208
40209
40210
40211
40212
40214
40215
1
2

Unit

Register

Output frequency/speed 1
Output current
Output voltage
Output frequency setting/speed

Description

0.01Hz/1
0.01A
0.1V
0.01Hz/

setting 1
Converter output voltage
Regenerative brake duty
Electronic thermal relay function

0.001
0.1V
0.1%

40216
40220
40223
40224
40225
40252
40253
40254
40261
40262
40263
40264

0.1%

load factor
Output current peak value
Converter output voltage peak value
Output power
Input terminal status 2

0.01A
0.1V
0.01kW

Description

Unit

Output terminal status 3


Cumulative energization time
Actual operation time
Motor load factor
Cumulative power
PID set point
PID measured value
PID deviation
Motor thermal load factor
Inverter thermal load factor
Cumulative power 2
PTC thermistor resistance

1h
1h
0.1%
1kWh
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.01kWh
0.01k

When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code HFF, the data format is 6 digits (E").
Input terminal monitor details

b15

RH

RM

RL

STR

b0
STF

ABC

b0
RUN

Output terminal monitor details

204

b15

Communication operation and setting


Parameter
Read/
Write

Parameter

Register

Parameter Name

0 to 999

41000 to
41999

C2(902)

41902

Refer to the parameter list (page


52) for the parameter names.
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
(Analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
(Terminal analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(Analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
(Terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
(Analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
(Terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
(Analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
(Terminal analog value)

42092
C3(902)
43902
125(903)

41903
42093

C4(903)
43903
C5(904)

41904
42094

C6(904)
43904
126(905)

41905
42095

C7(905)
43905

Remarks

Read/write

The parameter number + 41000 is the register


number.

Read/write
Read/write

The analog value (%) set to C3 (902) is read.

Read

The analog value (%) of the voltage (current)


applied to the terminal 2 is read.

Read/write
Read/write

The analog value (%) set to C4 (903) is read.

Read

The analog value (%) of the voltage (current)


applied to the terminal 2 is read.

Read/write
Read/write

The analog value (%) set to C6 (904) is read.

Read

The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)


applied to the terminal 4 is read.

Read/write
Read/write

The analog value (%) set to C7 (905) is read.

Read

The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)


applied to the terminal 4 is read.

Faults history
Register
40501
40502
40503
40504
40505
40506
40507
40508

Definition

Read/write

Fault history 1
Fault history 2
Fault history 3
Fault history 4
Fault history 5
Fault history 6
Fault history 7
Fault history 8

Read/write
Read
Read
Read
Read
Read
Read
Read

Remarks
Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as
"H00

".

The error code can be referred to in the low-order 1


byte.
Performing write using the register 40501 batchclears the faults history.
Set any value as data.

Fault code list

H00
H10
H11
H12
H20
H21
H22
H30

Definition
No fault
present
E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THT

Data
H31
H40
H52
H60
H70
H80
H81
H90
H91

Definition
E.THM
E.FIN
E.ILF
E.OLT
E.BE
E.GF
E.LF
E.OHT
E.PTC

Data
HB0
HB1
HB2
HC0
HC4
HC5
HC7

Definition
E.PE
E.PUE
E.RET
E.CPU
E.CDO
E.IOH
E.AIE

4
PARAMETERS

Data

* Refer to page 245 for details of fault definition.

(7)

Pr. 343 Communication error count


You can check the cumulative number of communication errors.
Parameter

Setting Range

343

(Reading only)

Minimum
Setting Range
1

Initial Value
0

205

Communication operation and setting


NOTE
The number of communication errors is temporarily stored into the RAM. As it is not stored into the EEPROM
performing a power supply reset or inverter reset clears the value to 0.

(8)

Output terminal LF "alarm output (communication error warnings)"


During a communication error, the alarm signal (LF signal) is output by open collector output. Assign the used terminal
using Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Master

Alarm data

Alarm data

Normal data

Alarm data

Normal data

Reply data

Slave

Reply data

Not increased
Communication
Error count
(Pr. 343)
LF signal

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Turns off when normal data is received


Communication error count is increased
in synchronization with leading edge
of LF signal

Alarm data: Data resulting in communication error.

NOTE
The LF signal can be assigned to the output terminal using Pr. 190 or Pr. 192. Changing the terminal assignment may
affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

206

Special operation and frequency control

4.20 Special operation and frequency control


Purpose

Perform process control such as


pump and air volume.
Dancer control
Traverse function
Avoid overvoltage alarm due to
regeneration by automatic
adjustment of output frequency

Parameter that should be Set

207

Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134

215

Pr. 592 to Pr. 597

221

Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886

223

PID control
PID control (dancer control
setting)
Traverse function
Regeneration avoidance
function

Refer to Page

Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575


to Pr. 577

4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577)
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure.
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a
feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.

Name

127

PID control automatic


switchover frequency

128

PID action selection

129 1

PID proportional band

130 1

PID integral time

131

132

PID upper limit

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

9999

100%

1s

9999

PID lower limit

9999

133 1

PID action set point

9999

134 1

PID differential time

9999

575

Output interruption
detection time

1s

576

Output interruption
detection level

0Hz

Description

0 to 400Hz Frequency at which the control is automatically changed to PID control.


9999

Without PID automatic switchover function

0
20
21

PID action is not performed


PID reverse action Measured value (terminal 4)
PID forward action Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)

40

PID reverse action

Addition

41

PID forward action

method: fixed

42

PID reverse action

Addition

main speed (frequency command

43

PID forward action

method: ratio

of the operation mode)

For dancer control


set point (Pr. 133),
measured value (terminal 4)

If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the


manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the
0.1 to
measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the
1000%
response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.
hunting occurs. Gain Kp= 1/proportional band
9999
No proportional control
For deviation step input, time (Ti) required for only the integral (I) action
0.1 to to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P)
3600s action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier
but hunting occurs more easily.
9999
No integral control.
Maximum value
0 to
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. The
100% maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
equivalent to 100%.
9999
No function
Minimum frequency
0 to
If the process value falls below the setting range, the FDN signal is
100% output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value
(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
9999
No function
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999
Terminal 2 input is the set point.
For deviation ramp input, time (Td) required for providing only the
0.01 to
manipulated variable for the proportional (P) action. As the differential
10.00s
time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change.
9999
No differential control.
The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID operation
0 to
remains at less than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than the time set in Pr.
3600s
575.
9999
Without output interruption function
0 to 400Hz

Set the frequency at which the output interruption processing is


performed.

207

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

Special operation and frequency control


Parameter
Number
577

Name
Output interruption
cancel level

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

1000%

Description

900 to

Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) at which the PID output interruption

1100%

function is canceled.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection ="0". (Refer to page 157)
1

Pr. 129, Pr. 130, Pr. 133 and Pr. 134 can be set during operation. They can also be set independently of the operation mode.

(1)

PID control basic configuration


Pr. 128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)
Inverter circuit
Pr. 133
or terminal 2
Set point
0 to 5VDC
(0 to 10VDC)

Manipulated
variable

PID operation

+-

Kp 1+

1
Ti

+Td

Motor
IM

Terminal 4
Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)

Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time

(2)

PID action overview

1)PI action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control
action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation
and changes with time.
[Operation example for stepped changes of process value]
(Note) PI action is the sum of P and I actions.

Deviation

Set point
Measured value

P action
Time
I action
Time

PI action
Time

2)PD action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control
action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to
deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.

Set point
Deviation
Measured value

[Operation example for proportional changes of process value]

P action

(Note) PD action is the sum of P and D actions.

D action

PD action

208

Time

Time

Time

Special operation and frequency control


3)PID action
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both
actions for control.

Set point
Deviation

(Note) PID action is the sum of P, I and D actions.

Measured value
P action
Time
I action

Time

D action

Time
y=at2+bt+c

PID action

Time

4)Reverse operation
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is positive, and
decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
Deviation

Set point

[Heating]
Set point

X>0
-

X<0

Cold
Hot

Increase
Decrease

Measured value

Feedback signal
(measured value)

5)Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is negative, and
decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
Measured value

[Cooling]
Set point

X>0
-

X<0

Set point

Too cold Decrease


Increase
Hot

Feedback signal
(measured value)

Deviation

Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)


Deviation
Positive

Negative

Reverse action
Forward action

PARAMETERS

209

Special operation and frequency control


(3)

Connection diagram

Source logic
Pr. 128 = 20
Pr. 182 = 14
Pr. 190 = 15
Pr. 192 = 16

Inverter
MCCB
Power supply

Forward rotation

STF

Reverse rotation

STR

PID control selection

U
V
W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Motor

Pump

IM

RH(X14)*3
PC

2-wire type
*2(FUP)RUN

10
Setting Potentiometer
(Set point setting)

SE

Output signal
common

(measured value) 4 to 20mA


0 24V
Power
supply

*1

AC1
200/220V 50/60Hz
The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used.

The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190 , Pr. 192 (output terminal selection) setting.

The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal selection) setting.

210

+ -

2
5

3-wire type

Detector

Upper limit

(OUT) (COM) (24V)

Special operation and frequency control


(4)

I/O signals and parameter setting


Set "20, 21" in Pr. 128 to perform PID operation.
Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign PID control selection signal (X14) to turn the
X14 signal on.
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes PID control valid.
Enter the set point using the inverter terminal 2 or Pr. 133 and enter the measured value to terminal 4.

REMARKS
When Pr. 128 = "0" or X14 signal is off, normal inverter operation is performed without PID action.
Turning ON/OFF of bit of the terminal, to which X14 signal is assigned through network as RS-485 communication, enables
PID control.

Signal
X14

Input

PU

Terminal Used
Depending

on

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182

Description

Parameter Setting

PID control

Function

Turn on X14 signal to perform PID

Set 14 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr.

selection

control. 1
You can input the set point for PID

182.
Pr. 128 = 20, 21,

control.4
0 to 5V ...... 0 to 100%

Pr. 133 = 9999


Pr. 73 = 1 2, 11

0 to 10V .... 0 to 100%


Set the set point (Pr. 133) from the

Pr. 73 = 0, 10
Pr. 128 = 20, 21

operation panel.
Input the signal from the detector

Pr. 133 = 0 to 100%

Set point input

Set point input

Measured value

input

(measured value signal).


4 to 20mA . 0 to 100%

Pr. 267 = 0 2

0 to 5V ...... 0 to 100%

Pr. 267 = 1

0 to 10V .... 0 to 100%

Pr. 267 = 2
Pr. 128 = 20, 21

Output to indicate that the process value


FUP

Upper limit output

signal exceeded the maximum value (Pr.


131).

FDN

Lower limit output

Pr. 128 = 20, 21

Pr. 131 9999


Set 15 or 115 in Pr. 190
or Pr. 192 3
Pr. 128 = 20, 21

Output when the process value signal

Pr. 132 9999

falls below the minimum value (Pr. 132).

Set 14 or 114 in Pr. 190


or Pr. 192. 3

Output

Depending
Pr. 190, Pr. 192
RL

on

"Hi" is output to indicate that the output


Forward (reverse)

indication of the parameter unit is

Set 16 or 116 in Pr. 190

rotation direction

forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to

or Pr. 192. 3

output

indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV)


or stop (STOP).

PID

activated

SLEEP

SE
1
2
3
4

SE

Turns on during PID control.

PID output

Turns on when the PID output

interruption

interruption function is performed.

Output terminal

Common terminal for open collector

common

output terminal.

Set 47 or 147 in Pr. 190


or Pr. 192. 3
Pr. 575 9999
Set 70 or 170 in Pr. 190 or
Pr.192. 3

When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes PID control valid.
The shaded area indicates the parameter initial value.
When 100 or larger value is set in any of Pr.190, Pr.192 (output terminal function selection), the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to page 114 for details)
When Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 is not available for set point input. Use Pr. 133 for set point input.

NOTE
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 and Pr. 190, Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 145 for setting)

211

4
PARAMETERS

During PID control

Special operation and frequency control


(5)

PID automatic switchover control (Pr. 127)


The system can be started up without PID control only at a start.
When the frequency is set to Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency within the range 0 to 400Hz, the inverter
starts up without PID control from a start until output frequency is reached to the set frequency of Pr. 127, and then it shifts
to PID control. Once the system has entered PID control operation, it continues PID control if the output ferquency falls to
or below Pr.127.
Without
PID control

Output frequency

PID control

Pr. 127

Time
STF
PID

(6)

PID output suspension function (SLEEP function) (SLEEP signal, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 )

The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID operation remains at less than the Pr. 576 Output interruption
detection level setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575 Output interruption detection time. This function can reduce
energy consumption in the low-efficiency, low-speed range.
When the deviation (= set value - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff cancel level (Pr. 577 setting -1000%)
while the PID output interruption function is on, the PID output interruption function is canceled and PID control operation
is resumed automatically.
While the PID output interruption function is on, the PID output interruption signal (SLEEP) is output. At this time,
the inverter running signal (RUN) is off and the PID control operating signal (PID) is on.
For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal output, assign the function by setting "70" (positive logic) or "170" (negative
logic) in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).
Reverse action (Pr.128
Deviation

10)

Cancel
level

Pr.577 - 1000%

Output frequency

Pr.576
Less than Pr. 575
Pr. 575 or more SLEEP period
Time
OFF

RUN
PID
SLEEP

(7)

ON

PID monitor function


The PID control set point, measured value and deviation value can be displayed on the operation panel and output from
terminal AM.
The deviation monitor displays a negative value on the assumption that 1000 is 0%. (The deviation monitor cannot be
output from the terminal AM.)
For each monitor, set the following value in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection.
Setting

212

Monitor Description

Minimum
Increments

Terminal AM
Full Scale

52
53

PID set point


PID measured value

0.1%

100%

0.1%

100%

54

PID deviation

0.1%

Remarks

Value cannot be set to Pr. 158.


Displays 1000 when the PID deviation is 0%.

Special operation and frequency control


(8)

Adjustment procedure
Parameter setting

Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 127 to Pr. 134.

Set the I/O terminals for PID control (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal

Terminal setting

function selection), Pr. 190 , Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection))
When X14 signal is not assigned, setting a value other than "0" in Pr.

Turn on the X14 signal.

128 activates PID operation.

Operation

(9)

Calibration example

(A detector of 4mA at 0C and 20mA at 50C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25C under PID control.
The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0 to 5V).)
Start

Determination of set point

Set the room temperature to 25 C.


Set Pr. 128 and turn on the X14 signal to enable PID control.

Determine the set point of


what is desired to be adjusted.

Detector specifications
When 0
4mA and 50
20mA are used, the set point 25
the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.

Conversion of set point into %

Calculate the ratio of the set


point to the detector output.

Make the following calibration* when the target setting input (0 to 5V) and
detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.

Make calibration.

Setting of set point

When the set point is 50%


As the terminal 2 specifications are 0% 0V and 100%
to the terminal 2 for the set point of 50%.

Input a voltage across terminals


2-5 according to the set value %.

Operation

5V, input 2.5V

When the parameter unit is used for operation, input the set point (0 to
100%) in Pr. 133.
When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) to a
slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer time,
and the differential time (Pr. 134 ) to "9999" (no function), and while looking
at the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) and
increase the integral time (Pr. 130 ).

Set the proportional band (Pr.


129 ) to a slightly larger value,
the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a
slightly longer time, and the
differential time (Pr. 134 ) to
"9999" (no function), and turn
on the start signal.

Yes

PARAMETERS

Is the set point stable?

is 50% on

No
Parameter adjustment
To stabilize the measured value,
change the proportional band (Pr.
129 ) to a larger value, the integral
time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer
time, and the differential time (Pr.
134 ) to a slightly shorter time.

Parameter optimization
While the measured value is stable
throughout the operation status, the
proportional band (Pr. 129 ) may be
decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130 )
decreased, and the differential time
(Pr. 134 ) increased.

Adjustment end
* When calibration
is required

Using calibration Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal 2) or Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal
4), calibrate the detector output and target setting input.
Make calibration in the PU mode during an inverter stop.

213

Special operation and frequency control


<Set point input calibration>
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) across terminals 2-5.
2. Enter in C2 (Pr. 902) the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. In C3 (Pr.902), set the voltage value at 0%.
4. Apply the voltage of 100% set point (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2-5.
5. Enter in Pr.125 the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 50Hz).
6. In C4 (Pr.903), set the voltage value at 100%.

<Measured value calibration>


1. Apply the input current of 0% measured value (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using C6 (Pr. 904).
3. Apply the input current of 100% measured value (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using C7 (Pr. 905).

REMARKS
The frequency set in C5 (Pr. 904) and Pr. 126 should be the same as set in C2 (Pr. 902) and Pr. 125 .

The results of the above calibration are as shown below:


[Measured value]

[Set point setting]


(%)
100

(%)
100

50

0
0

(V)

[Manipulated variable]

Manipulated
variable (Hz)

0
0

20 (mA)

100 Deviation (%)

NOTE
If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL, REX signal) or jog operation (JOG signal) is entered with the X14 signal on, PID
control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation started.
If the setting is as follows, PID control becomes invalid.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection ="6" (switchover mode)
When the inverter is at a stop with Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection selected.
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is
the frequency set in Pr. 903.
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency settings are also valid.
The remote operation function is invalid during PID operation.
When the control is switched to PID control during normal
PID set point
operation, the frequency command value calculated by PID
operation using 0Hz as standard is used without the
frequency during the operation.
Frequency
command

PID action
Normal
operation

Frequency command
during normal operation

ON
PID operation

Normal
operation

Operation when control is switched to PID control


during normal operation

Parameters referred to
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 88
Refer to page 145
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 160
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 108
Refer to page 114
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)
Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection
Refer to page 137
Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level
Refer to page 95
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain

214

Refer to page 148

Special operation and frequency control


4.20.2 Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
Performs PID control by feedbacking the position detection of the dancer roller, controlling the dancer roller is in the
specified position.

Name

44

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

45

128

129 1

Second
deceleration time

PID action
selection

PID proportional
band

Setting

Initial Value
FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-008 to 100

5s
0 to 3600s

FR-D740-120 and 160 10s


0 to 3600s
9999

100%

9999

PID integral time

1s

PID upper limit

9999

20

PID reverse
action

21

PID forward
action

40

PID reverse
action

41

PID forward
action

42

PID reverse
action

43

PID forward
action

0.1 to 1000%

0.1 to 3600s

0 to 100%

9999

132

PID lower limit

133 1

PID action set


point

9999

0 to 100%

9999

134 1

PID differential
time

9999

9999

This parameter is the deceleration time of the main


speed during dancer control. It will not function as
second deceleration time.
PID action is not performed

9999

131

This parameter is the acceleration time of the main


speed during dancer control. It will not function as
second acceleration/deceleration time.

9999

130 1

Description

Range

0 to 100%
9999

Measured value (terminal 4)


Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)
Addition
For dancer control
method: fixed
set point (Pr. 133),
Addition
measured value
method: fixed
(terminal 4)
Addition
main speed (speed
method: ratio
command of the
Addition
operation mode)
method: ratio

If the proportional band is narrow (parameter


setting is small), the manipulated variable varies
greatly with a slight change of the measured value.
Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the
response sensitivity (gain) improves but the
stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain Kp
= 1/proportional band
No proportional control
For deviation step input, time (Ti) required for only
the integral (I) action to provide the same
manipulated variable as that for the proportional (P)
action. As the integral time decreases, the set point
is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
No integral control.
Maximum value
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP
signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/
10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
equivalent to 100%.
No function
Minimum value
If the process value falls below the setting range,
the FDN signal is output. The maximum input
(20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4)
is equivalent to 100%.
No function
Used to set the set point for PID control.
Always 50%

For deviation ramp input, time (Td) required for


providing only the manipulated variable for the
0.01 to 10.00s proportional (P) action.
As the differential time increases, greater response
is made to a deviation change.
9999

No differential control.

The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection ="0". (Refer to page 157)
1

Pr. 129, Pr. 130, Pr. 133 and Pr.134 can be set during operation. They can also be set independently of the operation mode.

215

PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

Special operation and frequency control


(1)

Dancer control block diagram


Acceleration/deceleration
of main speed
Main speed command
*1

Target frequency
Ratio

PID deviation

Pr. 128 = 42, 43

PID control
Dancer roll
setting point
Pr. 133

+
Kp(1+
-

PID set point

1
Ti S

Limit
X14

Acceleration/
deceleration

+ Td S)

Pr. 128 = 40, 41

PID feedback

IM

Convert to 0 to 100%

Potentiometer

Terminal 4
Dancer roll position detection
1

The main speed can be selected from all operation mode such as external (analog voltage input, multi-speed), PU (digital frequency setting), communication
(RS-485).

Set point and measured value of PID control

Set point

Input

Input Signal

Pr. 133

0 to 100%

4mA ..... 0%, 20mA...100%

0V ......... 0%, 5V.........100%

0V ......... 0%, 10V .......100%

When measured value is input as current


(4 to 20mA)

Measured
value

When measured value is input as voltage


(0 to 5V or 0 to 10V)

Pr.267 Setting Voltage/Current Input Switch

NOTE
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 may affect the other functions. Make setting after
confirming the function of each terminal.
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 145 for setting)

216

Special operation and frequency control


(2)

Dancer control overview

Performs dancer control by setting 40 to 43 in Pr. 128 PID action selection.The main speed command is the speed command of
each operation mode (external, PU, communication). Performs PID control by the position detection signal of the dancer
roller, then the result is added to the main speed command. For acceleration/deceleration of the main speed, set the
acceleration time in Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time in Pr. 45 Second deceleration time.
* Set 0s normally to Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time. When the Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 setting is large, response of dancer control during acceleration/
deceleration is slow.

Output frequency

PID adding value

Output frequency

Main speed

Time

STF

(3)

ON

Connection diagram

Source logic
Pr. 128 = 41
Pr. 182 = 14
Pr. 190 = 15
Pr. 192 = 16

Inverter
MCCB
Power supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Forward rotation

STF

Reverse rotation

STR

PID control selection

U
V
W

Motor
IM

RH(X14)*3
PC
*2 (FUP)RUN

Upper limit

10
Main speed commnad
setting potentiometer*1

2
5

Feedback value of
dancer roll position

SE

Output signal common

The main speed command differs according to each operation mode (external, PU, communication)

The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal selection) setting.

The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 182(input terminal selection) setting.

PARAMETERS

217

Special operation and frequency control


(4)

I/O signals and parameter setting


Set "40 to 43" in Pr. 128 to perform dancer control.
Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign PID control selection signal (X14) to turn the
X14 signal on.
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes dancer control valid.
Input the main speed command (external, PU, communication). The main speed command in any operation mode can be
input. (Note that terminal 4 can not be used as the main speed command.)
Input the set point using Pr. 133, then input the measured value signal (dancer roller position detection signal) across
terminal 4 and 5 of the inverter.

REMARKS
When Pr. 128 = "0" or X14 signal is off, normal inverter operation is performed without dancer control.
Turning ON/OFF of bit of the terminal, to which X14 signal is assigned through network as RS-485 communication, enables
dancer control.

Signal

Input

X14

Terminal Used
Depending

on

Pr. 178 to Pr. 182

Function
selection

control. 1
Input the signal from the dancer roller

input

FUP

Parameter Setting

Turn on X14 signal to perform dancer

Measured value

Description

PID control

Upper limit output

detector (measured value signal).

Output

Depending

on

Lower limit output

Pr. 190, Pr. 192


Forward (reverse)
RL

rotation direction
output
During PID control

PID
SE
1

SE

activated
Output terminal
common

Pr.128 = 40, 41, 42, 43

4 to 20mA.. 0 to 100%

Pr.267 = 0 2

0 to 5V....... 0 to 100%

Pr.267 = 1

0 to 10V..... 0 to 100%
Output to indicate that the measured

Pr.267 = 2

value signal exceeded the maximum


value

Output when the measured value signal


falls below the minimum value (Pr. 132).
Output

Pr.128 = 40, 41, 42, 43


Pr.131 9999
Set 15 or 115 in Pr.190 or Pr.192. 3

(Pr. 131).
FDN

Set 14 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182.

is

"ON"

when

the

Pr.128 = 40, 41, 42, 43


Pr.132 9999
Set 14 or 114 in Pr.190 or Pr.192. 3

output

indication of the parameter unit is


forward rotation (FWD) and "OFF" when

Set 16 or 116 in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192. 3

reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).


Turns on during PID control.

Set 47 or 147 in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192. 3

Common terminal for open collector


output terminal

When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes dancer control valid.

The shaded area indicates the parameter initial value.

When 100 or larger value is set in any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection), the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to page 114 for details)

NOTE
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr.190, Pr.192 may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 145 for setting)
Turn off PID output suspension function (Pr. 575 = "9999") while using Dancer control.
When Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 is not available for main speed command. Terminal 2 is
used as PTC thermistor input terminal.

218

Special operation and frequency control


Parameter details
Output frequency

(5)

Initial value
50Hz

Gain
Pr. 125

Bias
C2(Pr. 902)
0

Frequency setting signal

100%

When ratio (Pr. 128 = "42, 43") is selected for addition method, PID
control (ratio of main speed) is added to the main speed. The ratio is
determined by the Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency and
C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. The frequency
setting signal is set to 0 to 50Hz in the range between 0 to 100% in the
initial setting. The ratio is (100%) when the main speed is 50Hz and
(50%) when 25Hz.

NOTE
Even when C4 (Pr. 903) is set to other than 100%, the frequency setting signal is considered as 100%.
Even when C3 (Pr. 903) is set to other than 0%, the frequency setting signal is considered as 0%.
When C2 (Pr .902) is set to other than 0Hz, the frequency setting signal is 0% when C2 (Pr. 902) is less than the set
frequency.

Turning X14 signal on/off during operation by assigning X14 signal results in the following operation.
When X14 signal is on: Uses output frequency unchanged as the main speed command and continues operation by
dancer control.
When X14 signal is off: Ends dancer control and continues operation at the set frequency made valid.
Pr. 128 Setting

PID Action

40
41
42
43

Reverse action
Forward action
Reverse action
Forward action

Addition

Set Point

Method

Measured
Value

Fixed
Pr. 133

Terminal 4

Ratio

Main Speed Command


Speed command for each
operation mode

Action of Pr. 129 PID proportional band, Pr. 130 PID integral time, Pr. 131 PID upper limit, Pr. 132 PID lower limit, Pr. 134 PID
differential time is the same as PID control. For the relationship of controlled variable (%) of PID control and frequency, 0%
is equivalent to the set frequency of Pr. 902 and 100% to Pr. 903 .
For the Pr. 133 PID action set point setting, set frequency of Pr. 902 is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 to 100%. When 9999 is
set in Pr. 133, 50% is the set point.

REMARKS
Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency is invalid.

(6)

Output signal
Output terminal assignment during dancer control (PID control) operation
PID signal turns on during dancer control (PID control) or at a stop by PID control (in the status PID operation being
performed inside) (The signal is off during normal operation.)
For the terminal used for PID signal output, assign the function by setting "47 (positive logic) or 147 (negative logic)" in Pr.
190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).

NOTE

(7)

PID monitor function


The PID control set point and measured value can be output to the operation panel monitor display and terminal AM.
For each monitor, set the following value in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection.
Setting

(8)

Monitor Description

Minimum

Terminal AM

Increments

Full Scale

52
53

PID set point


PID measured value

0.1%
0.1%

100%
100%

54

PID deviation

0.1%

Remarks

Value cannot be set in Pr. 158.


Displays 1000 when the PID deviation is 0%.

Priorities of main speed command


The priorities of the main speed speed command source when the speed command source is external are as follows.
JOG signal > multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > temrinal 2
The priorities of the main speed speed command source when "3" is set in Pr. 79.
Multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > set frequency (digital setting by PU, operation panel)
Terminal 4 can not be selected as the main speed speed command even when AU terminal is turned on.
Even when a remote operation function is selected by setting a value other than "0" in Pr. 59, compensation of the remote
setting frequency to the main speed is ignored (changes to 0).

219

4
PARAMETERS

Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make
setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Special operation and frequency control


(9)

Adjustment procedure

Dancer roller position detection signal adjustment


When terminal 4 input is voltage input, 0V is minimum position and 5V(10V) is maximum position. When current is input, 4mA
is minimum position and 20mA is maximum position. (initial value) When 0 to 7V is output from the potentiometer, it is
necessary to calibrate C7 (Pr .905) at 7V.

Upper limit
position

20mA 5V(10V)

4mA

0V
0%

100%

Lower limit
position

Potentiometer, etc.

Feedback value

(Example) Control at a dancer center position using a 0 to 7V potentiometer


1) After changing the current/voltage input switch to "V", set "2" in Pr. 267 to change terminal 4 input to voltage input.
2) Input 0V to across terminal 4 and 5 to calibrate C6 (Pr. 904). (% display displayed at analog calibration is irrelevant to
% of the feed back value.)
3) By inputting 7V to across terminal 4 to 5, calibrate C7(Pr. 905) (% display displayed at analog calibration is irrelevant
to % of the feed back value.)
4) Set 50% in Pr.133.

NOTE
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 145 for setting)

REMARKS
In normal PID control, PID control is stopped when multi-speed operation signal (RH, RM, RL, REX signal) or JOG signal is
input. In dancer control, however, PID control continues handling the signals as the main speed.
During dancer control, Second acceleration/deceleration time of Pr.44 and Pr.45 are the parameters for acceleration/deceleration
time setting to the main speed command source. They do not function as the second function.
When switchover mode is set with "6" in Pr. 79 , dancer control (PID control) is invalid.
Speed command of terminal 4 input from terminal AU is invalid when dancer control is selected.
Acceleration/deceleration of the main speed command is the same operation as when frequency command is increased/
decreased by analog input.
Therefore, SU signal remains on even if the starting signal is turned on/off.(always in the constant speed state)
The DC brake operation starting frequency when turning off the starting signal is not Pr. 10 but a smaller value of either Pr. 13
or 0.5Hz.
The set frequency monitor is always variable as "main speed command+PID control".
The main speed setting frequency accelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 and the output
frequency accelerates/decelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8. Therefore, when the set time of
Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 is longer than Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, the output frequency accelerates/decelerates for the acceleration/deceleration
time set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
For the integral term limit, a smaller value of either the PID manipulated variable (%) value converted from the linear,
interpolated Pr. 1 Maximum frequency with Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 , or 100% is used for limit.
Although the output frequency is limited by the minimum frequency, operation limit of the integral term is not performed.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 88
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 145
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 160
Refer to page 108
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 114
Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level
Refer to page 95
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain

220

Refer to page 148

Special operation and frequency control


4.20.3 Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597)
Traverse operation which varies the amplitude of the frequency in a constant cycle can be performed.
Parameter

Name

Number

592
593
594

595
596
597

Traverse function
selection

Initial

Setting

Value

Range

Maximum amplitude
amount
Amplitude
compensation amount
during deceleration
Amplitude
compensation amount
during acceleration
Amplitude acceleration
time
Amplitude deceleration
time

Description

Traverse function invalid

Traverse function is valid only in the external operation mode

Traverse function is valid independently of operation mode

10%

0 to 25%

Amplitude amount during traverse operation

10%

0 to 50%

10%

0 to 50%

5s

0.1 to 3600s

Acceleration time during traverse operation

5s

0.1 to 3600s

Deceleration time during traverse operation

Compensation amount at the time of amplitude inversion


(acceleration deceleration)
Compensation amount during amplitude inversion operation
(deceleration acceleration)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

When "1" or "2" is set in Pr. 592 Traverse function selection, turning on the traverse operation signal (X37) makes the
traverse function valid.
Set "37" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 Input terminal function selection and assign the X37 signal to the external terminal.
When the X37 signal is not assigned to the input terminal, the traverse function is always valid (X37-ON).

Traverse operation

f2

Pr.7

f1
f0
f1

f3

Pr.7

STF(STR)
signal
X37 signal

t2(Pr.597) t1(Pr.596)

ON
ON

Pr.8

f0: set frequency


f1: amplitude amount from the set
frequency
(f0 Pr. 593/100)
f2: compensation amount at transition from
acceleration to deceleration
(f1 Pr. 594/100)
f3: compensation amount at transition from
deceleration to acceleration
(f1 Pr. 595/100)
t1: time from acceleration during traverse
operation (Time from (f0 f1) to (f0 + f1)
Time(s)
(Pr. 596)
t2: time from deceleration during traverse
operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 f1)
(Pr. 597)

1) When the starting command (STF or STR) is switched on, the output frequency accelerates to the set frequency f0
according to the normal Pr. 7 Acceleration time.
2) When the output frequency reaches f0, traverse operation can be started by switching the X37 signal on, then the
frequency accelerates to f0 + f1. (The acceleration time at this time depends on the Pr. 596 setting.)
3) After having accelerated to f0 + f1, compensation of f2 (f1 Pr. 594) is made and the frequency decreases to f0-f1.
(The deceleration time at this time depends on the Pr. 597 setting.)
4) After having decelerated to f0 f1, compensation of f3 (f1 Pr. 595) is made and the frequency again accelerates to
f0 + f1.
5) If the X37 signal is turned off during traverse operation, the frequency accelerates/decelerates to f0 according to the
normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8). If the start command (STF or STR) is turned off during traverse
operation, the frequency decelerates to a stop according to the normal deceleration time (Pr. 8).

221

4
PARAMETERS

Output frequency(Hz)

Special operation and frequency control


REMARKS
When the second function signal (RT) is on, normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8) is the same as second
acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
Output frequency(Hz)
f0 is rewritten at this point.
Reflected on the action
at this point

f1
f0

f1

597) are changed, pattern operation is performed at changed f0 after


the output frequency reached f0 before change.

f0

f1

If the set frequency (f0) and traverse operation parameters (Pr. 593 to Pr.

f1
Time(s)

Output frequency(Hz)

When the output frequency exceeds Pr. 1 Maximum frequency or Pr. 2

Clamped by Pr.1

Pr.1

f1

f0
Pr.2

Minimum frequency, the output frequency is clamped at maximum/


minimum frequency while the set pattern exceeds the maximum/

f1

Clamped by Pr.2

minimum frequency.

Time(s)
Output frequency(Hz)
S-pattern acceleration
f0

S-pattern
deceleration

f1

When the traverse function and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.


29 0) are selected, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration is performed
only in the areas where operation is performed in normal Acceleration

f1

and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8). For acceleration/deceleration during


STF(STR)
signal

Time(s)

traverse operation, linear acceleration/deceleration is made.

ON

RH signal ON
Output frequency(Hz)
Stall prevention operation

When stall prevention is activated during traverse operation, traverse


operation is stopped and normal operation is performed. When stall

f1

prevention operation ends, the motor accelerates/decelerates to f0 in

f0
f1

normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8). After the output

Decelerate as
set in Pr. 8

frequency reaches f0, traverse operation is again performed.

Accelerate as set in Pr. 7

Stall prevention operation

Time(s)

NOTE
When the value of amplitude inversion compensation amount (Pr. 594, Pr. 595) is too large, pattern operation as set is
not performed due to overvoltage shut-off and stall prevention.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency
Refer to page 90
Pr. 7 Acceleration time
Refer to page 91
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Refer to page 107
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 132

222

Special operation and frequency control


4.20.4 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886)
This function detects a regeneration status and increases the frequency to avoid the regenerative status.
Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the frequency and continue operation if the fan happens
to rotate faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Regeneration
avoidance operation
selection

882

class

Regeneration
avoidance
compensation
frequency limit value
Regeneration
avoidance voltage
gain
Regeneration
avoidance frequency
gain

885

886

665

Regeneration avoidance function invalid

Regeneration avoidance function is always valid


Regeneration avoidance function is valid only during a constant

Regeneration
class
avoidance operation
400V
level

speed operation

400
VDC
780

Bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance operates. When


300 to 800V

the bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt
to occur. However, the actual deceleration time increases.
The set value must be higher than the "power supply voltage

VDC
0 to 10Hz

6Hz
9999

100%

Description

Range

200V

883

Setting

2 ".

Limit value of frequency which rises at activation of regeneration


avoidance function.
Frequency limit invalid

0 to 200%

Responsiveness at activation of regeneration avoidance.


A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage
change. However, the output frequency could become unstable.

100%

0 to 200%

When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting,


set a smaller value in Pr. 665.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

What is regeneration avoidance function? (Pr. 882, Pr. 883)


When the regeneration load is large, the DC bus voltage rises and an overvoltage fault (E. OV ) may occur.
When this bus voltage rise is detected and the bus voltage level reaches or exceeds Pr. 883, increasing the frequency
avoids the regeneration status.
The regeneration avoidance function is always on when "1" is set in Pr. 882 and activated only during a constant speed
when "2" is set in Pr. 882.

During regeneration
avoidance function operation

Time

Pr. 883

4
Time

During regeneration avoidance


function operation

PARAMETERS

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Time

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Bus voltage
(VDC)

Pr. 883

Bus voltage
(VDC)

Regeneration avoidance operation example


for constant speed

Regeneration avoidance operation example


for acceleration

Time

Output
frequency Bus voltage
(VDC)
(Hz)

Regeneration avoidance
operation example for deceleration
Pr. 883

Time

During regeneration
avoidance function operation

Time

223

Special operation and frequency control


REMARKS
The accel/decel ramp while the regeneration avoidance function is operating changes depending on the regeneration load.

2 times as input voltage.

The DC bus voltage of the inverter is about

When the input voltage is 220VAC, bus voltage is approximately 311VDC.


When the input voltage is 440VAC, bus voltage is approximately 622VDC.
However, it varies with the input power supply waveform.
The Pr. 883 setting should be kept higher than the DC bus voltage level. Otherwise, the regeneration avoidance function is
always on even in the non-regeneration status and the frequency increases.
While overvoltage stall (

) is activated only during deceleration and stops the output frequency, the regeneration avoidance

function is always on (Pr. 882 = 1) or activated only during a constant speed (Pr. 882 = 2) and increases the frequency according
to the regeneration amount.

Output frequency (Hz)

(2)

Pr. 885

Limit level
Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 885/2
Time

(3)

Limit regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr. 885)

You can limit the output frequency compensated for (increased) by the
regeneration avoidance function.
The frequency is limited to the output frequency (frequency prior to
regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance
compensation frequency limit value during acceleration or constant speed.
If the regeneration avoidance frequency exceeds the limit value during
deceleration, the limit value is held until the output frequency falls to 1/2
of Pr. 885.
When the frequency increased by regeneration avoidance function has
reached Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, it is limited to the maximum frequency.
When Pr. 885 is set to "9999", regeneration avoidance function operation
frequency setting is invalid.

Regeneration avoidance function adjustment (Pr. 665, Pr. 886)


If the frequency becomes instable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886 Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain. Reversely, if sudden regeneration causes an overvoltage alarm, increase the setting.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665 Regeneration avoidance
frequency gain.

NOTE
When regeneration avoidance operation is performed,

(overvoltage stall) is displayed and the OL signal is

output.
When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, stall prevention is also activated at the same time.
The regeneration avoidance function cannot shorten the actual deceleration time taken to stop the motor. The actual
deceleration time depends on the regeneration energy consumption capability. When shortening the deceleration
time, consider using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, FR-CV, FR-HC) and brake resistor (MRS type and FR-ABR etc.,) to
consume regeneration energy at constant speed.
When using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, FR-CV, FR-HC) and brake resistor (MRS type and FR-ABR etc., ), set Pr.
882 to "0 (initial value)" (regeneration avoidance function invalid). When using the regeneration unit, etc. to consume
regeneration energy at deceleration, set Pr. 882 to "2" (regeneration avoidance function valid only at a constant
speed).
When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, the OL signal output item of Pr. 156 also becomes the target of
(overvoltage stall). Pr. 157 OL signal output timer also becomes the target of

Parameters referred to
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency
Refer to page 78
Pr. 8 Deceleration time
Refer to page 91
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level
Refer to page 74

224

(overvoltage stall).

Useful functions

4.21 Useful functions


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Increase cooling fan life

To determine the maintenance time


of parts.

Freely available parameter

Cooling fan operation


selection
Inverter part life display
Maintenance output
function
Current average value
monitor signal
Free parameter

Refer to Page

Pr. 244

225

Pr. 255 to Pr. 259

226

Pr. 503, Pr. 504

230

Pr. 555 to Pr. 557

231

Pr. 888, Pr. 889

233

4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)


You can control the operation of the cooling fan (FR-D740-036 or more, FR-D720S-070 or more) built in the inverter.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description
Operates in power-on status.

Cooling fan on/off control invalid (the


cooling fan is always on at power on)

244

Cooling fan operation


selection

Cooling fan on/off control valid

The fan is always on while the inverter is


1

running. During a stop, the inverter status


is monitored and the fan switches on-off
according to the temperature.

The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault
(FAN) and alarm (LF) signals are output.
Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
Pr. 244 = "1"
When the inverter is running and the fan stops during fan ON command.
For the terminal used for FAN signal output, set "25 (positive logic) or 125 (negative logic)" to Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection), and for the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)".

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.

Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

PARAMETERS

Parameters referred to
Refer to page 114

225

Useful functions
4.21.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit can
be diagnosed by monitor.
When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life except the main circuit capacitor is calculated
theoretically.)
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (4) is
not performed.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting

Description

Range

Displays whether the control circuit capacitor,

255

Life alarm status display

(0 to 15)

main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts


of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the
life alarm output level or not. (Reading only)

256

257

Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush

Inrush current limit circuit


life display

100%

Control circuit capacitor life


display

100%

(0 to 100%)

current limit circuit.


(Reading only)
Displays the deterioration degree of the control

(0 to 100%)

circuit capacitor.
(Reading only)
Displays the deterioration degree of the control

258

Main circuit capacitor life


display

100%

(0 to 100%)

circuit capacitor.
(Reading only)
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
Setting "1" and turning the power supply off starts

259

Main circuit capacitor life


measuring

0, 1
(2, 3, 8, 9)

the measurement of the main circuit capacitor life.


When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after powering on
again, the measuring is completed.
Writes deterioration degree in Pr. 258.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

226

Useful functions
(1)

Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr. 255)

Whether any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit has reached
the life alarm output level or not can be checked by Pr. 255 Life alarm status display and life alarm signal (Y90).
bit 15
7
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Pr. 255 read

Pr. 255 setting read

bit0 Control circuit capacitor life


bit1 Main circuit capacitor life
bit2 Cooling fan life

Bit image is displayed


in decimal

bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life

Pr. 255
(decimal)

Bit
(binary)

15

1111

14

1110

13

1101

Inrush Current
Suppression
Circuit Life

Cooling
Fan Life

Main Circuit
Capacitor Life

Control Circuit
Capacitor Life

12

1100

11

1011

10

1010

1001

1000

0111

0110

0101

0100

0011

0010

0001

0000

: With warnings, : Without warnings

The life alarm signal (Y90) turns on when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush
current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) to Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output
terminal function selection).

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Inrush current limit circuit life display (Pr. 256)


The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr. 256 .
The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (1 million times)
every 1%/10,000 times.
As soon as 10% (900,000 times) is reached, Pr. 255 bit 3 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.

(3)

Control circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 257)


The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 257 as a life.
In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature, and is
counted down from 100%.
As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10%, Pr. 255 bit 0 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90
signal.

227

4
PARAMETERS

(2)

Useful functions
(4)

Main circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 258, Pr. 259)


The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 258 as a life.
On the assumption that the main circuit capacitor capacitance at factory shipment is 100%, the capacitor life is displayed
in Pr. 258 every time measurement is made.
When the measured value falls to or below 85%, Pr. 255 bit 1 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the capacitor
capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259.
3) Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is
off.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is off, power on again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, read Pr. 258, and check the deterioration degree of the main
circuit capacitor.
Pr. 259

Description

No measurement

Measurement start

2
3
8
9

During measurement
Measurement complete
Forced end
Measurement error

Remarks

Initial value
Measurement starts when the
power supply is switched off.
Only displayed and cannot be
set

REMARKS
When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 ="9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1"). Therefore, do not measure in such case.
In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is confirmed under the following conditions, normal
measurement can not be done.
(a) FR-HC or FR-CV is connected.
(b) DC power supply is connected to the terminal + and -.
(c) The power supply switched on during measurement.
(d) The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e) The motor is running (coasting)
(f) The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g) The inverter is tripped or a fault occurred when power is off.
(h) The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i) The start command is given while measuring.
(j) The parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected.
(k) Use terminal PC as power supply.
(l) I/O terminal of the control terminal block is on (continuity).
Turning the power on during measuring before LED of the operation panel turns off, it may remain in "measuring" (Pr. 259 = "2")
status. In such case, carry out operation from step 2.

POINT
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3 hrs passed since the turn
off of the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.

WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC
voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering
off to prevent an electric shock.

228

Useful functions
Cooling fan life display
The cooling fan speed of 50% or less is detected and "FN" is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07). As an alarm display, Pr. 255 bit2 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.

REMARKS
When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, the life of even one cooling fan is diagnosed.

NOTE
For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

4
PARAMETERS

(5)

229

Useful functions
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)
When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer output
signal (Y95) is output.

(MT) is displayed on the operation panel.

This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description
Displays the cumulative energization time
of the inverter in 100h increments.

503

Maintenance timer

0 (1 to 9998)

(Reading only)
Writing the setting of "0" clears the
cumulative energization time.

504

Maintenance timer alarm


output set time

9999

0 to 9998
9999

Time taken until when the maintenance


timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
No function

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

First power

ON

9998
(999800h)

Set "0" in Pr. 503

Maintenance
timer
Pr. 504
(Pr. 503)

Time
Y95 signal
MT display

OFF

ON

ON

The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the EEPROM every hour and is displayed in Pr. 503
Maintenance timer in 100h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).
When the Pr. 503 value reaches the time set to Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time (100h increments), the
maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
For the termial used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95" (positive logic) or "195" (negative logic) to
Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection).

NOTE
The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. The energization time of less than 1h is not counted.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)

230

Refer to page 114

Useful functions
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
The average value of the output current during
constant speed operation and the maintenance timer
value are output as a pulse to the current average
value monitor signal (Y93).
The pulse width output to the I/O module of the
programmable controller or the like can be used as a
guideline due to abrasion of machines and elongation
of belt and for aged deterioration of devices to know
the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is
output as pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly
output during constant speed operation.
Parameter
Number

Name

Programmable controller
Output unit

Inverter

Maintenance
time

Parts have
reached their life

Initial Value

Setting Range

555

Current average time

1s

0.1 to 1.0s

556

Data output mask time


Current average value
monitor signal output
reference current

0s

0.0 to 20.0s

Rated
inverter
current

0 to 500A

557

Input unit

Description
Time taken to average the current during start pulse
output (1s).
Time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data.
Reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the
current average value.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

From acceleration to constant speed operation


Output frequency

Time
1 cycle (20s)

Next cycle

Y93 signal
1) Data output mask time
When the speed has changed to
constant from acceleration/deceleration,
Y93 signal is not output for Pr. 556 time.

5) End pulse
Output as low pulse
shape for 1 to 16.5s
4) Maintenance timer pulse
The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is
output as Hi pulse shape for 2 to 9s
(16000h to 72000h)
Pr. 503 100h
5s
Signal output time =
40000h

3) Output current average value pulse


The averaged current value is output for 0.5 to 9s
(10 to 180%) during start bit output.
Output current average value (A)
Signal output time =
Pr. 557 (A)

5s

The pulse output of the current average value monitor signal (Y93) is shown above.
For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93" (positive logic) or "193" (negative logic)
to Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection. The function can not be assigned to Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function selection.
1) Setting of Pr. 556 Data output mask time
The output current is unstable (transient state) right after the operation is changed from the acceleration/deceleration state
to the constant speed operation. Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data in Pr. 556.
2) Setting of Pr. 555 Current average time
The average output current is calculated during Hi output of start pulse (1s). Set the time taken to average the current
during start bit output in Pr. 555.

231

PARAMETERS

2) Start pulse
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed)
Output current set in Pr. 555 time is averaged

Useful functions
3) Setting of Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value. Obtain the time to output the signal from
the following calculation.

4) Setting of Pr. 503 Maintenance timer


After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape, the
maintenance timer value is output as high pulse shape. The output time of the
maintenance timer value is obtained from the following calculation.
Pr. 503 100
40000h

5s (Maintenance timer value 100%/5s)

Note that the output time range is 2 to 9s, and it is 2s when the Pr. 503 setting is
less than 16000h and 9s when exceeds 72000h.

(s)
9
0.5
10

180

(%)

Output current average value

Signal output time

Note that the output time range is 0.5 to 9s and the output time is either of the
following values when the output current average value is the corresponding
percentage of the Pr. 557 setting.
Less than 10% ... 0.5s, more than 180% ... 9s
Example) when Pr. 557 = 10A and the average value of output current is 15A
As 15A/10A x 5s=7.5, the current average value monitor signal is
output as low pulse shape for 7.5s.

Signal output time

Output current average value


5s (Output current average value 100%/5s)
Pr. 557 setting

(s)
9
2
16000
72000 (h)
Maintenance timer value

REMARKS
Mask of data output and sampling of output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration.
When the speed is changed to acceleration/deceleration from constant speed during start pulse output, the data is judged as
invalid, the start pulse is output as high pulse shape for 3.5s, and the end signal is output as low pulse shape for 16.5s.
The signal is output for at least 1 cycle even when acceleration/deceleration state continues after the start pulse output is
completed.

Output frequency

The speed is changed to deceleration


from the constant speed during start pulse output

Time
Previous cycle

Invalid cycle (20s)

Next cycle

Y93 signal
2) Start pulse
Output as high pulse shape for 3.5s

5) End pulse
Output as low pulse shape for 16.5s

When the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0A on completion of the 1 cycle signal output, the signal is not
output until the speed becomes constant next time
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as low pulse shape for 20s (without data output) under the following condition.
(a) When the motor is in the acceleration/deceleration state on completion of the 1 cycle signal output
(b) When 1-cycle signal output was ended during restart operation with the setting of automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure (Pr. 57 "9999")
(c) When restart operation was being performed at the point of data output mask end with the setting of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57 "9999")

NOTE
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time

Refer to page 131

Pr. 190, Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection)


Pr. 503 Maintenance timer

232

Refer to page 230

Refer to page 114

Useful functions
4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889)
You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:
As a unit number when multiple units are used.
As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description

888

Free parameter 1

9999

0 to 9999

Any values can be set. Data is held even

889

Free parameter 2

9999

0 to 9999

if the inverter power is turned off.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr.77 Parameter write
selection.

REMARKS
Pr. 888 and Pr. 889 do not influence the inverter operation.

PARAMETERS

233

Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel

4.22 Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel


Purpose

Parameter that should be Set

Selection of rotation direction by


of the operation panel
Switch the display language of the
parameter unit
Use the setting dial of the operation
panel like a potentiometer for
frequency setting.
Key lock of operation panel
Change the magnitude of change of
frequency setting by the setting dial
of the operation panel
Control of the parameter unit buzzer
Adjust LCD contrast of the
parameter unit

Refer to Page

RUN key rotation


direction selection

Pr. 40

234

PU display language
selection

Pr. 145

234

Operation panel
operation selection

Pr. 161

235

Magnitude of frequency
change setting

Pr. 295

237

PU buzzer control

Pr. 990

238

PU contrast adjustment

Pr. 991

238

4.22.1 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40)


Used to choose the direction of rotation by operating
Parameter
Number

40

Name

RUN key rotation direction


selection

Initial Value
0

of the operation panel.

Setting Range

Description

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

4.22.2 PU display language selection(Pr.145)


You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to another.
Parameter
Number

145

Name

PU display language
selection

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description
Japanese

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

234

English
German
French
Spanish
Italian
Swedish
Finnish

Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel


4.22.3 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161)
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for setting like a potentiometer.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Parameter

Name

Number

161

Initial Value

Frequency setting/key lock


operation selection

Setting

Description

Range
0

Setting dial frequency


setting mode

Setting dial
potentiometer mode

10

Setting dial frequency


setting mode

11

Setting dial
potentiometer mode

Key lock mode invalid

Key lock mode valid

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Using the setting dial like a potentiometer to set the frequency.

Operation example Changing the frequency from 0Hz to 50Hz during operation

Operation
1. Screen at powering on

Display

The monitor display appears.

2. Press

to choose the PU operation mode.

3. Press

to choose the parameter setting

PU indication is lit.

PRM indication is lit.

mode.
(The parameter number read previously
appears.)

4. Turn

until

5. Press

to read the currently set value.

"

(Pr. 160) appears.

"(initial value) appears.

6. Turn

to change it to the set value "

7. Press

to set.

".

Flicker Parameter setting complete!!

8. Change Pr. 161 to the setting value of "

"

PARAMETERS

in the similar manner. (Refer to step 4 to 7.)

Flicker Parameter setting complete!!

9. Mode/monitor check
Press

twice to choose the monitor/

frequency monitor.

10.Press
11.Turn

to start the inverter.

until "

" appears.

The frequency flickers for about 5s.

The flickering frequency is the set frequency.


You need not press

235

Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel


REMARKS
If the display changes from flickering "50.00" to "0.00", the setting of Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection may not
be "1".
Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning the dial.
When the frequency is changed, it will be stored in EEPROM as the set frequency after 10s.

(2)

Disable the setting dial and key operation of the operation panel (Press [MODE] long (2s))
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change, and
unexpected start or frequency setting.
Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press

for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.

When the setting dial and key operation is made invalid,


dial and key operation is invalid,

appears on the operation panel. When the setting

appears if the setting dial or key operation is performed. (When the setting

dial or key operation is not performed for 2s, the monitor display appears.)
To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press

for 2s.

REMARKS
Even if the setting dial and key operation are disabled, the monitor display and

NOTE
Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.

236

are valid.

Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel


4.22.4 Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)
When setting the set frequency with the setting dial, frequency changes in 0.01Hz increments in the initial status.
Setting this parameter increases the magnitude of frequency which changes according to the rotated amount of the
setting dial, improving operability.
Parameter

Name

Number

Initial Value

Setting
0

295

Magnitude of frequency
change setting

0.01
0

Description

Range

0.10
1.00
10.00

Function invalid
The minimum varying width when the set
frequency is changed by the setting dial can
be set.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)

(1)

Basic operation

When a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 295, the minimum varying width when the set frequency is changed by the setting dial
can be set.
For example, when "1.00Hz" is set in Pr. 295, one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in
increments of 1.00Hz2.00Hz3.00Hz.
When Pr. 295 = "1"

1 click

1 click

1 click

*One rotation of the setting dial equals to 24 clicks (24 dial gauses).

REMARKS
When machine speed display is selected with Pr. 37, the minimum increments of the magnitude of change is determined by
Pr.295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ as speed setting changes the set machine speed and converts it to the
speed dislay again.
When the set frequency (speed) is 100 or more, frequency is displayed in 0.1 increments. Therefore, the minimum varying
width is 0.1 even when Pr. 295 < 0.1.
When the machine speed setting is 1000 or more, frequency is displayed in 1 increments. Therefore, the minimum varying
width is 1 even when Pr. 295 < 1.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only in the set frequency mode. When other frequency-related parameters are set, it is not
activated.
When 10 is set, frequency setting changes in 10Hz increments. Note the excess speed. (in potentiometer mode)

237

PARAMETERS

For Pr. 295 , unit is not displayed .

Setting from the parameter unit and operation panel


4.22.5 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press the key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Parameter
Number

990

Name

Initial Value

PU buzzer control

Setting Range

Description

Without buzzer

With buzzer

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 157)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

4.22.6 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991)


Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

58

0 to 63

Description
0: Light

991

PU contrast adjustment

63: Dark

The above parameter is displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit FR-PU04/FR-PU07 is connected.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

238

Parameter clear/ All parameter clear

4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear


POINT
Set "1" in Pr.CL Parameter clear, ALLC all parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77Parameter write selection.)
Refer to the extended parameter list on page 52 for parameters cleared with this operation.

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

to choose the PU operation mode.

3. Press

to choose the parameter setting

PU indication is lit.

PRM indication is lit.

mode.
(The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Turn

until

Parameter clear

) appears.

All parameter clear

5. Press
"

to read the currently set value.

"(initial value) appears.

6. Turn

to change it to the set value "

7. Press

".
Parameter clear

to set.

All parameter clear

Flicker Parameter setting complete!!


Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to show the setting again.

Press

twice to show the next parameter.

Description

PARAMETERS

Setting

Not executed.
Return parameters to the initial values. (Parameter clear returns all parameters except calibration

parameters, terminal function selection parameters to the initial values. Refer to the parameter list on
page 52 for availability of parameter clear and all parameter clear.

REMARKS
and

are displayed alternately ... Why?

The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.


Is PU connector used?
1. Press

. [PU] is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "1". (When Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value))

2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.

239

Initial value change list

4.24 Initial value change list


Displays and sets the parameters changed from the initial value.

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering on
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

to choose the PU operation mode.

3. Press

to choose the parameter setting

PU indication is lit.

PRM indication is lit.

mode.
(The parameter number read previously
appears.)

4. Turn
5. Pressing

until

appears.
* It may take several seconds

changes to the initial value

for creating the initial value

change list screen.

change

list.

"

"

flickers while creating the list.

6. Turning

displays the parameter number

changed.
Press

Turn

to read the currently set value.

and press

to change the

setting
(refer to step 6 and 7 on page 51)
Turn

Flicker Parameter setting complete!!

to read another parameter.

The display returns to

after all

parameters are displayed.

7. Pressing

in

status returns to

the parameter setting mode.


Turning

sets other parameters.

Pressing

displays the change list again.

NOTE
Calibration parameters (C1 (Pr. 901) to C7 (Pr. 905)) are not displayed even they are changed from the initial settings.
Only simple mode parameter is displayed when simple mode is set (Pr. 160 = "9999" (initial value))
Pr. 160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
When parameter setting is changed after creating the initial value change list, the setting will be reflected to the initial
value change list next time.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 160 Extended function display selection
Refer to page 157
C1 (Pr. 901) AM terminal calibration
Refer to page 129
C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905) (Frequency setting bias/gain parameter)

240

Refer to page 148

Check and clear of the faults history

4.25 Check and clear of the faults history


Check for the faults history

Monitor/frequency setting
[Operation panel is
used for operation]

Parameter setting
[Parameter setting change]

Faults history
[Operation for displaying the faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists,

i is displayed.

Output frequency

Output current
Hz
A

Flickering

Flickering

Energization time

Output voltage

Flickering

Flickering

Flickering

Faults history number


(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Press the
setting dial.
Flickering
Press the
setting dial.

4
Flickering
Press the
setting dial.

PARAMETERS

(1)

241

Check and clear of the faults history


(2)

Clearing procedure
POINT
Set "1" in Er.CL Fault history clear to clear the faults history. Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77
Parameter write selection.

Operation
1. Screen at powering on

Display

The monitor display appears.

2. Press

PRM indication is lit.

to choose the parameter setting mode.

(The parameter number read previously


appears.)

3. Turn

until

(faults history clear)

appears.

4. Press

to read the currently set value. "

" (initial

value) appears.

5. Turn

to change it to the set value "

6. Press

to set.

".

Flicker...Faults history clear complete!!


Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to show the setting again.

Press

twice to show the next parameter.

Parameters referred to
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection

242

Refer to page 156

TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter provides the "TROUBLESHOOTING" of this


product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

Reset method of protective function .........................................


List of fault or alarm indications ................................................
Causes and corrective actions ...................................................
Correspondences between digital and actual characters .......
Check first when you have some troubles ................................

244
245
246
254
255

7
243

Reset method of protective function


When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following fault or
alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales
representative.
Retention of fault output signal...When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is opened
when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be lost and the fault output will not be
held.
Fault or alarm indication ..........When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically switches to the fault
or alarm indication.
Resetting method ....................When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset, therefore, the inverter
cannot restart. (Refer to page 244)
When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly divided as below.
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04 /FR-PU07)
is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warnings
The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a
fault.
(3) Alarm
The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.

5.1

Reset method of protective function

(1) Resetting the inverter


The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value of the
electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.
Operation 1: ...... Using the operation panel, press

to reset the inverter.

(This may only be performed when a fault occurs (Refer to page 249 for
fault.))

Operation 2: ....... Switch power off once, then switch it on again.


ON

OFF

Operation 3: . ..... Turn on the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal
is kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a
reset status.)

Inverter
RES
PC

244

List of fault or alarm indications

List of fault or alarm indications


Refer

Operation Panel

Name

Indication

Indication

to
Page

Faults history

241

E.ILF

Input phase loss

251

HOLD

Operation panel lock

246

E.OLT

Stall prevention

251

LOCd

Password locked

246

E. BE

Brake transistor alarm


detection

251

Parameter write error

246

E.GF

Output side earth (ground)


fault overcurrent at start

252

Err.

Inverter reset

247

E.LF

Output phase loss

252

OL

Stall prevention
(overcurrent)

247

E.OHT

External thermal relay


operation

252

Stall prevention
(overvoltage)

E.PTC

PTC thermistor operation

252

oL

247

E.PE

248

Parameter storage device


fault

252

RB

Regenerative brake
prealarm

E.PUE

PU disconnection

253

TH

Electronic thermal relay


function prealarm

248

E.RET

Retry count excess

253

PS

PU stop

248

E.CPU

CPU fault

253

MT

Maintenance signal output

248

E.CDO

253

UV

Undervoltage

248

Output current detection


value exceeded

E.IOH

Inrush current limit circuit


fault

253

E.AIE

Analog input fault

253

Er1 to 4

FN

Fan fault

249

E.OC1

Overcurrent trip during


acceleration

249

E.OC2

Overcurrent trip during


constant speed

249

E.OC3

Overcurrent trip during


deceleration or stop

249

E.OV1

Regenerative overvoltage
trip during acceleration

250

E.OV2

Regenerative overvoltage
trip during constant speed

250

E.OV3

Regenerative overvoltage
trip during deceleration or
stop

250

E.THT

Inverter overload trip


(electronic thermal relay
function)

250

E.THM

Motor overload
trip(electronic thermal
relay function)

251

E.FIN

Fin overheat

251

If a fault occurs when using with the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on the
FR-PU04.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Error message
Warnings
Alarm
Fault

to

Name

Page
E---

to

Refer

Operation Panel

Fault

5.2

245

Causes and corrective actions

5.3

Causes and corrective actions

(1) Error message


A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shutoff.
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

HOLD
Operation panel lock
Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than

Check point

--------------

Corrective action Press


Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

is made invalid. (Refer to page 236)

for 2s to release lock.

LOCd
Password locked
Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.
-------------Enter the password in Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating. (Refer to page
158)

Er1
Write disable error
1. You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable parameter
write.
2. Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
3. The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.
1. Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. (Refer to page 156).

Check point

2. Check the settings of Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 79)
3. Check the connection of the PU and inverter.

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

246

Er2
Write error during operation
When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled independently
of operation status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is on.
1. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 156).
2. Check that the inverter is not operating.
1. Set "2" in Pr. 77.
2. After stopping operation, make parameter setting.

Er3
Calibration error
Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page 148).

Er4
Mode designation error
You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not 2.
1. Check that operation mode is PU operation mode.
2. Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 156).
1. After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 160)
2. After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.

Causes and corrective actions


Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

Err.
Inverter reset
Executing reset using RES signal, or reset command from communication or PU
Displays at powering off.
Turn off the reset command

Corrective action

(2) Warnings
When a warning occurs, the output is not shut off.
Operation panel

Description

OL

constantspeed

During
deceleration

Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name

FR-PU07

OL

Stall prevention (overcurrent)


When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall
During
prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current
acceleration decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency again.
During
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall

operation

Check point

FR-PU04

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

prevention operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current decreases to
prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has reduced below
stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall
prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current
decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function decreases the frequency again.

Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate
Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting 1% by 1% and check the motor status. (Refer to page 69)
Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 91)
Reduce the load weight.
Try general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting.
Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is 150%.) The
acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 Stall prevention
operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection. (Operation at OL
occurrence can be selected using Pr. 156.)

oL

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

oL

Stall prevention (overvoltage)


If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive to exceed the regenerative energy
consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent overvoltage trip.

Description

During

As soon as the regenerative energy has reduced, deceleration resumes.

deceleration

If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration avoidance function

TROUBLESHOOTING

indication
Name

is selected (Pr. 882 =1), this function increases the speed to prevent overvoltage trip.

Check point

(Refer to page 223).


Check for sudden speed reduction.

Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used. (Refer to page 223).

Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.

247

Causes and corrective actions


Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

FR-PU04

PS

PS

FR-PU07

PU stop
Stop with

of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr. 75 refer to

page 153 .)

Check point

Check for a stop made by pressing

of the operation panel.

Corrective action Turn the start signal off and release with
Operation panel
indication
Name

RB

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

RB

Regenerative brake prealarm


Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty value.
When the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial value (Pr. 70 = "0"), this warning does not occur. If

Description

the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP signal output,
assign the function by setting "7 (positive logic) or 107 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function

Check point
Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name

selection). (Refer to page 114).


1. Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
2. Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty settings are correct.
1. Increase the deceleration time.
2. Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty settings.

TH

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

TH

Electronic thermal relay function prealarm


Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level. If
it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E. THM) occurs.

Description

The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for THP signal output,
assign the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function

Check point
Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

selection). (Refer to page 114).


1. Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
2. Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 95)
1. Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
2. Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 95)

MT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

MT

Maintenance signal output


Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"), this warning
does not occur.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time setting. (Refer to
page 230).

Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erases the signal.
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

UV

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In addition,
the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage
decreases below about 115VAC (230VAC for 400V class), this function stops the inverter output and displays
An alarm is reset when the voltage returns to normal.
Check that the power supply voltage is normal.

Check point
Corrective action Check the power supply system equipment such as power supply.

248

Causes and corrective actions


(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(Set "98" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection). Refer to page 114 ).
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

FN

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

FN

Fan fault
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan,
appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to
an alarm or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check the cooling fan for an alarm.

Check point
Corrective action Check for fan alarm. Please contact your sales representative.

(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

E.OC1

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

OC During Acc

Overcurrent trip during acceleration


When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration, the
protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
1. Check for sudden acceleration.
2. Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.

Check point

3. Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.


4. Check that stall prevention operation is appropriate.
5. Check that regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes larger than the V/F
reference value at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to the high voltage.)
1. Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.
2. When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.

Corrective action

If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.


3. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.
4. Perform stall prevention operation appropriately. (Refer to page 74).
5. Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to page 80)

indication
Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

E.OC2

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Stedy Spd OC

Overcurrent trip during constant speed


When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during constant speed
operation, the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
1. Check for sudden load change.
2. Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
3. Check that stall prevention operation is appropriate.
1. Keep load stable.
2. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.
3. Perform stall prevention operation appropriately. (Refer to page 74).

E.OC3

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

OC During Dec

Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop


When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during
deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
1. Check for sudden speed reduction.
2. Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
3. Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
4. Check that stall prevention operation is appropriate.
1. Increase the deceleration time.
2. Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.
3. Check the mechanical brake operation.
4. Perform stall prevention operation appropriately. (Refer to page 74).

TROUBLESHOOTING

Operation panel

249

Causes and corrective actions


Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

250

E.OV1

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

OV During Acc

Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration


If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value,
the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced
in the power supply system.
1. Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during downward acceleration in vertical lift load)
2. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not lower than the no load current.
1. Decrease the acceleration time.
Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used. (Refer to page 223).
2. Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.

E.OV2

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Stedy Spd OV

Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed


If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage
produced in the power supply system.
1. Check for sudden load change.
2. Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not lower than the no load current.
1. Keep load stable.
Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used. (Refer to page 223).
Use the brake resistor, brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
2. Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.

E.OV3

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

OV During Dec

Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop


If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value,
the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage
produced in the power supply system.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
Longer the brake cycle.
Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886). (Refer to page 223).
Use the brake resistor, brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.

E.THT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Inv. Overload

Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)


If the temperature of the output transistor element exceeds the protection level under the condition that a current not
less than the rated inverter current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur (200% or less), the electronic thermal
relay activates to stop the inverter output. (Overload capacity 150% 60s, 200% 0.5s)
1. Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
2. Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small).
3. Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using machine.
4. Check the motor for use under overload.
5. Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
1. Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
2. Adjust the torque boost setting.
3. Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine.
4. Reduce the load weight.
5. Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.

Causes and corrective actions


Operation panel
indication
Name

Description

Check point

Corrective action

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Motor Ovrload

Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) 1


The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling
capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the integrated value reaches
85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output
when the integrated value reaches the specified value. When running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or
multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the
electronic thermal relay function.
1. Check the motor for use under overload.
2. Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to page 98).
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
1. Reduce the load weight.
2. For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor.
3. Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to page 74).

Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.

Operation panel
indication
Name

Description

Check point

Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

E.FIN

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

H/Sink O/Temp

Fin overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated and the inverter trips.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink overheat protection
operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26 (positive logic) or 126 (negative
logic)" in Pr. 190 or Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 114).
1. Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
2. Check for heatsink clogging.
3. Check that the cooling fan is not stopped (Check that
is not displayed on the operation panel).
1. Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
2. Clean the heatsink.
3. Replace the cooling fan.

E.ILF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Fault 14
Input phase loss

Input phase loss


This fault is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection and one phase
of the three phase power input is lost. (Refer to page 141).
It may function if phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input becomes largely unbalanced.
Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Check that phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input is not largely unbalanced.
Wire the cables properly.
Repair a break portion in the cable.
Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.
Set Pr. 872 = "0" (without input phase loss protection) when three-phase input voltage is largely unbalanced.

Available only for three-phase power input specification model.

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

Check point
Corrective action

E.OLT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Stll Prev STP (OL shown during stall prevention operation)

Stall prevention
If the output frequency has fallen to 1Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears and
trips the inverter. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to page 75).
Reduce the load weight. Check the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level setting.

E.BE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Br. Cct. Fault

Brake transistor alarm detection


When a brake transistor alarm has occurred due to the large regenerative energy from the motor etc., the brake
transistor alarm is detected and the inverter trips.
In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.
Reduce the load inertia.
Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
Check that the brake resistor selected is correct.
Replace the inverter.

251

TROUBLESHOOTING

E.THM

Causes and corrective actions


Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

252

E.GF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Ground Fault

Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start


The inverter trips if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows at start due to an earth (ground) fault that occurred on
the inverter's output side (load side). Whether this protective function is used or not is set with Pr. 249 Earth (ground)
fault detection at start .
Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable.
Remedy the ground fault portion.

E.LF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

E.LF

Output phase loss


This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is
lost. Whether the protective function is used or not is set with Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection.
Check the wiring. (Check that the motor is normal.)
Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
Wire the cables properly.
Check the Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection settting.

E.OHT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

OH Fault

External thermal relay operation


If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the
motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Functions when "7" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection).
This protective function does not function in the initial status (OH signal is not assigned).
Check for motor overheating.
Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection).
Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.

E.PTC

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Fault 14
PTC activated

PTC thermistor operation


Inverter trips when resistance of PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10 is more than the
value set in Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level. This protective function does not function when Pr. 561 setting is
initial value (Pr. 561 = "9999").
Check the connection of the PTC thermistor.
Check the Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level setting.
Check the motor for operation under overload.
Reduce the load weight.

E.PE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Corrupt Memry

Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)


Appears when a fault occurred in the stored parameters. (EEPROM fault)
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable RAM write. Note
that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.

Causes and corrective actions


Operation panel

Description

Check point

Corrective action

E.PUE

Description
Check point
Corrective action

E.RET

Corrective action
Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

E.CPU

Corrective action

E.CDO

Corrective action

FR-PU07

Retry No Over

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

CPU Fault

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Fault 14
OC detect level

Output current detection value exceeded


This function is activated when the output current exceeds the Pr. 150 Output current detection level setting.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr. 166 Output
current detection signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (Refer to page 119)

E.IOH

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Fault 14
Inrush overheat

Inrush current limit circuit fault


This function is activated when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit fault
Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

FR-PU04

CPU fault
Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Please contact your sales representative.

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

PU Leave Out

Retry count excess


If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter.
Functions only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set.
When the initial value (Pr. 67 = "0") is set, this protective function does not function.
Find the cause of fault occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point

FR-PU07

PU disconnection
This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible
number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU communication retries during the RS485 communication with the PU connector (use Pr. 502 Stop mode selection at communication error to change).
This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr. 122 PU
communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
Check that the parameter unit cable is fitted tightly.
Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Check that RS-485 communication data is correct. And check that the settings of communication parameter at
inverter match settings of the computer.
Check that data is transmitted from the computer within a time set in Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.
Connect the parameter unit cable securely.
Check the communication data and communication settings.
Increase the Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval setting. Or set "9999" (no communication check).

Operation panel
indication
Name

FR-PU04

E.AIE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07

Fault 14
Analog in error

TROUBLESHOOTING

indication
Name

Analog input fault


Appears when 30mA or more is input or a voltage (7.5V or more) is input with the terminal 4 set to current input.
Check the setting of Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection and voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 145).
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection, and voltage/current input
switch to voltage input.

NOTE
If protective functions of E.ILF, E.AIE, E.IOH, E.PTC, E.CDO are activated when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is
displayed.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.

253

Correspondences between digital and actual characters

5.4

Correspondences between digital and actual characters

There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on
the operation panel:
Actual

254

Digital

Actual

Digital

Actual

Digital

Check first when you have some troubles

5.5

Check first when you have some troubles


POINT
If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (initial value) then reset the required parameter values and check again.

5.5.1

Motor will not start

1) Check the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting if V/F control is exercised. (Refer to page 69)
2) Check the main circuit.
Check that a proper power supply voltage is applied. (Operation panel display is provided.)
Check that the motor is connected properly.
Check that the jumper across + and P1 is connected.
3) Check the input signals
Check that the start signal is input.
Check that both the forward and reverse rotation start signals are not input simultaneously.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not zero. (When the frequency command is 0Hz and the start
command is entered, RUN LED of the operation panel flickers.)
Check that the AU signal is on when terminal 4 is used for frequency setting.
Check that the output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is not on.
Check that the sink or source jumper connector is fitted securely. (Refer to page 21)
Check that the jumper across S1-SC, S2-SC is connected.
4) Check the parameter settings
Check that Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is not set.
Check that the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is correct.
Check that the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings are correct.
Check that the starting frequency Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is not greater than the running frequency.

Check that the Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is not lower than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value.
Check that the operation location by Pr. 551 is appropriate. (Example: write from the operation panel is disabled
when parameter unit is connected)
(Refer to page 234).
5) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the shaft is not locked.
6) Others
Check that the operation panel display does not show a fault (e.g. E.OC1).

5.5.2

Motor generates abnormal noise

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check that frequency settings of each running frequency (such as multi-speed operation) are not zero. Check
that especially the maximum frequency Pr. 1 Maximum frequency is not zero.

No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are generated.


Soft-PWM control to change the motor tone into an unoffending complex tone is factory-set to valid by Pr. 72
PWM frequency selection.
Adjust Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to change the motor tone.
Check for any mechanical looseness.
Contact the motor manufacturer.

255

Check first when you have some troubles


5.5.3

Motor generates heat abnormally


Is the fan for the motor is running? (Check for dust accumulated.)
Check that the load is not too heavy. Lighten the load.
Are the inverter output voltages (U, V, W) balanced?
Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is correct.
Was the motor type set? Check the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor.
When using any other manufacturer's motor, perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 100.)

5.5.4

Motor rotates in opposite direction


Check that the phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is correct.
Check that the start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are connected properly. (Refer to page 19)
Check that the Pr. 40 RUN key rotation direction selection setting is correct. (Refer to page 234).

5.5.5

Speed greatly differs from the setting


Check that the frequency setting signal is correct. (Measure the input signal level.)
Check that the Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 19, Pr. 245, calibration parameter Pr. 125, Pr. 126, C2 to C7 settings are correct.
Check that the input signal lines are not affected by external noise. (use shielded cables)
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are correct.

5.5.6

Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth


Check that the acceleration and deceleration time settings are not too short.
Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is not too large to activate the stall function under V/F control.

5.5.7

Motor current is large


Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is correct.
Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is correct.
Check that the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting is correct
Check that the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting is correct.

5.5.8

Speed does not increase


Check that the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting is correct. (If you want to run the motor at 120Hz or more, set Pr. 18
High speed maximum frequency. (Refer to page 78).
Check that the load is not too heavy. (In agitators, etc., load may become heavier in winter.)
Check that the torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is not too large to activate the stall function under V/F control.
Check that the brake resistor is not connected to terminals + and P1 or P1-PR accidentally.

256

Check first when you have some troubles


5.5.9

Speed varies during operation


When slip compensation is set, the output frequency varies with load fluctuation between 0 and 2Hz. This is a normal
operation and is not a fault.
1) Inspection of load
Check that the load is not varying.
2) Check the input signals
Check that the frequency setting signal is not varying.
Check that the frequency setting signal is not affected by noise. Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74
Input filter time constant.
Check for a malfunction due to undesirable currents when the transistor output unit is connected. (Refer to page
22)
3) Others
Check that the value of Pr. 80 Motor capacity is correct to the inverter capacity and motor capacity under generalpurpose magnetic flux vector control.
Check that the wiring length is not exceeding 30m when general-purpose magnetic flux vector control is
exercised. Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 100).
Check that the wiring length is not too long for V/F control.
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about 3%) under V/F control.

5.5.10 Operation mode is not changed properly


If the operation mode does not change correctly, check the following:
1) External input signal

Check that the STF or STR signal is off. When it is on, the operation mode cannot be
changed.

2) Parameter setting
Check the Pr. 79 setting.

operation mode at input power-on. At this time, press

on the operation panel (press

when the

parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) to switch to the PU operation mode. For other values (1 to 4, 6, 7),
the operation mode is limited accordingly.
Check that the operation location by Pr. 551 is correct. (Example: write from the operation panel is disabled when
parameter unit is connected)
(Refer to page 234).

5.5.11 Operation panel display is not operating

TROUBLESHOOTING

When the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial value), the inverter is placed in the external

Check that wiring is securely performed and installation is correct.


Make sure that the connector is fitted securely across terminals + and P1.

5.5.12 Parameter write cannot be performed


Make sure that operation is not being performed (signal STF or STR is not ON).
Make sure that you are not attempting to set the parameter in the external operation mode.
Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection.
Check that the operation location by Pr. 551 is correct. (Example: write from the operation panel is disabled when
parameter unit is connected)
(Refer to page 234).

257

MEMO

258

PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

This chapter provides the "PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE


AND INSPECTION" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment

6.1
6.2

Inspection items............................................................................ 260


Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers .. 267

7
259

Inspection items
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any
fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.

Precautions for maintenance and inspection


For some short time after the power is switched off, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the
inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and then make sure that the
voltage across the main circuit terminals + and - of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.

6.1
6.1.1

Inspection items
Daily inspection

Basically, check for the following faults during operation.


(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Abnormal vibration, abnormal noise
(5) Abnormal overheat, discoloration
During operation, check the inverter input voltages using a tester.

6.1.2

Periodic inspection

Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
(1) Check for cooling system fault............Clean the air filter, etc.
(2) Tightening check and retightening......The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes,
etc. Check and tighten them.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque (Refer to page 16).
(3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
(4) Measure insulation resistance.
(5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.

260

Inspection items
Daily and periodic inspection

Area of
Inspection

General

Inspection Item

Corrective Action at Customer's


Alarm Occurrence

Check the surrounding air temperature,


humidity, dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist, etc.

Improve environment

Overall unit

Check for unusual vibration and noise.

Check alarm location and


retighten

Power supply voltage

Check that the main circuit voltages are


normal.1

Inspect the power supply

(1) Check with megger (across main circuit


terminals and earth (ground) terminal).

Contact the manufacturer

(2) Check for loose screws and bolts.

Retighten

(3) Check for overheat traces on the parts.

Contact the manufacturer

(4) Check for stain

Clean

(1) Check conductors for distortion.


(2) Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)

Contact the manufacturer

Conductors, cables

Main circuit Terminal block

Smoothing aluminum
electrolytic capacitor

Relay

Operation check

Cooling
system

Interval
Periodic
Daily
2

Surrounding
environment

General

Overall
Parts check

Control
circuit,
Protective
circuit

Description

Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor

Cooling fan

Heatsink
Indication

Display
Meter

Load motor Operation check

Check

Contact the manufacturer

Check for damage.

Stop the device and


contact the manufacturer.

(1) Check for liquid leakage.

Contact the manufacturer

(2) Check for safety valve projection and


bulge.

Contact the manufacturer

(3) Visual check and judge by the life check


of the main circuit capacitor (Refer to
page 262)
Check that the operation is normal and no
chatter is heard.

Contact the manufacturer

(1) Check that the output voltages across


phases with the inverter operated alone is
balanced

Contact the manufacturer

(2) Check that no fault is found in protective


and display circuits in a sequence
protective operation test.

Contact the manufacturer

(1) Check for unusual odor and


discoloration.

Stop the device and


contact the manufacturer.

(2) Check for serious rust development

Contact the manufacturer

(1) Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor


and deformation trance

Contact the manufacturer

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

6.1.3

(2) Visual check and judge by the life check


of the main circuit capacitor (Refer to
page 262)
(1) Check for unusual vibration and noise.

Replace the fan

(2) Check for loose screws and bolts

Retighten

(3) Check for stain

Clean

(1) Check for clogging

Clean

(2) Check for stain

Clean

(1) Check that display is normal.

Contact the manufacturer

(2) Check for stain

Clean

Check that reading is normal

Stop the device and


contact the manufacturer.

Check for vibration and abnormal increase


in operation noise

Stop the device and


contact the manufacturer.

It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.

One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.

Consult us for periodic inspection.

261

Inspection items
6.1.4

Display of the life of the inverter parts

The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and each parts of the inrush
current limit circuit is near to give an indication of replacement time.
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts

Judgement Level

Main circuit capacitor

85% of the initial capacity

Control circuit capacitor


Inrush current limit circuit
Cooling fan

Estimated remaining life 10%


Estimated remaining life 10%
(Power on: 100,000 times left)
Less than 50% of the predetermined speed

POINT
Refer to page 226 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.

6.1.5

Checking the inverter and converter modules

<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a tester. (Use 100 range.)

<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, + and -, and check for
continuity.

NOTE
1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.

. When there is an instantaneous continuity, due to the


. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to

2. At the time of discontinuity, the measured value is almost


smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate

several tens-of ohms depending on the module type, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost the
same, the modules are without fault.

<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>


Tester Polarity

R/L1

Converter
module

D1

+
S/L2

D2

+
T/L3

D3

Inverter
module

TR1
TR3
TR5

Discontinuity

R/L1 Continuity
+

Discontinuity

S/L2 Continuity
+

Tester Polarity

Measured
Value

Discontinuity

T/L3 Continuity

Discontinuity

Continuity

Discontinuity

Continuity

Discontinuity

Continuity

D4
D5
D6
TR4
TR6
TR2

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

Measured
Value

Converter module

Continuity

D1

Continuity

D2

Continuity

Discontinuity

Continuity

Discontinuity

Continuity

Discontinuity

TR3

TR5

D3

S/L2 Discontinuity R/L1

Continuity
T/L3 Discontinuity S/L2

Inverter module
TR1

R/L1 Discontinuity

V
W

T/L3

D4

D5

D6
TR4

TR6

TR2

(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)


T/L3, D3 and D6 are only for the three-phase power input specification models.

6.1.6

Cleaning

Always run the inverter in a clean status.


When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.

NOTE
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol.
Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.

262

Inspection items
6.1.7

Replacement of parts

The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.


The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
Part Name
Cooling fan
Main circuit smoothing
capacitor
On-board smoothing
capacitor
Relays
1

Standard Replacement

Description

Interval 1
10 years

Replace (as required)

10 years 2

Replace (as required)

10 years

Replace the board (as required)

as required

Replacement years for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)

Output current: 80% of the inverter rated current

NOTE
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.

Cooling fan

The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor
is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the
cooling fan must be replaced immediately.

NOTE
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.

Inverter Type
FR-D740-036 to 080
FR-D720S-070 and 100
FR-D740-120, 160

Fan Type

Units

MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01

MMF-06F24ES-RP1 BKO-CA1638H01

The FR-D740-022 or less, FR-D720S-008 to 042 are not provided with a cooling fan.

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

(1)

263

Inspection items
Removal
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan
cover.
FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-070 and 100

FR-D740-120 or more

2) Disconnect the fan connectors.


3) Remove the fan.
FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-070 and 100
Fan cover

FR-D740-120 or more
Fan cover

Fan connector

Fan

Fan

Fan connector

Example for FR-D740-036

264

Example for FR-D740-160

Inspection items
Reinstallation
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall
the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW"
faces up.

AIR FLOW

<Fan side face>

2) Reconnect the fan connectors.


3) When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan.
FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-070 and 100

FR-D740-120 or more

FR-D740-080 or less
FR-D720S-070 and 100

FR-D740-120 or more

2. Insert hooks until you


hear a click sound.
1. Insert hooks
into holes.

Example for FR-D740-036

1. Insert hooks
into holes.

2. Insert hooks until


you hear a click
sound.

Example for FR-D740-160

NOTE
Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
Switch the power off before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after
power off, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock
accident.

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

4) Reinstall the fan cover.

265

Inspection items
(2)

Smoothing capacitors

A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the
adverse effects of ripple currents, etc. The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and
operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors
about every 10 years.
When a certain period of time has elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every
year (less than six months if the life will be expired soon).
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, liquid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.

POINT
Refer to page 226 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.

(3)

Relays

To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times (switching life).

266

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers

6.2

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers

Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, measurement data
depends on the instruments used and circuits measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits with the instruments
given on the next page.
When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs
may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for
the current rating.
To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the AM-5 terminal
output function of the inverter.
Three-phase 400V power input

Output voltage

Input voltage

Input current

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Output current

Single-phase 200V power input

Inverter
W11

Ar

Three-phase
power supply

R/L1 U

Au

Vr
As
Vs

At
Vt

W21
Vu

W12

S/L2 V

W13

T/L3 W

To the motor

Av
Vv
Aw

W22
Vw

: Electrodynamometer type

V
+

: Moving-iron type

Instrument types

: Moving-coil type
: Rectifier type

At, As, Vt, Vs, W12, W13 are only for the three-phase power input specification models.

Examples of Measuring Points and Instruments

267

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers


Measuring Points and Instruments
Item
Power supply voltage
V1

Measuring Point
R/L1-S/L2
S/L2-T/L3
T/L3-R/L1

Power supply side


current
I1
Power supply side
power
P1

Measuring Instrument
Moving-iron type AC
voltmeter

Remarks (Reference Measured Value)


Commercial power supply
Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation (Refer to
page 274)

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 line

Moving-iron type AC

current

ammeter

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and


R/L1-S/L2,

Electrodynamic type single-

S/L2-T/L3,

phase wattmeter

P1=W11+W12+W13 (3-wattmeter method)

T/L3-R/L1,
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power

Power supply side


power factor

supply side current and power supply side power.


[Three-phase power supply]

[Single-phase power supply]

P1
Pf 1 = ------------------------ 100 %
3V 1 I 1

Pf1

P1
Pf 1 = ---------------- 100 %
V1 I1

Rectifier type AC voltage


Output side voltage
V2

Across U-V, V-W and W-U

meter 1

Difference between the phases is within 1% of the

(moving-iron type cannot

maximum output voltage.

measure)
Output side current
I2

U, V and W line currents

Moving-iron type AC

Difference between the phases is 10% or lower of

ammeter 2

the rated inverter current.

Output side power

U, V, W and

Electrodynamic type single-

P2 = W21 + W22

P2

U-V, V-W

phase wattmeter

2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)

Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.


Output side power
factor
Pf2

P2
Pf 2 = ------------------------ 100 %
3V 2 I 2

Converter output

Across + and -

Frequency setting

Across 2(positive)-5

signal

Across 4(positive)-5

Frequency setting
power supply
Frequency meter
signal
Start signal
Select signal

Across 10(positive)-5
Across AM(positive)-5
STF, STR

Moving-coil type
(such as tester)

Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 V1


0 to 10VDC4 to 20mADC

Moving-coil type
(tester and such may be
used)
(internal resistance 50k or
more)

"5" is

5.2VDC

common.

Approx. 10VDC at maximum


frequency (without frequency meter)
When open

"PC" is

Across RH, RM, RL -

20 to 30VDC

PC (positive)

ON voltage: 1V or less

common.

Continuity check 3
Fault signal

1
2

Across A-C

Moving-coil type

Across B-C

(such as tester)

268

<Fault>
Continuity

Across B-C

Discontinuity

Continuity

Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. An FA tester or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately.
When the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy-current losses produced in metal parts inside the
instrument, leading to burnout. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.

<Normal>
Across A-C Discontinuity

When the setting of Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function selection is positive logic

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers


6.2.1

Measurement of powers

Using an electro-dynamometer type meter, measure the power in both the input and output sides of the inverter using the twoor three-wattmeter method. As the current is liable to be imbalanced especially in the input side, it is recommended to use the
three-wattmeter method.
Examples of process value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below.
An error will be produced by difference between measuring instruments, e.g. power calculation type and two- or threewattmeter type three-phase wattmeter. When a CT is used in the current measuring side or when the meter contains a PT on
the voltage measurement side, an error will also be produced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT.
[Measurement conditions]
Constant-torque (100%) load, note that 60Hz or
more should be constantly output 3.7kW, 4-pole
motor, value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%.

%
120

%
120

100

100

3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)


2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load)
Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type)

80

60

20

40

60

80 100 120Hz

3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)


2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load)
Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type)

80

60

Example of
Measuring Inverter Input Power

6.2.2
(1)

20

40

60

80 100 120Hz

Example of
Measuring Inverter Output Power

Measurement of voltages and use of PT

Inverter input side

As the input side voltage has a sine wave and it is extremely small in distortion, accurate measurement can be made with an
ordinary AC meter.

(2)

Inverter output side

Since the output side voltage has a PWM-controlled rectangular wave, always use a rectifier type voltmeter. A needle type
tester can not be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value. A
moving-iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the
fundamental wave. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter-controlled voltage itself. Hence, that value is
accurate and it is recommended to monitor values using the operation panel.

(3)

PT

No PT can be used in the output side of the inverter. Use a direct-reading meter. (A PT can be used in the input side of the
inverter.)

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

[Measurement conditions]
Constant-torque (100%) load, note that 60Hz or
more should be constantly output 3.7kW, 4-pole
motor, value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%.

269

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers


6.2.3

Measurement of currents

Use a moving-iron type meter on both the input and output sides of the inverter. However, if the carrier frequency exceeds
5kHz, do not use that meter since an overcurrent losses produced in the internal metal parts of the meter will increase and the
meter may burn out. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
Since current on the inverter input side tends to be unbalanced, measurement of three phases is recommended. Correct value
can not be obtained by measuring only one or two phases. On the other hand, the unbalanced ratio of each phase of the output
side current should be within 10%.
When a clamp ammeter is used, always use an effective value detection type. A mean value detection type produces a large
error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value. The value monitored on the operation panel is accurate
if the output frequency varies, and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation panel.
Examples of process value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below.
[Measurement conditions]
[Measurement conditions]
Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%. Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.
%
120
100

%
120

Clip AC power meter


Moving-iron
type

100
80

80

Clamp meter
Clamp-on
wattmeter current
60 measurement

60
Clamp meter

20

Clamp-on
wattmeter current measurement

40

60Hz

Example of measuring inverter input current

6.2.4

Clip AC power meter


Moving-iron type

20

40

60Hz

Example of measuring inverter output current

Use of CT and transducer

A CT may be used in both the input and output sides of the inverter, but the one used should have the largest possible VA
ability because an error will increase if the frequency gets lower.
When using a transducer, use the effective value calculation type which is immune to harmonics.

6.2.5

Measurement of inverter input power factor

Calculate using effective power and apparent power. A power-factor meter can not indicate an exact value.
Total power factor of the inverter

=
=

6.2.6

Effective power
Apparent power
3-phase input power found by 3-wattmeter method

3 V (power supply voltage) I (input current effective value)

Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals + and -)

The output voltage of the converter is developed across terminals + and - and can be measured with a moving-coil type meter
(tester). Although the voltage varies according to the power supply voltage, approximately 270V to 300V (540V to 600V for the
400V class) is output when no load is connected and voltage decreases when a load is connected.
When regenerative energy is returned from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage rises to
nearly 400 to 450V (800V to 900V for the 400V class) maximum.

270

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers


6.2.7

Insulation resistance test using megger

For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test
on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)
Motor
Power
supply

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

500VDC
megger

U
V
W

IM

Inverter

Earth (Ground)

NOTE
Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of
the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.

6.2.8

Pressure test

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Do not conduct a pressure test. Deterioration may occur.

271

MEMO

272

SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter provides the "SPECIFICATIONS" of this product.


Always read the instructions before using the equipment

7.1

Rating............................................................................................. 274

7.2

Common specifications ............................................................... 275

7.3

Outline dimension drawings........................................................ 276

7
273

Rating

7.1
7.1.1

Rating
Inverter rating

Three-phase 400V power supply


Model FR-D740- -EC

022

036

050

080

120

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

Rated capacity (kVA)2

1.2

2.0

3.0

4.6

7.2

9.1

13.0

Rated current (A)

1.2

2.2

3.6

5.0

8.0

12.0

16.0

Output

012

Applicable motor capacity (kW)1

Overload current rating3

150% 60s, 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage4

Three-phase 380 to 480V

Power supply

Rated input voltage/frequency

Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

325 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

5%

Power supply capacity (kVA)5

1.5

2.5

Protective structure (JEM1030)

4.5

5.5

9.5

12

17

3.1

3.1

Enclosed type (IP20)

Cooling system
Approximate mass (kg)

160

Self-cooling
1.2

1.2

Forced air cooling


1.3

1.4

1.5

The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.

The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.

The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.

The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.

The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).

Single-phase 200V power supply


008

014

025

042

070

100

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

Rated capacity (kVA)2

0.3

0.5

1.0

1.6

2.8

3.8

Rated current (A)

0.8

1.4

2.5

4.2

7.0

10.0

Output

Model FR-D720S- -EC


Applicable motor capacity (kW)1

Overload current rating3

150% 60s, 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage4

Three-phase 200 to 240V

Power supply

Rated input voltage/frequency

Single-phase 200 to 240V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

5%

Power supply capacity (kVA)5

0.5

0.9

Protective structure (JEM1030)

2.3

4.0

5.2

Enclosed type (IP20)

Cooling system
Approximate mass (kg)

1.5

Self-cooling
0.5

0.6

0.9

Forced air cooling


1.1

1.5

1.9

The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.

The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.

The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.

The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.

The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).

274

Common specifications

7.2

Common specifications

Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control,
optimum excitation control can be selected)
0.2 to 400Hz
Output frequency range
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 10V/10bit)
0.12Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 5V/9bit)
Frequency setting Analog input
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal4: 0 to 20mA/10bit)
resolution
0.01Hz
Digital input
Within 1% of the max. output frequency (25C 10C)
Analog input
Frequency
accuracy
Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Digital input
Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz
Voltage/frequency characteristics
Constant torque/variable torque pattern can be selected
150% or more (at 1Hz)...when general-purpose magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation is set
Starting torque
Manual torque boost
Torque boost
0.1 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration time setting mode can be selected.
Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) variable
DC injection brake
Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected
Stall prevention operation level
Two points
Terminal 2: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V can be selected
Frequency setting Analog input
Terminal 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected
signal
Entered from operation panel and parameter unit. Frequency setting increments is selectable
Digital input
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
Start signal
Five points
You can select from among multi-speed selection, remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input
selection, JOG operation selection, PID control valid terminal, external thermal input, PU-external operation
Input signal
switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, traverse function selectiom, forward rotation,
reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, external-NET operation switchover,
command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external interlock
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, second
function, multi-speed operation, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline
Operational functions
auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), optimum excitation control, power failure
stop, speed smoothing control, Modbus-RTU

Open collector
output
Relay output

Operating status

For meter
Output points

Analog output

One point
One point
You can select from among inverter operation, up-to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection,
regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current
detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, fan
alarm2, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, PID
output interruption, during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor, remote output, alarm output, fault
output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm
0 to 10VDC: one point

You can select from among output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting, converter
output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value,
converter output voltage peak value, reference voltage output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured
For meter
value, output power, PID deviation, Motor thermal load factor, Inverter thermal load factor
0 to 10VDC
You can select from among output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting,
cumulative energization time, actual operation time, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic
Operation panel
Operating status thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, motor load
factor, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, output power, cumulative
Parameter unit
power, motor thermal load factor, inverter thermal load factor, PTC thermistor resistance.
(FR-PU07)
Fault definition is displayed when the fault occurs and the past 8 fault definitions (output voltage/current/
Fault definition
frequency/cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored
Additional display Operating status Not used
by the parameter Fault definition Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time immediately before the fault occurs

unit (FR-PU04/FR- Interactive


PU07) only
guidance

Function (help) for operation guide

Environment

<Protective functions>
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage
during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection
thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, input phase failure 5, output side earth
(ground) fault overcurrent at start, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation 4, PTC thermistor
operation4, parameter error, PU disconnection, retry count excess 4, CPU fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush
Protective/warning function
resistance overheat, analog input error, stall prevention operation, output current detection value exceeded
<Warning functions>
Fan alarm2, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU stop, parameter write error,
regenerative brake prealarm 4, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance output 4, undervoltage,
operation panel lock, password locked, inverter reset
-10C to +50C (non-freezing) 3
Surrounding air temperature
90%RH maximum (non-condensing)
Ambient humidity
-20C to +65C
Storage temperature1
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Atmosphere
Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s 2 or less
Altitude/vibration
1 Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
2 As the FR-D740-022 or less, FR-D720S-042 or less is not provided with the cooling fan, this alarm does not function.
3 When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40C or less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0cm clearance).
4 This protective function does not function in the initial status.
5 This protective function is available with the three-phase power input specification model only.

275

SPECIFICATIONS

Operation specifications
Indication

Output signal
points

Output signal

Control specifications

Control method

Outline dimension drawings

7.3

Outline dimension drawings

FR-D720S-008 to 042

128

118

1-5 hole

Rating
plate

4
5

5
56

D1
D

68

Inverter Type

D1

FR-D720S-008 to 014

80.5

10

FR-D720S-025

142.5

42

FR-D720S-042

162.5

62

(Unit: mm)

FR-D740-012 to 080
FR-D720S-070

FAN *

128

118

2-5 hole

Rating
plate

5
96

D1

108

FR-D740-012, 022 are not provided with the cooling fan.

Inverter Type

D1

FR-D740-012, 022

129.5

54

FR-D740-036

135.5

FR-D740-050

155.5

FR-D740-080

165.5

FR-D720S-070

155.5

60

(Unit: mm)

276

Outline dimension drawings

FR-D720S-100

FAN

150

138

2-5 hole

Rating
plate

5
128

60
145

140

(Unit: mm)

FR-D740-120, 160

FAN

150

138

2-5 hole

Rating
plate

10

208
220

68
155

(Unit: mm)

SPECIFICATIONS

7
277

Outline dimension drawings


Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)
<Outline drawing>

<Panel cut dimension drawing>


25.05

(14.2)

(11.45)
2.5

83
*1

40

40

Air-bleeding
hole

51

50

*1

4-R1
*1

57.8

67

56.8

135

*1

26.5

26.5

4-4 hole
(Effective depth of the

installation screw hole 5.0)


M3 screw *2

80.3
1

When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.

Select the installation screw whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screw hole.

(Unit: mm)

Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU04)


<Outline drawing>

<Panel cut dimension drawing>


16.5
24

23.75

13

11.75

1.5

17

20

1.25

81.5

14.5
80

125

5-4 hole

13 1.5

48

10.5

18.5

15

21.5

72

5-M3 screw
Effective
depth of the

installation
screw hole 4.5

40

40

(Unit: mm)

Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective depth of the installation screw hole.

Enclosure surface operation panel (option) (FR-PA07)


<Outline drawing>

<Panel cut dimension drawing>


22

68

22

59
2-M3 screw

(Unit: mm)

278

APPENDIX

This chapter provides the "APPENDIX" of this product.


Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

279

Appendix1 Index
Numerics

15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM,


RH)(REX signal) .............................................................84, 108

Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)................... 141


Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode) ............... 50
Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (TH).................. 95, 248
Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP signal).... 95, 114
Electronic Thermal Relay Function Load Factor................. 123
Extended parameter display (Pr. 160) .................................. 157
External thermal relay input (OH signal) ........................ 95, 108
External thermal relay operation (E.OHT)...................... 95, 252
External/NET operation switchover (turning on X66 selects
NET operation) (X66 signal)....................................... 108, 168

A
Acceleration time, deceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr.
20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) ......................................................91
Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)..............................94
Actual operation time ...............................................................123
Alarm output (LF signal) ..................................114, 179, 195, 225
Analog input fault (E.AIE) ........................................................253
Analog input selection(Pr. 73, Pr. 267) .................................145
Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450).................................................98
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start
(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr.
299, Pr. 611)..........................................................................131
Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31
to Pr. 36) ..................................................................................79

F
Fan alarm (FN) ................................................................. 225, 249
Fan fault output (FAN signal) ......................................... 114, 225
Fault or alarm indication.................................................. 123, 241
Fault output (ALM signal)................................................ 114, 117
Fault output 3 (power-off signal) (Y91 signal) ............. 114, 117
Faults history (E.---) ................................................................. 241
Fin overheat (E.FIN) ................................................................ 251
Forward rotation command (assigned to STF terminal (Pr.
178) only) (STF signal)................................................ 108, 112
Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) ......................................... 233
Frequency setting value .................................................. 123, 128
Front cover .................................................................................... 5

B
Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)......................80
Basic operation (factory setting)...............................................49
Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current) (Pr. 125,
Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)) ................148
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE) ...............................251
Buzzer control (Pr. 990)...........................................................238

C
Cables and wiring length ...........................................................16
Change the parameter setting value .......................................51
Changing the control logic.........................................................21
Checking the inverter and converter modules .....................262
Cleaning .....................................................................................262
Command source switchover (turning on X67 makes Pr. 338
and Pr. 339 commands valid) (X67 signal) ..............108, 171
Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) ...........182
Condition selection of function validity by second function
selection signal (RT signal).................................................111
Connection of a DC reactor (FR-HEL) ....................................32
Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor
(FR-ABR) .................................................................................28
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)...................................30
Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC)......31
Connection of the power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) ....................................................................................32
Connection to the PU connector ..............................................26
Control circuit terminal ...............................................................19
Converter Output Voltage .......................................................123
Converter output voltage peak value.....................................123
Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) .............................225
Cooling system types for inverter panel....................................9
CPU fault (E.CPU)....................................................................253
Cumulative energization time .................................................123
Cumulative power.....................................................................123
Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) 231
Current average value monitor signal (Y93 signal).....114, 231

General-purpose magnetic flux vector control


(Pr. 71, Pr. 80) ........................................................................ 70

H
Heatsink overheat pre-alarm (FIN signal) .................... 114, 251
High speed operation command (RH signal)................. 84, 108

I
Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) ................. 178
Input phase loss (E.ILF) .................................................. 141, 251
Input terminal function selection(Pr. 178 to Pr. 182) .......... 108
Input Terminal Status .............................................................. 123
Input/output phase loss protection selection
(Pr. 251, Pr. 872).................................................................. 141
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)................................. 253
Insulation resistance test using megger ............................... 271
Inverter I/O Terminal Monitor ......................................... 123, 126
Inverter installation environment................................................ 7
Inverter operation ready (RY signal) ............................. 114, 116
Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)............. 110
Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
(E.THT) ............................................................................ 95, 250
Inverter placement ..................................................................... 10
Inverter reset (Err.)........................................................... 244, 247
Inverter reset (RES signal) ............................................. 108, 244
Inverter run enable signal(FR-HC/FR-CV connection) (X10
signal)............................................................................. 105, 108
Inverter running (RUN signal) ........................................ 114, 116
Inverter thermal load factor..................................................... 123
Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques .. 36

D
Daily and periodic inspection ..................................................261
Daily inspection.........................................................................260
Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)..............215
DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12) .....................................104
Detection of output frequency
(SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43) ........................................118
Display of the life of the inverter parts
(Pr. 255 to Pr. 259).......................................................226, 262
During PID control activated (PID signal) .............114, 207, 215
During retry (Y64 signal) .................................................114, 139

280

J
Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)................................................... 86
JOG operation selection (JOG signal) ............................ 86, 108

L
Leakage currents and countermeasures................................ 34
Life alarm (Y90 signal) .................................................... 114, 226
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)................................................. 82
Low-speed operation command (RL signal) .................. 84, 108

M
Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)............... 237
Maintenance signal output (MT).................................... 230, 248
Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) ........................ 230
Maintenance timer signal (Y95 signal) ......................... 114, 230
Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)......................................... 69
Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18) ............. 78
Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals
P-N) ........................................................................................ 270
Measurement of currents........................................................ 270
Measurement of inverter input power factor ........................ 270
Measurement of powers ......................................................... 269
Measurement of voltages and use of PT ............................. 269
Middle-speed operation command (RM signal) ............ 84, 108
Mitsubishi inverter protocol
(computer link communication).......................................... 183
Modbus RTU communication specifications (Pr. 117, Pr. 118,
Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549) ..................... 195
Monitor display selection of DU/PU and terminal AM (Pr. 52,
Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564) ...... 123
Motor Load Factor ................................................................... 123
Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay) (Pr.
9, Pr. 51).................................................................................. 95
Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC
thermistor protection) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51, Pr. 561) .................... 95
Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
(E.THM) ........................................................................... 95, 251
Motor thermal load factor........................................................ 123
Motor Torque ............................................................................ 123

N
Names and functions of the operation panel......................... 48

O
Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to
Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)..................................................... 84
Operation mode at power-on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340).................... 170
Operation mode selection (Pr. 79) ........................................ 160
Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation
selection (Pr. 161)................................................................ 235
Operation panel lock (HOLD)................................. 235, 246, 246
Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr.
121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502) .......................................................... 179
Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) ...................................... 142
Output current................................................................... 123, 128
Output current detection (Y12 signal)................... 114, 114, 119
Output current detection function (Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr.
150 to Pr. 153)...................................................................... 119
Output current detection value exceeded ............................ 253
Output Current Peak Value ............................................ 123, 128
Output frequency ............................................................. 123, 128
Output frequency detection (FU signal) ....................... 114, 118
Output phase loss (E.LF)................................................ 141, 252
Output power ............................................................................ 123
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start
(E.GF) ............................................................................ 141, 252
Output stop (MRS signal) ............................................... 108, 110
Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192)...... 114
Output Terminal Status ................................................... 123, 123
Output voltage .......................................................................... 123
Overcurrent trip during acceleration (E.OC1)...................... 249
Overcurrent trip during constant speed (E.OC2) ................ 249
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop (E.OC3) ........ 249
Overload alarm (OL signal) .............................................. 74, 114

P
Parameter list ............................................................................. 52
Parameter storage device fault
(control circuit board) (E.PE).............................................. 252
Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)........................... 156
Parameter write error (Er1 to Er4)......................................... 246
Password function ................................................................... 158
Password locked ...................................................................... 246

Periodic inspection ...................................................................260


Peripheral devices........................................................................4
PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575, Pr. 577)................207
PID control valid terminal (X14 signal)..................108, 207, 215
PID Deviation ............................................................123, 207, 215
PID Forward/Reverse Rotation Output
(RL signal) .............................................................114, 207, 215
PID lower limit (FDN signal)....................................114, 207, 215
PID Measured Value................................................123, 207, 215
PID Set Point.............................................................123, 207, 215
PID upper limit (FUP signal) ...................................114, 207, 215
Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal) ............114, 137
Power supply harmonics ...........................................................38
Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261)..............137
Pressure test .............................................................................271
PTC thermistor operation ........................................................252
PTC thermistor resistance.........................................................95
PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991)...........................................238
PU disconnection (E.PUE)......................................153, 179, 253
PU display language selection(Pr. 145)................................234
PU operation external interlock (X12 signal)................108, 160
PU stop (PS) .....................................................................153, 248
PU/NET operation switchover (turning on X65 selects PU
operation) (X65 signal) ................................................108, 168
PU-external operation switchover (turning on X16 selects
external operation) (X16).............................................108, 167
PWM carrier frequency and soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr.
240).........................................................................................143

R
Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55,
Pr. 56).....................................................................................128
Reference voltage output ................................................123, 129
Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883,
Pr. 885, Pr. 886) ...................................................................223
Regenerative brake duty .................................................105, 123
Regenerative brake prealarm (RB)................................105, 248
Regenerative brake prealarm (RBP signal) .................105, 114
Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
(E.OV1) ..........................................................................223, 250
Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
(E.OV2) ..........................................................................223, 250
Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
(E.OV3) ..........................................................................223, 250
Remote output (REM signal) ..........................................114, 121
Remote output selection
(REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497) ........................................121
Remote setting (RH, RM, RL signal) ...............................88, 108
Remote setting function (Pr. 59) ..............................................88
Replacement of parts...............................................................263
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
(Pr. 75) ...................................................................................153
Response level of analog input and noise elimination
(Pr. 74) ...................................................................................147
Retry count excess (E.RET) ...........................................139, 253
Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ................................139
Reverse rotation command (assigned to STR terminal (Pr.
179) only) (STR singnal) .............................................108, 112
Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ....................157
RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40).......................234

S
Second function selection (RT signal) ..........................108, 111
Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)...............105
Setting dial push .........................................................................51
Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247) ...................................73
Specification of main circuit terminal .......................................15
Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37) ............................122
Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653)........................................144
Stall prevention (E.OLT)....................................................74, 251
Stall prevention (overcurrent) (OL) ..................................74, 247
Stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL).................................223, 247
Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr.

281

156, Pr. 157, Pr. 277).............................................................74


Start command source and frequency command source
during communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551)
171
Start self-holding selection (STOP signal)....................108, 112
Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr.
250).........................................................................................112
Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr.
571)...........................................................................................93
Stop selection (Pr. 250) ...........................................................107

T
Terminal 4 input selection (AU signal) ..........................108, 145
Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter Pr. 645, C1
(Pr.901)) .................................................................................129
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power
supply and the motor wiring ..................................................15
Terminal connection diagram ...................................................14
To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance
(offline auto tuning) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90,
Pr. 96).....................................................................................100
Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597)...................................221

U
Undervoltage (UV)....................................................................248
Up-to-frequency signal (SU signal)................................114, 118
Use of CT and transducer .......................................................270

V
V/F switchover (V/F cntrol is exercised when X18 is on) (X18
signal) .....................................................................................108

W
Wiring and configuation of PUconnector ..............................175
Wiring cover...................................................................................6
Wiring instructions ......................................................................25
Wiring of control circuit ..............................................................23

Z
Zero current detection (Y13 signal) ...............................114, 119

282

MEMO

283

REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date

Manual Number

Dec., 2007
Mar., 2008

IB(NA)-0600353ENG-A
IB(NA)-0600353ENG-B

Apr., 2008

IB(NA)-0600353ENG-C

Revision
First edition
Partial modification
Introduced products on bar terminals
Instruction Code (Multi command, Inverter type monitor)
Additions
FR-D720S-008 to 100

For Maximum Safety


Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to
install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product
are likely to cause a serious accident.
Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.

284

IB(NA)-0600353ENG-C

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
German Branch
Gothaer Strae 8
D-40880 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
French Branch
25, Boulevard des Bouvets
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Irish Branch
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount
IRL-Dublin 24
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Italian Branch
Viale Colleoni 7
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI)
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
Spanish Branch
Carretera de Rub 76-80
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Valls (Barcelona)
Phone: +34 93 / 565 3131
Fax: +34 93 / 589 1579
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
UK Branch
Travellers Lane
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Office Tower Z 14 F
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00
Fax: +1 847 478 22 83

EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
GEVA
Wiener Strae 89
AT-2500 Baden
Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20
Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60
KONING & HARTMAN B.V.
Industrial Solutions
Woluwelaan 31
BE-1800 Vilvoorde
Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40
Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49
TEHNIKON
Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711
BY-220030 Minsk
Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26
Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26
AKHNATON
4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21
BG-1756 Sofia
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 05 8
Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1
INEA CR d.o.o.
Losinjska 4 a
HR-10000 Zagreb
Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03
Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03
AutoCont C.S., s.r.o.
Technologicka 374/6
CZ-708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec
Phone: +420 (0)59 / 5691 150
Fax: +420 (0)59 / 5691 199
B:TECH A.S.
U Borove 69
CZ - 58001 Havlickuv Brod
Phone: +420 (0)569 777 777
Fax: +420 (0)569-777 778
BEIJER ELECTRONICS A/S
Lykkegardsvej 17, 1.
DK-4000 Roskilde
Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 56 26
Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26
BEIJER ELECTRONICS EESTI O
Prnu mnt.160i
EE-11317 Tallinn
Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40
Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49
BEIJER ELECTRONICS OY
Jaakonkatu 2
FIN-01620 Vantaa
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500
Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501
UTECO A.B.E.E.
5, Mavrogenous Str.
GR-18542 Piraeus
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999
Meltrade Ltd.
Fert utca 14.
HU-1107 Budapest
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727
BEIJER ELECTRONICS SIA
Vestienas iela 2
LV-1009 Riga
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281
BEIJER ELECTRONICS UAB
Savanoriu Pr. 187
LT-02300 Vilnius
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980

EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
INTEHSIS srl
bld. Traian 23/1
MD-2060 Kishinev
Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242